0

Siemens AG 2008

Introduction
0/2
0/2
0/2
0/3

Guide to selecting and ordering the motors

Overview
Recommendations for drive selection step-by-step to the required motor
Determining the motor type according to cooling method, degree of protection
and frame design
Introduction motors
1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

Introduction motors
1LE1/1PC1

0/7
0/7

Order No. code

Overview

0/94
0/94

Order No. code

Overview

0/8
0/8

Special versions
Overview

0/95
0/95

Special versions
Overview

0/13
0/13
0/13

General technical data

Overview
Cut-away diagram of a low-voltage
motor
Designs in accordance with standards
and specifications
Colors and paint finish
Packaging, safety notes,
documentation and test certificates
Voltages, currents and frequencies
Outputs
Efficiency, power factor,
rated torque, rated speed and
direction of rotation
Rating plate and extra rating plates
Coolant temperature and site altitude
Windings and insulation
Motor protection
Heating and ventilation
Motor connection and connection box
Types of construction
Mechanical design and degrees of
protection
Balance and vibration quantity
Shaft and rotor
Bearings and lubrication
Modular technology
1XP8 001 rotary pulse encoder
Separately driven fan
Brakes
Combinations of basic versions
Special technology

0/97
0/97
0/97

0/120
0/121
0/122
0/127
0/128
0/129
0/130

General technical data

Overview
Cut-away diagram of a low-voltage
motor
Designs in accordance with standards
and specifications
Colors and paint finish
Packaging, safety notes,
documentation and test certificates
Voltages, currents and frequencies
Outputs
Efficiency, power factor,
rated torque, rated speed and
direction of rotation
Rating plate and extra rating plates
Coolant temperature and site altitude
Windings and insulation
Motor protection
Heating and ventilation
Motor connection and connection box
Types of construction
Mechanical design and degrees of
protection
Balance and vibration quantity
Shaft and rotor
Bearings and lubrication
Modular technology
1XP8 012 rotary pulse encoder
Separately driven fan
Brakes

0/134

Special technology

0/14
0/17
0/20
0/22
0/28
0/29

0/30
0/31
0/32
0/34
0/36
0/38
0/52
0/54
0/56
0/56
0/58
0/75
0/75
0/76
0/77
0/84
0/85

0/98
0/100
0/102
0/103
0/105
0/105

0/106
0/107
0/108
0/110
0/111
0/113
0/116
0/118

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction

Guide to selecting and ordering the motors

Overview
These recommendations for drive selection guide you step-by-step through this catalog to the required motor.
Step 1

Technical requirements for the motor

Determine the required

product profile, the following are required:

Rated frequency and

rated voltage

3 AC 50/60 Hz,
400, 500 or 690 V

Duty

Standard duty (continuous duty S1 according to DIN EN 60034-1)

Degree of protection or type of

explosion protection required

IP..

Rated speed (No. of poles)

n =................. rpm

Rated output

P =................. kW

Rated torque

M = P 9550/n =................. Nm

Type of construction

IM..

Step 2

Environmental requirements for the motor

Determine the
installation conditions

Ambient temperature

40 C

>40 C

Site altitude

1000 m

>1000 m

Factors for derating

None

Determine the factor for derating

(for derating factor, see Technical
information Coolant temperature
and site altitude)

For preliminary selection of the motor, see subsequent pages and the corresponding
Preliminary selection of the motor tables in the different catalog parts

Step 3
Determine the range of
possible motors

Select the frame size and therefore the possible motors on the basis of the following parameters:
cooling method, degree of protection, rated output, rated speed and rated torque range.
Note: The standard temperature range of the motors is from 20 to +40 C.

Step 4

Detailed selection of the motor

Determine the
basic Order No.
of the motor

Determine the motor Order No. according to the following parameters: rated output, rated speed, rated torque
and rated current from the Selection and ordering data for the motors that have already been identified as
possibilities.

Step 5

Selection of the special versions (see under Special versions)

Complete the motor

Order No.

Determine special versions and the associated order codes (e. g. special voltages and types of construction,
motor protection and degrees of protection, windings and insulation, colors and paint finish, mountings and
technology, etc.) .

Step 6
Select the frequency
converter, if required

For Order No. of the converter as well as its selection, see Catalogs D 11, D 11.1 , DA 51.2 and DA 51.3.

Note on using this catalog

Due to the wide range of possible versions of low-voltage
motors, the special features of the various motor series are not
explained in detail in each case in this catalog part.
The availability of individual technical designs can be established from catalog parts 1 to 10.

0/2

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction
Guide to selecting and ordering the motors
Determine the motor type according to cooling method, degree of protection and frame design
(for further selection according to speed or number of poles, rated output, rated torque, rated speed
and rated current, see the relevant Preselection of the motor tables in catalog parts 1 to 10)
Applications for
surface-cooled motor types

Cooling Standard Frame

method designa- design
tion for
degree of
protection to
DIN EN
60034
Part 5

Motor type (Positions 1 to 3 of the Order No.) + type series

(Position 4 of the Order No.)
Rated output at 50 Hz

Motor frame sizes (shaft heights)

56 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 355 400 450

New generation motors 1LE1/1PC1

General Line motors with
shorter delivery time

Selfventilated
Energy-saving motors with
Selfimproved efficiency
venti(Improved Efficiency EFF2)
lated
Energy-saving motors with high
Selfefficiency (High Efficiency EFF1)
ventilated
Motors with increased output and Selfimproved efficiency
ventilated
Motors with increased output and Selfhigh efficiency
ventilated
Motors without external fan and
Forcedfan cover with improved efficiency aircooled
Motors without external fan and
Forcedfan cover with high efficiency
aircooled
Motors without external fan and
Selffan cover with improved efficiency cooled
Motors without external fan and
Selffan cover with high efficiency
cooled

Catalog Part 1
IP55

Aluminum

1LE1
1.5 ... 18.5 kW

IP55

Aluminum

1LE1
0.75 ... 18.5 kW

IP55

Aluminum

1LE1
0.75 ... 18.5 kW

IP55

Aluminum

1LE1
2.2 ... 22 kW

IP55

Aluminum

1LE1
2.2 ... 22 kW

IP55

Aluminum

1LE1
0.75 ... 18.5 kW

IP55

Aluminum

1LE1
0.75 ... 18.5 kW

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Aluminum

1PC1
0.3 ... 7.4 kW
1PC1
0.37 ... 9 kW

Standard motors (up to frame size 315 L)

Catalog Part 2

Energy-saving motors with

improved efficiency
(Improved Efficiency EFF 2)

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Pole-changing motors with

improved efficiency

Selfventilated
Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Selfcooled

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Energy-saving motors with high

efficiency
(High Efficiency EFF1)
Motors with increased output

Motors without external fans

1LA7
0.06 18.5 kW

1LE1/1PC1
1LA6
0.75 18.5 kW

1LA7
0.15 17 kW

1LA5
11 45 kW
1LG4
11 200 kW
1LA5
18
31 kW

1LA9
0.06 37 kW
1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA9
0.14 53 kW

1LP7
0.045 7 kW

1LE1/1PC1

1LG4
15 110 kW
1LP5
5.5
16.5 kW
1LP4
3.7 67 kW

Non-standard motors (frame size 315 and above)

Catalog Part 3

Motors for mains-fed operation

Selfventilated
Motors for converter-fed operation Selfventilated
Motors with mounted separately
Forceddriven fan for converter-fed opera- air
tion
cooled
Motors with through-ventilation for Selfmains-fed operation
ventilated
Motors with through-ventilation for Selfconverter-fed operation
ventilated

IP55

Cast iron

1LA8
160 1000 kW

IP55

Cast iron

1LA8
145 1000 kW

IP55

Cast iron

1PQ8
145 1000 kW

IP23

Cast iron

1LL8
200 1250 kW

IP23

Cast iron

1LL8
200 1250 kW

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/3

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction

Guide to selecting and ordering the motors

Determining the motor type according to cooling method, degree of protection and frame design (continued)
Applications for
surface-cooled motor types

Cooling Standard Frame

method designa- design
tion for
degree of
protection to
DIN EN
60034
Part 5

Motor type (Positions 1 to 3 of the Order No.) + type series

(Position 4 of the Order No.)
Rated output at 50 Hz

Motor frame sizes (shaft heights)

56 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 355 400 450

Explosion-proof motors

Catalog Part 4

Motors in Zone 1
with type of protection e
(Zone 1 Exe II T3)

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Motors in Zone 1
with type of protection de
(Zone 1 Exde IIC T4)
Motors in Zone 2
with type of protection n

Selfventilated
Selfventilated

IP55

Cast iron

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

1MA7
0.12 16 kW
1MA6
1.3 165 kW
1MJ6
0.25 37 kW

1MJ7
18.5 132 kW

1LA7
0.09 18.5 kW
1LA9
0.06 37 kW
1LA6
0.75 18.5 kW

1LG4/1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA8
145 1000 kW

Motors in Zone 21
with explosion protection

Motors in Zone 22
with explosion protection

Selfventilated

Selfventilated

IP65

Aluminum

IP65

Aluminum

IP65

Cast iron

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

1LA7
0.09 18.5 kW
1LA9
0.06 37 kW

1LA5
11 45 kW

1LG4/1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA5
11 45 kW

1LA7
0.09 18.5 kW
1LA9
0.06 37 kW
1LA6
0.75 18.5 kW

1LG4/1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA8
145 1000 kW

Motors operating with frequency converters

Catalog Part 5

Surface-cooled motors with standard insulation for voltages 500 V

For standard motors, non-standard motors, explosion-proof motors and fan motors, see catalog part 5.
Motors with special insulation for
1LA7
SelfIP55
Aluminum
voltages up to 690 V
1.5 18.5 kW
venti(standard motors)
lated
IP55
Cast iron
Motors with special insulation for
voltages up to 690 V
(non-standard motors)
Motors with mounted separately
driven fan with special insulation
for voltages up to 690 V

0/4

SelfIP55
ventilated
Forced- IP55
air
cooled

Siemens D 81.1 2008

1LA5
15 45 kW
1LG6
11 200 kW

Cast iron

1LA8
145 980 kW

Cast iron

1PQ8
145 980 kW

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction
Guide to selecting and ordering the motors
Determining the motor type according to cooling method, degree of protection and frame design (continued)
Applications for
surface-cooled motor types

Cooling Standard Frame

method designa- design
tion for
degree of
protection to
DIN EN
60034
Part 5

Motor type (Positions 1 to 3 of the Order No.) + type series

(Position 4 of the Order No.)
Rated output at 50 Hz

Energy-saving motors with

improved efficiency
(Improved Efficiency EFF2)

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

1LA7
0.06 18.5 kW

IP55

Cast iron

Motors with increased output

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Motor frame sizes (shaft heights)

56 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 355 400 450

Pump motors

Catalog Part 6
1LE1/1PC1
1LA6
0.75 18.5 kW

1LA5
11 45 kW
1LG4
11 200 kW

1LA9
0.14 53 kW
1LG4
15 110 kW

Fan motors
Motors in pole-changing version

Motors without external fan and

without fan cover

Catalog Part 7

Forced- IP55
air
cooled
IP55

Aluminum

1LA7
0.15 17 kW

1PP7
0.09 18.5 kW

1LE1/1PC1

Cast iron

1LA5
18
31 kW
1LG4
4.5 175 kW
1PP5
11
37 kW
1PP4
11 200 kW

Compressor motors
Energy-saving motors with high
efficiency

Catalog Part 8
Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Selfventilated

IP55

Cast iron

Temperature/time class F200, F300 Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Motors with increased output

Non-standard motor for mains-fed

and converter-fed operation

1LA9
0.06 37 kW
1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA9
0.14 53 kW
1LG4
15 110 kW
1LA8
160 1000 kW

Smoke extraction motors

Catalog Part 9

Forced- IP55
air
cooled

Temperature/time class F400

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

IP55

Cast iron

Forced- IP55
air
cooled

Cast iron

Selfventilated

1LA7
0.37 18.5 kW
(0.09 3.85 kW
pole-changing)

1LA5
15 45 kW
(4.05
8.6 kW polechanging)
1LG6
37
200 kW

1PP7
0.37 18.5 kW
(0.09 3.85 kW
pole-changing)

1PP5
15 45 kW
(4.05
8.6 kW polechanging)
1PP6
37
200 kW

1LA6
1LG6
1.5 18.5 kW
15 200 kW
(0.3 3.45 kW
pole-changing)
1PP6
1.5 200 kW (0.3 3.45 kW
pole-changing)

Marine motors (motors for drives on ships below deck)

Type approved standard motors
up to frame size 315 L
Energy-saving motors with
improved efficiency
(Improved Efficiency EFF2)
Type approved standard motors
up to frame size 315 L
Energy-saving motors with high
efficiency
(High Efficiency EFF1)
Type approved, explosion-proof
motors up to frame size 315 L
Motors in Zone 1
with type of protection e
(Zone 1 Exe II T3)

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Catalog Part 10
1LA7
0.06 18.5 kW
1LA6
0.75 18.5 kW

1LA5
11 45 kW
1LG4
11 200 kW

1LA9
0.06 37 kW
1LG6
11 200 kW
1MA7
0.12 16 kW
1MA6
1.3 165

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/5

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction

Guide to selecting and ordering the motors

Determining the motor type according to cooling method, degree of protection and frame design (continued)
Applications for
surface-cooled motor types

Cooling Standard Frame

method designa- design
tion for
degree of
protection to
DIN EN
60034
Part 5

Motor type (Positions 1 to 3 of the Order No.) + type series

(Position 4 of the Order No.)
Rated output at 50 Hz

Motor frame sizes (shaft heights)

56 63 71 80 90 100 112 132 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 355 400 450

Marine motors (motors for drives on ships below deck) (continue)

Type approved, explosion-proof
motors up to frame size 315 L
Motors in Zone 1 with type of protection de (Zone 1 Exde IIC T4)
Type approved, explosion-proof
motors up to frame size 315 L
Motors in Zone 2 with type of protection n

Selfventilated

IP55

Cast iron

Selfventilated

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

IP55

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

Explosion-proof motors up to frame Selfsize 315 L Motors in Zone 21 with ventiprotection against dust explosions lated

Explosion-proof motors up to frame Selfsize 315 L Motors in Zone 22 with ventiprotection against dust explosions lated

Type approved fan motors Motors Selfin pole-changing version

ventilated

Type approved fan motors Motors Forced- IP55

without external fan and without fan air
cover
cooled
IP55
Standard motors up to frame size
315 L

Smoke-extraction motors
Temperature/time classes F200
and F300

Selfcooled

Aluminum

IP55

Cast iron

IP55
Forced- IP55
air
cooled
IP55
Self-ventilated
Forcedair
cooled
Non-standard motor frame size 315 Selfand above Motors for mains-fed ventiand converter-fed operation
lated
Non-standard motors frame size
Forced315 and above Forced-air cooled air
motors with mounted separately
cooled
driven fan for converter-fed operation
Non-standard motors frame size 315 Selfand above Self-ventilated motors ventiwith through-ventilation for mainslated
fed and converter-fed operation
Non-standard motors frame size
Forced315 and above Water-cooled
air
motors for mains-fed and concooled
verter-fed operation
Explosion-proof motors frame size Self315 and above Self-ventilated
ventimotors in Zones 2, 22 with type of lated
protection n or protection against
dust explosions
1)

Aluminum

Siemens D 81.1 2008

1LA7
0.09 18.5 kW
1LA9
0.06 37 kW

1LG4/1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA5
11 45 kW

1LG4/1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA5
11 45 kW

1LA7
0.09 18.5 kW
1LA9
0.06 37 kW
1LA6
0.75 18.5 kW
1LA7
0.15 17 kW

1PP7
0.09 18.5 kW

1LP7
0.045 7 kW

1LA7
0.09 18.5 kW

1PP7
0.09 18.5 kW

1LG4/1LG6
11 200 kW
1LA5
18
31 kW
1LG4
4.5 83 kW
1PP5
15
37 kW
1PP4
11 200 kW
1LP5
5.5
16.5 kW
1LP4
3.7 67 kW
1LA5
4.05
45 kW
1LG6
37 200 kW
1PP5
4.05
45 kW

Cast iron

1PP6
37
200 kW

IP55

Cast iron

IP55

Cast iron

IP55

Cast iron

1LA8
145 1000 kW

IP55

Cast iron

1PQ8
145 1000 kW

IP23

Cast iron

1LL8
180 1250 kW

IP55

Steel

IP55

Cast iron

1LH8 motor frame size 450, rated output 485 ... 1150 kW

0/6

1LA6
0.75 18.5 kW

Cast iron
Aluminum

1MJ7
18.5 132 kW

1LA7
0.09 -18.5 kW
1LA9
0.06 37 kW

Cast iron

IP55

Self-ven- IP55
tilated

Smoke-extraction motors
Temperature/time class F400

Aluminum

Catalog Part 10
1MJ6
0.25 37 kW

1LA6
0.3 22 kW
1PP6
0.3200 kW

1LG6
15 200 kW

1)

1LA8
160 1000 kW

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Order No. code

Overview
The Order No. comprises a combination of letters and numbers
and for clarity it is subdivided into two blocks which are connected by hyphens,
e. g.
1LA5223-4AA19-Z
M1F + A11 + G17
The first block (positions 1 to 7) identifies the motor type; further
characteristics of the version are coded in the second block
(positions 8 to 12).
Structure of the Order No.:

For deviations in the second block from the catalog codes, either
-Z or 9 should be used as appropriate.
Ordering data:
Complete Order No. and order code(s) or plain text.
If a quotation has been requested, please specify the quotation number in addition to the Order No.
When ordering a complete motor as a spare part, please
specify the works serial No. for the previously supplied motor
as well as the Order No.
Position:

1
1

L
M

G
A

1
1
1

L
L
P

L
P
P

10 11 12

IEC squirrel-cage motors, surface-cooled

Positions 1 to 3:
Digit, letter, letter

Position 4:
Digit

Positions 5 to 7:
3 digits
Position 8:
Digit
Positions 9 to 10:
Letter
Position 11:
Digit
Position 12:
Digit

Self-ventilated by fan mounted on and driven by rotor, aluminum or

cast-iron housing
Self-ventilated by fan mounted on and driven by rotor, cast-iron housing
Self-ventilated by fan mounted on and driven by rotor, increased safety,
type of protection Ex e II
Self-ventilated by fan mounted on and driven by rotor, explosion-proof
enclosure, type of protection Ex de IIC
Self-ventilated with through-ventilation, cast-iron housing
Self-cooled without external fan, aluminum and cast-iron housing
Forced-air cooled by air flow from the fan to be driven,
aluminum or cast-iron housing
Forced-air cooled by separately driven fan, cast-iron housing
Type series 4
Type series 5
Type series 6
Type series 7
Type series 8
Type series 9
Motor frame size (frame size comprising shaft height and construction
length, codes from 050 to 457)

4
5
6
7
8
9

Number of poles
Version
Voltage, circuit and frequency
Type of construction
Special order versions:
Coded Order code also required
Not coded Plain text also required

- Z

Ordering example
Selection criteria
Motor type
Motor frame size/No. of poles/speed
Rated output
Voltage and frequency
Type of construction

Requirement
Standard motor with improved efficiency, IP55
degree of protection, aluminum housing
4-pole/1500 rpm
45 kW
230 V/400 VY, 50 Hz
IM V5 with protective cover

Special versions

3 PTC thermistors
Mounted separately driven fan

Structure of the Order No.

1LA5
1LA5223-4AA
1LA5223-4AA1
1LA5223-4AA19
M1F
1LA5223-4AA19Z
M1F A11
1LA5223-4AA19Z
M1F A11 G17

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/7

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

Special versions

Overview
The order codes and availability are assigned to the individual
motor series in the Selection and ordering data in the individual
catalog parts 2 to 10.

For voltages, see Voltages, currents and frequencies in the

Introduction as well as in catalog parts 2 to 10.
For types of construction, see Types of construction in the
Introduction as well as in catalog parts 2 to 10.

All available options are listed according to topics in the following table. An alphanumerical listing according to order codes can be
found in the appendix under Overview of order codes.
Order code

Special versions

For further information,

see Page

Motor protection
A10
A11
A12
A15
A16
A23
A25
A31
A60
A61
A72
A78
A80

With PTC thermistors for alarm for converter-fed operation in Zones 2, 21, 22
Motor protection through PTC thermistor with 3 embedded temperature sensors for tripping
Motor protection through PTC thermistor with 6 embedded temperature sensors for tripping and alarm
Motor protection with PTC thermistors for converter-fed operation with 3 or 4 embedded temperature sensors for
tripping
Motor protection with PTC thermistors for converter-fed operation with 6 or 8 embedded temperature sensors for
alarm and tripping
Motor temperature detection with embedded temperature sensor KTY 84-130
Motor temperature detection with embedded temperature sensors 2 x KTY 84-130
Temperature detectors for tripping
Installation of 3 PT 100 resistance thermometers in stator winding
Installation of 6 PT 100 resistance thermometers in stator winding
Installation of 2 PT 100 screw-in resistance thermometers (basic circuit) for rolling-contact bearings
Installation of 2 PT 100 screw-in resistance thermometers (3-wire circuit) for rolling-contact bearings
Installation of 2 PT 100 double screw-in resistance thermometers (3-wire circuit) for rolling-contact bearings

0/33, 4/82
0/34, 0/38
0/35
0/35, 4/3, 4/82
0/33, 4/3, 4/82
0/35
0/35
0/34
0/36
0/36
0/36
0/36
0/36

Motor connection and connection box

G55
G56
K06
K09
K10
K11
K15
K53
K54
K55
K57
K83
K84
K85
L00
L01
L13
L44
L45
L47
L48
L49
L51
L52
L97
M46
M47
M50
M58
M64
M69
M88

ECOFAST motor plug Han-Drive 10e for 230 V/400 VY

ECOFAST motor plug EMC Han-Drive 10e for 230 V/400 VY
Two-part plate on connection box
Connection box on RHS
Connection box on LHS
Connection box on top, feet screwed on
Connection box in cast-iron version
Explosion-proof connection box, Ex d IIC type of protection
One cable gland, metal
Cable gland, maximum configuration
Cable gland DIN 89280, maximum configuration
Rotation of the connection box through 90, entry from DE
Rotation of the connection box through 90, entry from NDE
Rotation of connection box through 180
Next larger connection box
Undrilled entry plate
External earthing
3 cables protruding, 0.5 m long
3 cables protruding, 1.5 m long
6 cables protruding, 0.5 m long
6 cables protruding, 1.5 m long
6 cables protruding, 3 m long
Protruding cable ends right side
Protruding cable ends left side
Auxiliary connection box 1XB3 020
Stud terminal for cable connection, accessories pack (3 items)
Saddle terminal for connection without cable lug, accessories pack
Auxiliary connection box 1XB9 016
Next larger connection box 1XB1 621
Connection box on NDE
Terminal strip for main and auxiliary terminals
Auxiliary connection box 1XB9 014 (aluminum)

0/51
0/51
0/39
0/38
0/38
0/38
0/38, 0/47 ...
0/38, 0/48 ...
0/39
0/39
0/39
0/39
0/39
0/39
0/38
0/40
0/38
0/40
0/40
0/40
0/40
0/40
0/40
0/40
0/50
0/49
0/49
0/50
0/38
0/38
0/49
0/50

Windings and insulation

C11
C12
C13
C18
C19

0/8

Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), with service factor (SF)
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), with increased power rating
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), with increased coolant temperature
Temperature class 180 (H) at rated output and max. CT 60 C
Increased air humidity/temperature with 30 to 60 g water per m of air

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/32
0/32
0/33
0/33
0/33

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Special versions

Overview (continued)
Order code

Special versions

For further information,

see Page

Windings and insulation (continued)

C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
Y50
Y52

New!

Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 45 C, derating approx. 4 %
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 50 C, derating approx. 8 %
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 55 C, derating approx. 13 %
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 60 C, derating approx. 18 %
Increased air humidity/temperature with 60 to 100 g water per m3 of air
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), with increased coolant temperature and/or site altitude
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), other requirements

0/33
0/33
0/33
0/33
0/33
0/33
0/33

Colors and paint finish

K23
K24
K26
M91
M94
Y51
Y53
Y54

New!
New!

Unpainted (only cast-iron parts primed)

Unpainted, only primed
Special finish in RAL 7030 stone gray
Offshore special finish
Sea air resistant special finish
Special finish in special RAL colors
Standard finish in other standard RAL colors
Special finish in other standard RAL colors

0/17
0/17
0/18
0/17
0/17
0/17, 0/19
0/17, 0/18
0/17, 0/18

Modular technology Basic versions

Mounting of separately driven fan
Mounting of brake
Mounting of 1XP8 001-1 (HTL) rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of 1XP8 001-2 (TTL) rotary pulse encoder

G17
G26
H57
H58

0/76
0/77 ...
0/75
0/75

Modular technology Combinations of basic versions

Mounting of separately driven fan and 1XP8 001-1 rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of brake and 1XP8 001-1 rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of brake and separately driven fan
Mounting of brake, separately driven fan and 1XP8 001-1 rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of separately driven fan and 1XP8 001-2 rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of brake and 1XP8 001-2 rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of brake, separately driven fan and 1XP8 001-2 rotary pulse encoder

H61
H62
H63
H64
H97
H98
H99

0/84
0/84
0/84
0/84
0/84
0/84
0/84

Modular technology Additional versions

Brake supply voltage 24 V DC
Brake supply voltage 400 V AC
Brake supply voltage 180 V DC, for operation on MM411-ECOFAST
Manual brake release with lever

C00
C01
C02
K82

0/83
0/83
0/83
0/83

Special technology
H15
H47
H70
H72
H73
H78
H79
H80
H86
H87
J15
J16
M95
M96
M97
M98
Y70
Y74
Y76
Y79

New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!

Prepared for mounting MMI

Mounting of brake NFA (Stomag)
Mounting of LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of HOG 9 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of HOG 10 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder
Prepared for mounting LL 861 900 220
Prepared for mounting HOG 9 D 1024 I
Prepared for mounting HOG 10 D 1024 I
Mounting of explosion-proof rotary pulse encoder for use in Zones 2, 21, 22
Mounting of explosion-proof rotary pulse encoder for use on Ex d/de motors in Zone 1
Mounting of explosion-proof rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I, connection box protection against moisture
Mounting of explosion-proof rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I, connection box protection against dust
Mounting of explosion-proof separately driven fan Ex nA for use in Zone 2
Mounting of explosion-proof separately driven fan II 2D for use in Zone 21
Mounting of explosion-proof separately driven fan II 3D for use in Zone 22
Mounting of explosion-proof separately driven fan Ex de for use in Zone 1
Mounting a special type of rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I + FSL, (speed .... rpm), connection box protection against
moisture
Mounting of rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I + FSL, (speed .... rpm), connection box protection against dust
Mounting of rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I + E SL 93, (speed .... rpm), connection box protection against
moisture

0/15, 0/85
0/85
0/85
0/86
0/87
0/85
0/86
0/87
4/5, 4/6
4/5, 4/6
0/87
0/88
4/5, 4/8
4/5, 4/8
4/5, 4/8
4/5, 4/8
0/85
0/88
0/89
0/89

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/9

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

Special versions

Overview (continued)
Order code

Special versions

For further information,

see Page

Mechanical design and degrees of protection

Drive-end seal for flange-mounting motors with oil resistance to 0.1 bar
With two additional eyebolts for IM V1/IM V3
Low-noise version for 2-pole motors with clockwise direction of rotation
Low-noise version for 2-pole motors with counter-clockwise direction of rotation
IP65 degree of protection
IP56 degree of protection (non-heavy-sea)
Vibration-proof version
Condensation drainage holes
Non-rusting screws (externally)
Earth brushes for converter-fed operation
Mechanical protection for encoder

K17
K32
K37
K38
K50
K52
L03
L12
M27
M44
M68

0/54
0/54
0/55
0/55
0/54
0/54
0/55
0/54
0/55
0/55
0/55

Coolant temperature and site altitude

D02
D03
D04
D11
D12
D13
D14
D19

New!

Coolant temperature 50 to +40 C

Coolant temperature 40 to +40 C
Coolant temperature 30 to +40 C
Coolant temperature 45 C, derating 4 %
Coolant temperature 50 C, derating 8 %
Coolant temperature 55 C, derating 13 %
Coolant temperature 60 C, derating 18 %
Coolant temperature 40 C to + 40 C for EX motor

0/32
0/32
0/32
0/32
0/32
0/32
0/32
4/5

Designs in accordance with standards and specifications

D01
D30
D31
D32
D33
D40
D46

New!
New!

CCC China Compulsory Certification

Electrical according to NEMA MG1-12
Design according to UL with Recognition Mark
Ex certification for China
Certified for Korea according to KS C4202
Canadian regulations (CSA)
PSE Mark Japan

0/16
0/15
0/15
4/83
0/16
0/15, 0/16
0/16

Design for Zones 1, 2, 21 and 22 according to ATEX

C27
C30
K30
M34
M35
M38
M39
M72
M73
M74
M75
M76
M77
Y68

New!
New!
New!
New!

Stamping of Ex nA II on VIK rating plate

Outputs T1/T2 on rating plate
VIK design (comprises Zone 2 for mains-fed operation, without Ex nA II marking on rating plate)
Design for Zone 21, as well as Zone 22 for conducting dust (IP65) for mains-fed operation
Design for Zone 22 for non-conducting dust (IP55) for mains-fed operation
Design for Zone 21, as well as Zone 22 for conducting dust (IP65) for converter-fed operation, derating
Design for Zone 22 for non-conducting dust (IP55) for converter-fed operation, derating
Design for Zone 2 for mains-fed operation Ex nA II T3 to IEC/EN 60079-15
Design for Zone 2 for converter-fed operation, derating Ex nA II T3 to IEC/EN 60079-15
Design for Zones 2 and 22, for non-conducting dust (IP55), for mains-fed operation
Design for Zones 2 and 22, for non-conducting dust (IP55), for converter-fed operation, derating
Design for Zones 1 and 21, as well as for Zone 22 for conducting dust (IP65), for mains-fed operation
Design for Zones 1 and 21, as well as for Zone 22 for conducting dust (IP65), for converter-fed operation, derating
Alternative converter (SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES, SINAMICS G110, SINAMICS S120 or ET 200 S FC)

4/83
4/81
4/83
4/4, 4/81
4/4, 4/81
4/4, 4/83
4/4, 4/83
4/4, 4/81 ...
4/4, 4/83
4/81
4/83
4/81
4/82
4/82

Marine version Basic marine version

E00
E11
E21
E31
E51
E61
E71
E80

0/10

Without type test certificate according to ABS 50 C/CCS 45 C/RINA 45 C, temperature class 155 (F),
used according to 155 (F)
With/without type test certificate according to GL (Germanischer Lloyd), Germany, CT 45 C, temperature class
155 (F), used according to 155 (F)
With/without type test certificate according to LR (Lloyds Register), Great Britain, CT 45 C, temperature class 155 (F),
used according to 155 (F)
With/without type test certificate according to BV (Bureau Veritas), France, CT 45 C, temperature class 155 (F),
used according to 155 (F)
With/without type test certificate according to DNV (Det Norske Veritas), Norway, CT 45 C, temperature class 155 (F),
used according to 155 (F)
With/without type test certificate according to ABS (American Bureau of Shipping), USA, CT 50 C,
temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F)
With/without type test certificate according to CCS (Chinese Classification Society), China, CT 45 C,
temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F)
Motor for use in shipping, higher ambient temperature and/or used as 155 (F) according to 130 (B)

Siemens D 81.1 2008

10/4 ...
10/4 ...
10/4 ...
10/4 ...
10/4 ...
10/4 ...
10/4 ...
10/10 ...

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Special versions

Overview (continued)
Order code

Special versions

For further information,

see Page

Marine version Acceptance/certification

Individual acceptance by marine classification society with supervision of construction and acceptance
test certificate 3.2 according to EN 10204
Individual acceptance by marine classification society
Type test with heat run for horizontal motors, with acceptance
Type test with heat run for vertical motors, with acceptance

E09
E10
F83
F93

10/4 ...
10/4 ...
10/6 ...
10/23 ...

Standardline (only for motor series 1LA8)

Standardline version

B20

3/13

Bearings and lubrication

Measuring nipple for SPM shock pulse measurement for bearing inspection
Bearing design for increased cantilever forces
Special bearing for DE and NDE, bearing size 63
Regreasing device
Located bearing DE
Located bearing NDE
Insulated bearing cartridge

G50
K20
K36
K40
K94
L04
L27

0/58
0/58, 0/62 ...
0/58, 0/63 ...
0/58
0/58
0/58
0/58

Balance and vibration quantity

K02
L68
M37

New!

Vibration quantity level B

Full key balancing
Balancing without key

0/56
0/56
0/56

Shaft and rotor

Concentricity of shaft extension, coaxiality and linear movement in accordance with DIN 42955 Tolerance R for
flange-mounting motors
Second standard shaft extension
Shaft extension with standard dimensions, without featherkey way
Concentricity of shaft extension in accordance with DIN 42955 Tolerance R
Standard shaft made of non-rusting steel
Non-standard cylindrical shaft extension

K04
K16
K42
L39
M65
Y55

0/57
0/56
0/57
0/57
0/57
0/57

Heating and ventilation

H17
K34
K35
K45
K46
L36
M14
M15
Y81

New!
New!

Fan cover for textile industry

Cast-iron fan cover
Metal external fan
Anti-condensation heaters for 230 V
Anti-condensation heaters for 115 V
Sheet metal fan cover
Anti-condensation heater, Ex. 115 V
Anti-condensation heater, Ex. 230 V
Separately driven fan with non-standard voltage and/or frequency

0/37
0/37
0/37
0/36
0/36
0/37
0/36
0/36
0/37

Rating plate and extra rating plates

B06
K31
Y80
Y82
Y84

New!

Second lubricating plate, supplied loose

Second rating plate, loose
Extra rating plate or rating plate with deviating rating plate data
Extra rating plate with identification code
Additional information on rating plate and on package label (maximum of 20 characters)

0/30
0/30
0/30
0/30
0/30

Packaging, safety notes, documentation and test certificates

B00
B01
B02
B23
B31
B32
B37
F01
F03
F04
F05
F28
F29

Without safety and commissioning note. Customer's declaration of renouncement required.

Complete with one set of safety and commissioning notes per wire-lattice pallet
Acceptance test certificate 3.1 according to EN 10204
Operating instructions German/English enclosed in print
Document Electrical data sheet
Document Order dimension drawing
Document Load characteristics
Standard test (routine test) with acceptance
Visual acceptance and report handover with acceptance
Temperature-rise test, without acceptance
Temperature-rise test, with acceptance
Noise measurement during idling, no noise analysis, no acceptance
Noise measurement during idling, no noise analysis, with acceptance

0/21
0/21
0/21
0/21
0/21, 3/52 ...
0/21, 3/52 ...
0/21, 3/52 ...
0/21, 3/52 ...
0/21, 3/52 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/11

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

Special versions

Overview (continued)
Order code

Special versions

For further information,

see Page

Packaging, safety notes, documentation and test certificates (continued)

F34
F35
F52
F53
F62
F63
F82
F83

Recording of current and torque curves with torque metering shaft during starting, without acceptance
Recording of current and torque curves with torque metering shaft during starting, with acceptance
Measurement of the locked-rotor torque and locked-rotor current, without acceptance
Measurement of the locked-rotor torque and locked-rotor current, with acceptance
Noise analysis, without acceptance
Noise analysis, with acceptance
Type test with heat run for horizontal motors, without acceptance
Type test with heat run for horizontal motors, with acceptance

F92
F93
L99
M32
M33

Type test with heat run for vertical motors, without acceptance
Type test with heat run for vertical motors, with acceptance
Wire-lattice pallet
Connected in star for dispatch
Connected in delta for dispatch

0/12

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/21, 3/53 ...

0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
10/6, 10/10 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/21, 3/53 ...
0/20
0/20
0/20

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data

Overview
Cut-away diagram of a low-voltage motor

$ Motor protection Page 0/34

Motor connection and connection box Page 0/38
Voltage, currents and frequencies 0/22

% Windings and insulation Page 0/32

Coolant temperature and site altitude Page 0/31

& Heating and ventilation Page 0/36

Mechanical design and degrees of protection Page 0/54
Modular technology Page 0/75
Special technology Page 0/85

( Bearings and lubrication Page 0/58

) Shaft and rotor Page 0/56
Balance and vibration quantity Page 0/56

* Colors and paint finish Page 0/17

+ Types of construction Page 0/52
, Rating plates and extra rating plates Page 0/30

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/13

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Designs in accordance with standards and specifications
Applicable standards and specifications
The motors comply with the appropriate standards and regulations, especially those listed in the table below.
Title
IEC/EN
General specifications for rotating electrical machines IEC 60034-1,
IEC 60085
Specification of the losses and efficiency of rotating
IEC 60034-2
electrical machines
Asynchronous AC motors for general use with stanIEC 60072
dardized dimensions and outputs
fixing only
Restart characteristics for rotating electrical machines IEC 60034-12
Terminal designations and direction of rotation for
IEC 60034-8
electrical machines
Designation for type of construction, installation and
IEC 60034-7
terminal box position
Entry to terminal box

Built-in thermal protection

IEC 60034-11
Noise limit values for rotating electrical machines
IEC 60034-9
IEC standard voltages
IEC 60038
Cooling methods for rotating electrical machines
IEC 60034-6
Vibration severity of rotating electrical machines
IEC 60034-14
Vibration limits

Degrees of protection of rotating electrical machines IEC 60034-5

DIN EN
DIN EN 60034-1
DIN EN 60034-2
DIN EN 50347
DIN EN 60034-12
DIN EN 60034-8
DIN EN 60034-7
DIN 42925
DIN EN 60034-11
DIN EN 60034-9
DIN IEC 60038
DIN EN 60034-6
DIN EN 60034-14
DIN ISO 10816
DIN EN 60034-5

In addition, the following applies to Ex motors:

General regulations
Explosion-proof enclosure d
Increased safety e
Type of protection n (non sparking)
Areas containing flammable dust

IEC/EN 60079-0
IEC/EN 60079-1
IEC/EN 60079-7
IEC/EN 60079-15
IEC/EN 61241

DIN EN 60079-0
DIN EN 60079-1
DIN EN 60079-7
DIN EN 60079-15
DIN EN 61241

National standards

Tolerances for electrical data

The motors comply with the IEC or European standards listed

above. The European standards replace the national standards
in the following European countries:
Germany (VDE), France (NF C), Belgium (NBNC), Great Britain
(BS), Italy (CEI), Netherlands (NEN), Sweden (SS), Switzerland
(SEV) etc.

According to DIN EN 60034, the following tolerances are permitted: Motors which comply with DIN EN 60034-1 must have a
voltage tolerance of 5 % / frequency tolerance of 2 %
(Design A), if utilized, the permitted limit temperature of the temperature class may be exceeded by 10 K.

The motors also comply with various national standards. The following standards (with the exception of non-standard motors)
have been harmonized with IEC publication 60034-1 or replaced
with DIN EN 60034-1 so that the motors can be operated at standard rated output.
AS 1359

CSA C22.2, No. 100

IS 325
IS 4722
NEK IEC 60034-1

Australia
(higher output assignment than
stated in DIN EN 50347 for frame size
250 M and above)
Canada
India
Norway

A tolerance of 5 % also applies to the rated voltage range in

accordance with DIN EN 60034-1. Rated voltage and rated
voltage range see Page 0/23.
Efficiency for
Prated 150 kW: 0.15 (1 )
Prated >150 kW: 0.1 (1 )
with being a decimal number.

Power factor

1 cos
6

Minimum absolute value: 0.02

Maximum absolute value: 0.07

Explosion-proof motors:
Since the requirements of explosion-proof motors comply with
the European standards EN 60079-0, EN 60079-1, EN 60079-7
and Directive 94/9/EG (ATEX 95), certificates issued by authorized testing agencies (PTB, DMT, etc.) are accepted by all
member states of the EU. The remaining members of CENELEC,
Switzerland in particular, also accept the certificates.

Slip 20 % (for motors <1 kW 30 % is admissible)

Locked-rotor current +20 %
Locked-rotor torque 15 % to +25 %
Breakdown torque 10 %
Moment of inertia 10 %

The EU is currently changing the standard series from

EN 50014ff to IEC / EN 60079-xx and IEC / EN 61241-xx.
The transition period is approximately 2 years. After changing
the standards, the first E of the marking of the type of protection
will be omitted. For example: Old: EEx de New: Ex de.
The first E represented Euronorm.

Add 10 % to the certified values for the locked-rotor current.

0/14

Siemens D 81.1 2008

1MA motors:

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Energy-saving motors with European efficiency classification in
accordance with EU/CEMEP (European Commitee of Manufacturers of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics)
Low-voltage motors in the output range of 1.1 to 90 kW, 2-pole
and 4-pole are marked in accordance with the EU/CEMEP
agreement with the efficiency class
(Improved Efficiency) or
(High Efficiency).
So that the requirements of efficiency classes
and
are
fulfilled, the active parts of the motor have been optimized. The
procedure for calculating the efficiency is based on the losssummation method according to IEC 60034-2.
Motors for the North American market
For motors which comply with North American regulations
(NEMA, CSA, UL, etc.), it must always be checked whether the
motors will be used in the US or Canada and whether they are
subject to state laws.
Minimum efficiencies required by law
In 1997, an act was passed in the US to define minimum efficiencies for low-voltage three-phase motors (EPACT = Energy
Policy Act). An act is in force in Canada that is largely identical,
although it is based on different verification methods. The efficiency is verified for these motors for the USA using IEEE 112,
Test Method B and for Canada using CSA-C390. Apart from a
few exceptions, all low-voltage three-phase motors exported to
the USA or Canada must comply with the legal requirements on
efficiency.
The law requires minimum efficiencies for 2, 4 and 6-pole motors
with a voltage of 230 and 460 V/60 Hz, in the output range of 1
to 200 HP (0.75 to 150 kW). Explosion-proof motors must also be
included. 1LA9 and 1LG6 are also available in the design for
Zones 2, 21 and 22.
According to EPACT, the following are excluded from the efficiency requirements, for example.
Motors whose frame size output classification does not correspond with the standard series according to NEMA MG1-12.
Flange-mounting motors without feet
Brake motors
Converter-fed motors
Motors with design letter C and higher
For more information on EPACT:
http://www.eren.doe.gov/
Special requirements for the USA: Energy Policy Act
The act lays down that the nominal efficiency at full load and a
CC number (Compliance Certification) must be included on
the rating plate. The CC number is issued by the US Department of Energy (DOE). The following information is stamped on
the rating plate of EPACT motors which must be marked by law:
Nominal efficiency (service factor SF 1.15), design letter, code
letter, CONT, CC-Nr. CC 032A (Siemens) and NEMA MG1-12.
Special requirements for Canada: CSA Energy Efficiency
Verification
These motors fulfill the minimum efficiency requirements laid
down by the CSA standard C390. These motors are available as
1LA9 or 1LG6 and can be ordered with order code D40 and are
also marked with the CSA-E verification on the rating plate.

NEMA Order code D30

The motors with increased efficiency according to EPACT are
designed to meet the NEMA MG1-12 electrical standard and are
marked accordingly. The mechanical design of all motors is
compliant only to IEC, not to NEMA dimensions.
All motors in the D30 version correspond to NEMA Design A (i. e.
standard torque characteristic in accordance with NEMA and no
starting current limitation).
For Design B, C and D, a special version is required (on request).
According to NEC-ANSI-C1, Division 2, Class I, Group A, B, D,
all 1LA/1LG motors that comply with Zone 2 can be used.
All other 1LA/1LG motors must be ordered with order code D30.
Data on the rating plate: Rated voltage (voltage tolerance of
10 %), nominal efficiency, design letter, code letter, CONT and
NEMA MG1-12.
UL approval Order code D31
The motors based on the 1LA/1LG basic series are listed for up
to 600 V by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (Recognition Mark
= R/C).
For Zones 2, 21, 22 and Ex e motors or Ex de motors as well as
marine motors, there is no listing.
This is not possible in combination with the option temperature
class 180 (H) at rated output and maximal coolant temperature
of 60 C, order code C18.
The motors must be ordered with order code D31, voltage code
9 and the order code for voltage and frequency.
According to UL, motor voltages are only certified up to 600 V,
i. e. voltage codes 1, 3, 4 or 5. For this reason, voltage code 6
for example is omitted (400 V/690 VY/ 50 Hz or 460 V/60 Hz).
Voltages 400 V and 460 V, for example, should be ordered as
follows:
Voltage
400 V/50 Hz or
460 V/60 Hz (50 Hz output)
460 V/60 Hz (50 Hz output)
460 V/60 Hz (60 Hz output)

Voltage code
9 with L1U 1)
9 with L2T
9 with L2F

The UL Recognition Mark is included on the rating plate of the

motor.

In addition, the motor is designed to meet the NEMA MG1-12

electrical standard (with the exception of non-standard motors)
and includes the following data on the rating plate: Rated voltage (voltage tolerance of 10 %), nominal efficiency, design letter, code letter, CONT and NEMA MG1-12.
Externally or internally mounted components such as
Motor protection
Heating element
Separately driven fan
Brake
Encoder
Power connection
Plug connector
are UL-R/C, CSA or C-US listed or used by manufacturers in accordance with regulations. It may have to be decided whether
the motor is suitable for the application.
The motors can be operated with a frequency converter separate converter or built-on (1UA7/order code H15) with
50/60 Hz.
Deviating frequency settings must be tested at final acceptance.
The external fans for 1LA8 and 1LL8 motors must be made of
metal.
The following versions are possible:
2-pole 2) motors, only in combination with K37 or K38
4, 6 and 8-pole motors, only in combination with K35

1)

Only applicable to non-standard motors.

2)

Frame size 450 in 2-pole version, on request.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/15

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

For 1PQ8 motors, UL listed motors with separately driven fan
(400 V 50 Hz/460 V 60 Hz) are used. Other voltages up to
600 V and/or other frequencies must be ordered using the order
code Y81 and plain text. For 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motors of frame
size 315, when option D31 is ordered, connection box gt 640 will
be automatically replaced without additional charge with connection box 1XB1 621. The connection boxes are designed with
an undrilled cable entry. UL-R/C cable glands must be used for
cable entry.

Other versions:

CSA approval Order code D40

Small power motors which are exported to China must be

certified up to a rated output of:
2-pole: 2.2 kW
4-pole: 1.1 kW
6-pole: 0.75 kW
8-pole: 0.55 kW

Motors based on the 1LA/1LG basic series are approved for up

to 690 V in accordance with the Canadian regulations of the
Canadian Standard Association (CSA). Externally or internally
mounted components which are used are listed by CSA or are
used by manufacturers in accordance with regulations. It may
have to be decided whether the motor is suitable for the application. For Zones 2, 21, 22 and Ex e motors or Ex de motors as well
as marine motors, there is no approval.
This is not possible in combination with the option temperature
class 180 (H) at rated output and maximal coolant temperature
of 60 C, order code C18, for 1LA5, 1LG4, 1PP4 and 1PP5 motor series.
The motors must be ordered with the order code D40, voltage
code 9 and order code for voltage and frequency. The CSA
mark and the rated voltage (voltage tolerance of 10 %) are included on the rating plate.

When energy-saving motors (1LA9, 1LG6) are ordered, they also

include the CSA-E mark on the rating plate.

For versions and certification of explosion-proof motors in compliance with directive 94/9/EU (ATEX) as well as VIK versions,
see catalog part 4 Explosion-proof motors.
For versions for use in shipping, see Section 10 Marine motors.
Export of low-voltage motors to China
CCC China Compulsory Certification Order code D01

The 1LA7, 1LA9, 1MA7 and 1MJ6 motors which must be certified have been certified by the CQC (China Quality Cert. Center). When ordered with the D01 order code, the CCC logo and
Factory Code are included on the rating plate and packaging.

Factory Code:
A005216 = Works Bad Neustadt
A010607 = Works Mohelnice
Note:
Chinese customs checks the need for certification of imported
products by means of commodity code.
The following do not need to be certified:
Motors imported to China which have already been installed
in a machine
Repair parts
Export of low-voltage motors to Japan
PSE Mark Japan Order Code D46
PSE marking is a mandatory certification in Japan in accordance
with the electrical devices and safety of materials act. Small
power motors with a rated output of up to 3 kW which are exported to Japan must bear the PSE marking. Marking is only applicable to motor series 1LA7, 1LP7, 1PP7 in catalog parts 2
Standard motors up to frame size 315 L and 7 Motors with
fans.
The motors concerned are marked on the rating plate with the
following PSE logo.

Export of low-voltage motors to Korea

Korea certification Order Code D33
Certification confirms that the efficiency and power factor are in
compliance with KSC 4202 (KEMCO). The certification is applicable to EFF1 motors of the 1LA9 and 1LG6 series in 2, 4 and 6
pole versions from 0.75 kW to 200 kW 400 V 50 Hz.

0/16

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Colors and paint finish
To protect the drives against corrosion and external influences, high-quality coatings based on 2-K epoxy resin are offered in various
different colors.
Version
Standard finish

Special finish

Suitability of paint finish for climate group in accordance with DIN IEC 60721, Part 2-1
Moderate (extended)
Briefly: up to 120 C
for indoors and outdoors under a roof not directly subjected to
Contin.: up to 100 C
weather conditions
Worldwide (global)
Briefly: up to 140 C
for outdoor use in direct sunlight and/or weather conditions.
Contin.: up to 120 C
Suitable for use in the tropics for <60 % relative humidity at 40 C Also: for aggressive atmospheres up to 1 % acid and alkali concentration or permanent dampness in sheltered rooms

Sea air resistant special finish system Order code M94

Field of application
Recommended for indoor installations or outdoor installations exposed to
direct weather conditions
Industrial climate with moderate SO2 exposure, inshore maritime climate,
but not offshore maritime climate, e.g. for crane drives and also in the paper
industry
Complies with the test requirements of DIN EN ISO 12944-2 Corrosion
Category C4

Resistance
Chemical exposure to 5 % acid and caustic solution concentration
Suitable for use in the tropics up to 75 % relative humidity at 50 C
Thermal stability from 40 to 140 C

Offshore special finish system Order code M91

Field of application
Recommended for outdoor installations exposed to direct weather conditions
Industrial climate with moderate SO2 exposure and offshore maritime climate,
e.g. for crane drives
Complies with the test requirements of DIN EN ISO 12944-2 Corrosion
Category C5

Resistance
Chemical exposure to 5 % acid and caustic solution concentration
Suitable for use in the tropics up to 75 % relative humidity at 60 C
Thermal stability from 40 to 140 C

All motors are painted with RAL 7030 (stone gray) if the color is
not specified.
Other colors can be ordered with standard finish using order
code Y53 and the RAL number in plain text for an additional
charge (for an overview of the available RAL No./RAL colors see
the following table for order code Y53).
Other colors in special finish must be ordered with the order
code Y51 or Y54 and the RAL number in plain text (for an overview of the available RAL No./RAL colors, see the following
tables for order codes Y51 and Y54).
Direct sunlight can change the color. If color stability is required,
it is recommended to use a polyurethane-based paint (only on
request).
All paint finishes can be painted over with commercially available paints. Special paint with increased layer thickness available on request.
If required, the motors can be supplied only coated in primer,
order code K24, or unpainted (unworked cast-iron surfaces in
primer) using order code K23.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/17

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Standard finish in other standard RAL colors Order code Y53
(RAL number is required in plain text)
RAL No.
1002
1013
1015
1019
2003
2004
3000
3007
5007
5009
5010
5012
5015
5017
5018
5019

Color name
Sand yellow
Pearl white
Light ivory
Gray beige
Pastel orange
Pure orange
Flame red
Black red
Brilliant blue
Azure blue
Gentian blue
Light blue
Sky blue
Traffic blue
Teal blue
Capri blue

RAL No.
6011
6019
6021
7000
7001
7004
7011
7016
7022
7031
7032
7033
7035
9001
9002
9005

Color name
Reseda green
Pastel green
Pale green
Squirrel gray
Silver gray
Signal gray
Iron gray
Anthracite gray
Umber gray
Blue gray
Pebble gray
Cement gray
Light gray
Cream
Gray white
Jet black

Special finish in standard RAL color with defined order codes

(special finish in other standard RAL colors can be ordered
indicating the RAL number in plain text with order code Y54 )
For 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1MA7, 1MA6, 1MJ6, 1PP5, 1LP5,
1PP7 and 1LP7 motors up to frame size 200 L, the special finish
is in RAL 7030 stone gray (order code K26) standard version.
RAL No.
7030

Color name
Stone gray

Order code
K26

Special finish in other standard RAL colors Order code Y54

(RAL number is required in plain text)
RAL No.
1002
1013
1015
1019
2003
2004
3000
3007
5007
5009
5010
5012
5015
5017
5018
5019

0/18

Color name
Sand yellow
Pearl white
Light ivory
Gray beige
Pastel orange
Pure orange
Flame red
Black red
Brilliant blue
Azure blue
Gentian blue
Light blue
Sky blue
Traffic blue
Teal blue
Capri blue

Siemens D 81.1 2008

RAL No.
6011
6019
6021
7000
7001
7004
7011
7016
7022
7031
7032
7033
7035
9001
9002
9005

Color name
Reseda green
Pastel green
Pale green
Squirrel gray
Silver gray
Signal gray
Iron gray
Anthracite gray
Umber gray
Blue gray
Pebble gray
Cement gray
Light gray
Cream
Gray white
Set black

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Special finish in special RAL colors Order code Y51 (RAL number is required in plain text)
RAL No.
1000
1001
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1011
1012
1014
1016
1017
1018
1020
1021
1023
1024
1027
1028
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
2000
2001
2002
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3009
3011
3012
3013

Color name
Green beige
Beige
Signal yellow
Golden yellow
Honey yellow
Maize yellow
Daffodil yellow
Brown beige
Lemon yellow
Dark ivory
Sulfur yellow
Saffron yellow
Zinc yellow
Olive yellow
Rape yellow
Traffic yellow
Ochre yellow
Curry
Melon yellow
Broom yellow
Dahlia yellow
Pastel yellow
Pearl beige
Pearl gold
Sun yellow
Yellow orange
Red orange
Vermilion
Bright red orange
Traffic orange
Signal orange
Deep orange
Salmon orange
Pearl orange
Signal red
Carmine red
Ruby red
Purple red
Wine red
Oxide red
Brown red
Beige red
Tomato red

RAL No.
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3020
3022
3027
3031
3032
3033
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5008
5011
5013
5014
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
6000
6001
6002

Color name
Antique pink
Light pink
Coral red
Rose
Strawberry red
Traffic red
Salmon pink
Rasperry red
Orient red
Pearl ruby red
Pearl pink
Red lilac
Red violet
Heather violet
Claret violet
Blue lilac
Traffic purple
Purple violet
Signal violet
Pastel violet
Tele magenta
Pearl violet
Pearl blackberry
Violet blue
Green blue
Ultramarine
Saphire blue
Black blue
Signal blue
Gray blue
Steel blue
Cobalt blue
Pigeon blue
Ocean blue
Water blue
Night blue
Distant blue
Pastel blue
Pearl gentian
Pearl night blue
Patina green
Emerald green
Leaf green

RAL No.
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6020
6022
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
7002
7003
7005
7006
7008
7009
7010
7012
7013
7015
7021
7023
7024
7026
7034

Color name
Olive green
Blue green
Moss green
Gray olive
Bottle green
Brown green
Fir green
Grass green
Black green
Reed green
Yellow olive
Black olive
Turquoise green
May green
Yellow green
Chrome green
Olive drab
Traffic green
Fern green
Opal green
Light green
Pine green
Mint green
Signal green
Mint turquoise
Pastel turquoise
Pearl green
Pearl opal green
Olive gray
Moss gray
Mouse gray
Beige gray
Khaki gray
Green gray
Tarpaulin gray
Basalt gray
Brown gray
Slate gray
Black gray
Concrete gray
Graphite gray
Granite gray
Yellow gray

RAL No.
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
8000
8001
8002
8003
8004
8007
8008
8011
8012
8014
8015
8016
8017
8019
8022
8023
8024
8025
8028
8029
9003
9004
9006
9007
9010
9011
9016
9017
9018
9022
9023

Color name
Platinum gray
Dusty gray
Agate gray
Quartz gray
Window gray
Traffic gray A
Traffic gray B
Silk gray
Tele gray 1
Tele gray 2
Tele gray 4
Pearl mouse gray
Green brown
Ocher brown
Signal brown
Clay brown
Copper brown
Fawn brown
Olive brown
Nut brown
Red brown
Sepia brown
Chestnut
Mahogany
Chocolate
Gray brown
Black brown
Orange brown
Beige brown
Pale brown
Terra brown
Pearl copper
Signal white
Signal black
White aluminum
Gray aluminum
Pure white
Graphite black
Traffic white
Traffic black
Papyrus white
Pearl light gray
Pearl dark gray

Coating structure and colors not specified in the catalog are available on request.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/19

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Packaging, safety notes, documentation and test certificates
Connected in star for dispatch Order code M32
The terminal board of the motor is connected in star for dispatch.
Connected in delta for dispatch Order code M33
The terminal board of the motor is connected in delta for dispatch.
Packing weights and packing dimensions
Packing weights
For motors
Frame size
Type
1LA5 .../1LA7 ...,
1LA6 ..., 1LA9 ...,
1LG4 ..., 1LG6 ...,
1LP4 ..., 1LP5 .../1LP7 ...,
1MA6 ..., 1MA7 ...,
1MJ6 ..., 1MJ7 ...
1PP4 ..., 1PP5 .../1PP7 ...
56 M
.... 050/053
63 M
.... 060/063
71 M
.... 070
.... 073
80 M
.... 080
.... 083
90 S
.... 090
90 L
.... 096/097
100 L
.... 106/107
112 M
.... 113
132 S
.... 130/131
132 M
.... 133/134
160 M
.... 163/164
160 L
.... 166
180 M
.... 183
180 L
.... 186
200 L
.... 206/207
225 S
.... 220
225 M
.... 223
250 M
.... 253
280 S
.... 280
280 M
.... 283
315 S
.... 310
315 M
.... 313
315 L
.... 316/317/318

For land transport

Type of construction IM B3
In
On
box
battens
Tare
Tare

In
crate
Tare

Types of construction IM B5, IM V1

In
On
In
box
battens
crate
Tare
Tare
Tare

kg
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
1.3
1.5
4.7
4.7
4.8
4.8
13.0
13.0
13.5
13.7
13.7

kg

20
20
36
36
36
38
38
40

kg
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
0.65
1.3
1.5
5.2
5.2
5.7
5.7
13.4
13.4
13.5
13.7
13.7

kg

7
7
20
20
20
20
20
22

kg

10
10
20
20
20
20
20
22

kg

20
20
40
40
40
45
45
45

Values for 1PP6 motors on request.

Data apply for individual packaging. For frame sizes 56 to 180 L,
wire-lattice pallets can be used, order code L99.
Packing weights and packing dimensions for 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motors
For motors
Frame size

Type
1LA8 ...,
1PQ8 ...,
1LL8 ...

315
.... 315/317
355
.... 353/355/357
400
.... 403/405/407
450
.... 453/455/457
Maximum motor dimensions

Length
Width
Height

0/20

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Packing weights
Land transport on battens
Sea transport in wooden cases
Type of
Type of
Type of
Type of
construction IM B3
construction IM V1
construction IM B3
construction IM V1
Tare
Tare
Tare
Tare
kg
kg
kg
kg
30
55
270
310
40
65
320
365
45
75
390
445
50
85
450
510
Allowances for maximum motor dimensions
(packing dimensions = motor dimensions + allowance)
Land transport on battens
Sea transport in wooden cases
Type of
Type of
Type of
Type of
construction IM B3
construction IM V1
construction IM B3
construction IM V1
approx.
approx.
approx.
approx.
mm
mm
mm
mm
+250
+250
+250
+250
+200
+300
+200
+200
+200
+250
+500
+500

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Safety notes
The motors are supplied without safety and commissioning
notes for most motor types and frame sizes. A customer's declaration of renouncement is required.
Without safety and commissioning note Order code B00
The motors are supplied with only one set of safety and commissioning notes per wire-lattice pallet for most motor types and
frame sizes.
Complete with one set of safety and commissioning notes
per wire-lattice pallet Order code B01
Documentation
The documentation for non-standard motors frame size 315 and
above (catalog part 3) contains as standard:
Safety and commissioning notes (paper)
Operating instructions (on CD)
EU manufacturer's declaration (on CD)
Acceptance test certificate 3.1 according to EN 10204
(by e-mail)
Routine test certificate (by e-mail)
For non-standard motors from frame size 315 and above
(catalog part 3) the following documents are optionally available:
Document Electrical data sheet Order code B31
Document Order dimension drawing Order code B32
Document Load characteristics Order code B37
(on request, only available for motors for mains-fed operation)
Optionally available documents for other motors:
Operating instructions German/English enclosed in print
Order code B23
SD Manual Collection: all manuals for low-voltage motors,
geared motors and low-voltage converters on DVD in 5 languages, see catalog part 11 Appendix.
Test certificates
Acceptance test certificate 3.1 according to EN 10204
Order code B02
An acceptance test certificate 3.1 according to EN 10204 can
be supplied for most motors.
The tests listed below are mainly intended for non-standard
motors (catalog part 3). The assignment of order codes to motor
types can be found in the Special versions section of the relevant catalog parts.
Standard test (routine test) with acceptance Order code F01
Standard routine testing of the motor, but with acceptance by an
external representative (e.g. customer). The routine test is required to check the correct functioning of a motor where the
characteristic data are known and were determined on a machine of the same type in a detailed type test. For a routine test,
characteristic variables are determined, which after being converted to the basic data, are compared with the reference values
for this machine type.
Visual acceptance and report handover with acceptance
Order code F03
Visual acceptance of the motor by external representative
(e.g. customer) and handover of the routine test report to
external representative (e.g. customer).
Temperature-rise test without acceptance Order code F04
For the temperature-rise test, the temperature rise of a motor is
measured in continuous duty. To do this, the motor is connected
to a load (dynamometer), and operated with the rated power.

Noise measurement during idling, no noise analysis,

no acceptance Order code F28
The A-rated sound pressure level LpA is measured during idling
at rated voltage. The number of measuring points and their locations are specified in the test certificate.
Noise measurement during idling, no noise analysis,
with acceptance Order code F29
As for order code F28, but with acceptance by an external
representative (e.g. customer).
Recording of current and torque curves with torque metering
shaft during starting, without acceptance Order code F34
The measurement is used to determine the starting response of
a motor. By comparison with the load torque characteristic, the
acceleration torque can be calculated. This can be used to
check that a complete machine set has started correctly.
This measurement is only meaningful for motors that are directly
mains-fed and is not offered for motors that are designed for
converter-fed operation.
Recording of current and torque curves with torque metering shaft during starting, with acceptance Order code F35
As for order code F34, but with acceptance by an external
representative (e.g. customer).
Measurement of the locked-rotor torque and locked-rotor
current without acceptance Order code F52
The torque and current are determined when the rotor is locked.
This measurement is only meaningful for motors that are directly
mains-fed and is not offered for motors that are designed for
converter-fed operation.
Measurement of the locked-rotor torque and locked-rotor
current with acceptance Order code F53
As for order code F52, but with acceptance by an external
representative (e.g. customer).
Noise measurement during idling, with noise analysis,
without acceptance Order code F62
As for F28, but a noise analysis is also performed. The signal is
divided up into frequency bands and the level is determined in
each band.
Noise measurement during idling, with noise analysis,
with acceptance Order code F63
As for order code F62, but with acceptance by an external
representative (e.g. customer).
Type test with heat run for horizontal motors, without
acceptance Order code F82
During the type test, a temperature-rise test is performed; noload, short-circuit and load characteristics are recorded; the iron
losses and friction losses are determined and the efficiency is
calculated from the summed losses. This option is only applicable to motors with a horizontal type of construction.
Type test with heat run for horizontal motors, with acceptance Order code F83
As for order code F82, but with acceptance by an external
representative (e.g. customer, classification society).
Type test with heat run for vertical motors, without
acceptance Order code F92
As for order code F82, but only for motors with a vertical type of
construction.
Type test with heat run for vertical motors, with acceptance
Order code F93
As for order code F92, but with acceptance by an external
representative (e.g. customer, classification society).

Temperature-rise test with acceptance Order code F05

As for order code F04, but with acceptance by an external
representative (e.g. customer).
Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/21

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Voltages, currents and frequencies

Non-standard voltages and/or frequencies

Standard voltages

The tolerance laid down by DIN EN 60034-1 applies to all nonstandard voltages.
Order codes have been allocated for a number of non-standard
voltages at 50 or 60 Hz. They are ordered by specifying the code
digit 9 for voltage in the 11th position of the Order No. and the
appropriate order code.

EN 60034-1 differentiates between Category A (combination of

voltage deviation 5 % and frequency deviation 2 %) and Category B (combination of voltage deviation 10 % and frequency
deviation +3/5 %) for voltage and frequency fluctuations. The
motors can supply their rated torque in both Category A and
Category B. In Category A, the temperature rise is approx. 10 K
higher than during normal operation.
Standard
EN 60034 1
Voltage deviation
Frequency deviation
Rating plate data stamped with
rated voltage
(e.g. 230 V)
Rating plate data stamped with
rated voltage ranges b to c
(e.g. 220 to 240 V)

Category
A
5 %
2 %
a 5 %
(e.g. 230 V 5 %)

Category
B
10 %
+3 %/5 %
a 10 %
(e.g. 230 10 %)

b 5 % to c +5 %
(e.g. 220 5 %
to 240 +5 %)

b 10 % to c +10 %
(e.g. 220 10 %
to 240 +10 %)

According to the standard, longer operation is not recommended for Category B, therefore this is not permitted for explosion-proof motors. See Page 0/31 for details of the rating plate
inscriptions and examples. The selection and ordering data
state the rated current at 400 V and where applicable 690 V. The
DIN IEC 60038 standard specifies a tolerance of 10 % for
mains voltages of 230 V, 400 V and 690 V. The rating plates of
motors with voltage code 0, 1 or 6 also include a rated voltage
range in addition to the rated voltage (see table).
The rated currents at 420 V and for 1LA8 motors 660 V or 725 V
are listed in the table on Pages 0/26, 0/27 and on the rating plate.
The tolerance laid down by DIN EN 60034-1 applies to all converter-fed 1LA8 motors as well as to 1LA5, 1LA7, 1LG6, 1PQ8
and 1LL8 motors with special 690 V insulation, i.e. no rated voltage range is specified on the rating plate.
For 1LA and 1LG motors, type of protection n (Zone 2), a rated
voltage range is not specified.
Mains voltages

Rated voltage range

400 V/690 VY, 50 Hz

500 VY, 50 Hz
500 V, 50 Hz

220 ... 240 V/380 ... 420 VY

50 Hz
380 ... 420 V/660 ... 725 VY,
50 Hz

Motor series

Frame size

1LA7, 1LA9, 1LP7, 1MA7,

1MJ6, 1PP7
1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LP7,
1MA6, 1MA7, 1MJ6, 1PP6,
1PP7
1LA5, 1LA9, 1LP5, 1MA6,
1MJ6, 1PP5, 1PP6
1LA5, 1LP5, 1PP5

56 ... 90

Rated voltages for L1Y

that can be supplied
Lowest / highest voltage
in V for
Delta
Star
200/500 2)
250/690 3)

100 ... 160

200/690

250/690

180 ... 200

200/690

250/690

225

200/690

250/690

L3Y Non-standard winding Y/ staring at low speed (only possible for 1LA7 and 1LA5 pole-changing motors).
When ordering L8Y, L1Y and L3Y, state in plain text:
Voltage, frequency and connection.

1 1)

Order codes for other rated voltages in the relevant catalog

parts

For converter-fed motors and smoke extraction motors, only order code L1Y is possible. For non-standard motors, order code
L8Y is also possible for converter-fed operation.
The order codes listed below are possible for other motors; see
the relevant catalog parts.

3
5

1LA and 1LG motors

Second rating plate with 50 and 60 Hz data,
frame sizes 56 to 315 M
for 1LA9 and 1LG6
with output at 60 Hz additionally in HP
460 V, 60 Hz
440 ... 480V, 60 Hz

L1Y Non-standard winding for voltages between 200 V (380 V

for 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motor series) and 690 V and rated
outputs.
For voltages and rated outputs outside these ranges, please inquire.

Voltage code

1LA, 1LG, 1MJ, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motors

230 V/400 VY, 50 Hz

L8Y Standard winding

Winding in accordance with voltage codes 0, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8; rating plate is stamped with order details.
The rated voltage is permitted to deviate up to 5 % from the
medium voltage of the defined voltage codes (0, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8).
The order code L8Y is only possible for non-standard motors of
the motor series 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8. Order code L8Y does
not apply to explosion-proof motors, converter-fed motors and
motors for the North American market (in connection with order
codes D30, D31 or D40).

1, 6

1MA motors
230 V/400 VY, 50 Hz
400 V/690 VY, 50 Hz

218 ... 242 V/380 ... 420 VY,

50 Hz
380 ... 420 V/655 ... 725 VY,
50 Hz

1
6

1MA motors:
For non-standard frequencies, the tE times and, where applicable, the rated output, may differ from those specified in the
selection tables; in this case, a new or supplementary certificate
is needed. For connection, overload protection with phasefailure protection must be provided.

1)

Not applicable to non-standard motors.

2)

Highest voltage in delta circuit for 1MA7 060-2 and 1MA7 063-4 290 V as
well as for 1MA7 060-4 230 V.

0/22

Siemens D 81.1 2008

3)

Highest voltage in star circuit for 1MA7 060-2 and 1MA7 063-4 500 V as
well as for 1MA7 060-4 400 V.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Further voltages for standard motors
Voltage at 50 Hz

220 V/380 VY
(210 ... 230 V/
360 ... 400 VY)
230 V
(220 ... 240 V)
380 V/660 VY 3)
(360 ... 400 V/
625 ... 695 VY)
415 VY
(395 ... 435 VY)
415 V
(395 ... 435 V)
400 VY
(380 ... 420 VY)
400 V
(380 ... 420 V)
400 V
(460 V at 60 Hz)
(380 ... 420 V)

50 Hz output

Order code for

Frame sizes for motor
50 Hz constantspeed motors (not 1LA5,
1LA6
pole-changing) 1)
1LA7
L1R
56 ... 225
100 ... 160

50 Hz output

L1E

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1L

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1C

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1D

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1A

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1B

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1U

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

1LA9

1LG4,
1LG6
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L

1LP5,
1LP7
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
63 ... 200

1LP4

1LG4,
1LG6

1LP5,
1LP7
63 ... 200
63 ... 200
100 ... 200
100 ... 200

1LG4,
1LG6

1LP5,
1LP7

2)

Required
output
at 50 Hz

220 V/380 VY
220 V/380 VY
380 V/660 VY
380 V/660 VY
440 VY
440 VY
440 V
440 V
460 VY
460 VY
460 V
460 V
575 VY
575 VY
575 V
575 V

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

Order code for 60 Frame sizes for motors

Hz constant-speed
motors (not pole- 1LA5,
1LA6
changing)
1LA7
L2A
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2B
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2C
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2D
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2Q
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2W
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2R
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2X
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2S
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2E
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2T
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2F
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2U
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2L
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2V
56 ... 225
100 ... 160
L2M
56 ... 225
100 ... 160

Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

Order code for

60 Hz motors
multi-voltage

230 VYY/460 VY 60 Hz
230 VYY/460 VY 60 Hz
230 V/460 V 60 Hz
230 V/460 V 60 Hz

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

L3E
L3F
L3G
L3H

Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

Order code for

60 Hz motors
pole-changing

220 V
220 V
380 V
380 V
440 V
440 V
460 V
460 V
575 V
575 V

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

L4A
L4B
L4C
L4D
L4G
L4E
L4J
L4H
L4N
L4M

Frame sizes for motors

1LA5,
1LA6
1LA7
56 ... 200

56 ... 200

100 ... 200

100 ... 200

Frame sizes for motors

1LA5,
1LA6
1LA7
63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

63 ... 200

1)

For order codes L1A, L1B, L1C, L1D, L1E, L1L, L1R and L1U, a rated
voltage range is also included on the rating plate.

2)

For the order code L1R a voltage of 440 VY 60 Hz is also possible for
1LA5, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LP5 and 1LP7 motor series.

3)

1LA9
56 ... 200

1LG4,
1LG6
180 ... 315 M

1LP5,
1LP7
63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200

1LA9
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
100 ... 200
100 ... 200

1LA9

1LP4

180 ... 315 L

180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L

1LP4

1LP4

For the order code L1L a voltage of 440 V 60 Hz is also possible for
1LA5, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LP5 and 1LP7 motor series.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/23

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Further voltages for non-standard motors
Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

220 V/380 VY
220 V/380 VY
380 V/660 VY
380 V/660 VY
440 VY
440 VY
440 V
440 V
460 VY
460 VY
460 V
460 V
575 VY
575 VY
575 V
575 V

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

Order code for

60 Hz constantspeed motors (not
pole-changing)
L2A
L2B
L2C
L2D
L2Q
L2W
L2R
L2X
L2S
L2E
L2T
L2F
L2U
L2L
L2V
L2M

Frame sizes for motors

1LA8

1PQ8

1LL8

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

315 ... 450

Further voltages for explosion-proof motors

Voltage
at 50 Hz

Required
output
at 50 Hz

Frame sizes for motors

1LA5,
1LA6
1LA7

1LA9

1LG4,
1LG6

1MA6,
1MA7 2)

1MJ6

1MJ7

50 Hz output

Order code for

50 Hz constantspeed motors (not
pole-changing) 1)
L1R

220 V/380 VY 3)
(210 ... 230 V/
360 ... 400 VY)
230 V
(220 ... 240 V)
380 V/660 VY 4)
(360 ... 400 V/
625 ... 695 VY)
415 VY
(395 ... 435 VY)
415 V
(395 ... 435 V)
400 VY
(380 ... 420 VY)
400 V
(380 ... 420 V)
400 V
(460 V at 60 Hz)
(380 ... 420 V)
400 V (only 4-8pole)

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

63 ... 315 M

71 ... 200

225 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1E

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

63 ... 315 M

71 ... 200

225 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1L

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

71 ... 315 L

71 ... 200

225 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1C

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

63 ... 315 M

71 ... 200

225 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1D

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

71 ... 315 L

71 ... 200

225 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1A

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

5)

50 Hz output

L1B

50 Hz output

L1U

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

87 Hz output

L3A

56 ... 225

100 ... 160

56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

Frame sizes for motors

1LA5,
1LA6
1LA7

1LA9

1LG4,
1LG6

1MA6,
1MA7 6)

1MJ6

1MJ7

220 V/380 VY
220 V/380 VY
380 V/660 VY
380 V/660 VY
440 VY
440 VY
440 V
440 V
460 VY
460 VY
460 V
460 V
575 VY
575 VY
575 V
575 V

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

Order code for

60 Hz constantspeed motors (not
pole-changing)
L2A
L2B
L2C
L2D
L2Q
L2W
L2R
L2X
L2S
L2E
L2T
L2F
L2U
L2L
L2V
L2M

56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225
56 ... 225

56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200
56 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 M
180 ... 315 L
180 ... 315 L

63 ... 315 M

63 ... 315 L

63 ... 315 M

63 ... 315 L

63 ... 315 M

63 ... 315 L

63 ... 315 M

63 ... 315 L

71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200
71 ... 200

225 ... 315 M

225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M
225 ... 315 M

100 ... 160

100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
100 ... 160

1)

For order codes L1A, L1C, L1D, L1E, L1L, L1R and L1U, a rated voltage
range is also included on the rating plate, with the exception of versions in
Zone 2 type of protection n or Ex n II T3.

2)

For further information on the rated voltage range see Page 4/84.

3)

For the order code L1R a voltage of 440 VY 60 Hz is also possible for
1LA5, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LP5 and 1LP7 motor series.

0/24

Siemens D 81.1 2008

4)

For the order code L1L a voltage of 440 V 60 Hz is also possible for
1LA5, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LP5 and 1LP7 motor series.

5)

For converter-fed operation, the converter output for a voltage according

to the table is included on the rating plate.

6)

A special certificate is required.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Further voltages for fan motors
Voltage
at 50 Hz

Required
output
at 50 Hz

220 V/380 VY 2)
(210 ... 230 V/
360 ... 400 VY)
230 V
(220 ... 240 V)
380 V/660 VY 3)
(360 ... 400 V/
625 ... 695 VY)
415 VY
(395 ... 435 VY)
415 V
(395 ... 435 V)
400 VY
(380 ... 420 VY)
400 V
(380 ... 420 V)
400 V
(460 V at 60 Hz)
(380 ... 420 V)

50 Hz output

Order code for

Frame sizes for motors
50 Hz constantspeed motors (not 1PP5,
1PP4
pole-changing) 1)
1PP7
L1R
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1E

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1L

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1C

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1D

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1A

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 M

50 Hz output

L1B

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

50 Hz output

L1U

63 ... 200

180 ... 315 L

Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

220 V/380 VY
220 V/380 VY
380 V/660 VY
380 V/660 VY
440 VY
440 VY
440 V
440 V
460 VY
460 VY
460 V
460 V
575 VY
575 VY
575 V
575 V

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

Order code for

Frame sizes for motors
60 Hz constantspeed motors (not 1PP5,
1PP4
pole-changing)
1PP7
L2A
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2B
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2C
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L
L2D
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L
L2Q
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2W
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2R
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L
L2X
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L
L2S
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2E
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2T
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L
L2F
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L
L2U
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2L
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 M
L2V
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L
L2M
63 ... 200
180 ... 315 L

Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

Order code for

60 Hz motors,
multi-voltage

230 VYY/460 VY 60 Hz
230 VYY/460 VY 60 Hz
230 V/460 V 60 Hz
230 V/460 V 60 Hz

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

L3E
L3F
L3G
L3H

Voltage
at 60 Hz

Required
output
at 60 Hz

Order code for

60 Hz motors,
pole-changing

220 V
220 V
380 V
380 V
440 V
440 V
460 V
460 V
575 V
575 V

50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output
50 Hz output
60 Hz output

L4A
L4B
L4C
L4D
L4G
L4E
L4J
L4H
L4N
L4M

Frame sizes for motors

1PP5,
1PP4
1PP7
63 ... 200

63 ... 200

100 ... 200

100 ... 200

Frame sizes for motors

1LA5,
1LG4
1LA7
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280
80 ... 200
180 ... 280

1)

For order codes L1A, L1B, L1C, L1D, L1E, L1L, L1R and L1U a rated
voltage range is also included on the rating plate.

2)

For the order code L1R a voltage of 440 VY 60 Hz is also possible for
1PP5 and 1PP7 motor series.

3)

For the order code L1L a voltage of 440 V 60 Hz is also possible for 1PP5
and 1PP7 motor series.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/25

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Rated currents for rated voltage range 380 V to 420 V at 50 Hz
Currents for voltage and number of poles
380 V
420 V
380 V
2-pole
4-pole
A
A
A

420 V
A

380 V
6-pole
A

420 V

420 V

380 V
8-pole
A

0.5
0.64
0.80
1.25
1.66
2.15
2.95
4.1

5.3
7.5

9.7
13.1
17.3

24.7

31
38.5
45.5

63

0.36
0.51
0.73
1.01
1.15
1.63
2.25
3.0
4.1
5.9

7.9

9.9
13.1
17.6

26.5

34
40
47

0.36
0.52
0.80
1.10
1.18
1.60
2.2
3.0
4.2
6.0

7.9

10.6
13.4
18.4

23.5

31
37
43

4.1

5.3
7.5

9.7
13.1
17.3

24.7

28.5
37
37
42.5
60

54
66
68
81
80
97
134
136
162
190
225
275

2.25
3.0
4.1
5.9

7.9

9.9
13.1
17.6

25.5
34.5

33.5
40.5
40.5
46.5
64
60
73
76
92
112
110
146
174
210
250

2.2
3.0
4.2
6.0

7.9

10.6
13.4
18.4

25
34.5

32
39
36.5
42
58
57
69
70
84
102
104
136
164
198
240

1LA7, 1LA5 motors

1LA7 050
1LA7 053
1LA7 060
1LA7 063
1LA7 070
1LA7 073
1LA7 080
1LA7 083
1LA7 090
1LA7 096
1LA7 106
1LA7 107
1LA7 113
1LA7 130
1LA7 131
1LA7 133
1LA7 134
1LA7 163
1LA7 164
1LA7 166
1LA5 183
1LA5 186
1LA5 206
1LA5 207
1LA5 220
1LA5 223

0.27
0.33
0.52
0.69
1.05
1.38
1.75
2.45
3.40
4.70
6.25

8.2
10.6
14.1

21.0
28.0
34.0
40

55
67

81

0.26
0.32
0.53
0.71
1.02
1.41
1.79
2.50
3.35
4.65
6.15

7.7
10.4
13.8

20.5
26.0
32.0
38

52
64

76

0.21
0.30
0.42
0.58
0.80
1.07
1.50
2.12
2.60
3.50
4.8
6.5
8.4
11.4

15.4

22.3

29.5
36
42

57
69
84

0.21
0.31
0.44
0.59
0.77
1.06
1.50
2.17
2.60
3.50
4.8
6.8
8.3
11.9

15.5
21.5

28.5
35
41

54
64
78

0.48
0.66
0.80
1.18
1.62
2.10
3.0
4.0

5.4
7.3

9.5
13.0
17.5

24.8

32.7
40
46.5

64

6.15

7.7
10.4
13.8

20.5
26.0
32.0
40

54
52
63
77

75
90
93
128
126
150
182
188
215
255
315

4.8
6.5
8.4
11.4

15.4

22.3

29.5
36
42.5
59

57
70
72
85
104
104
138
144
168
204
205
245
295
360

4.8
6.8
8.3
11.9

15.5

21.5

28.5
35
41.5
60

55
69
65
77
94
98
134
132
156
190
194
230
275
330

4.0

5.4
7.3

9.5
13.0
17.5

24.8

30.5
38.5
37
45
61

60
73
73
87
87
106
146
142
170
205
245
295

1LA6, 1LG4 motors

1LA6 106
1LA6 107
1LA6 113
1LA6 130
1LA6 131
1LA6 133
1LA6 134
1LA6 163
1LA6 164
1LA6 166
1LG4 183
1LG4 186
1LG4 188
1LG4 206
1LG4 207
1LG4 208
1LG4 220
1LG4 223
1LG4 228
1LG4 253
1LG4 258
1LG4 280
1LG4 283
1LG4 288
1LG4 310
1LG4 313
1LG4 316
1LG4 317
1LG4 318

0/26

6.25

8.2
10.6
14.1

21.0
28.0
34.0
41.5

56
56
67
82

83
100
100
134
136
162
196
198
230
280
345

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Currents for voltage and number of poles
380 V
420 V
380 V
2-pole
4-pole
A
A
A

420 V

420 V

380 V
6-pole
A

420 V

380 V
8-pole
A

34.5
40.5

54
64
76
94
128
154
184
215
265
330

425
530
590
680
820
930
1040
670 2)
750 2)
860 2)
940 2)

30.5
37
44

59
72
85
104
142
166
205
245
290
360
450

570
720
810
890
1000
1160
740 1)
830 1)

29
35.5
40.5

53
67
79
96
134
156
190
225
275
340
420

530
670
760
840
940
1060
690 2)
770 2)

24.5

32.5
38
45
59
75
91
106
142
170
205
250
310
385

480
600
680
760
850
960
1080
1200

23

30.5
34.5
41
55
69
83
100
136
158
194
230
295
365

455
560
640
720
810
910
1020
1140

1LG6, 1LA8 motors

1LG6 183
1LG6 186
1LG6 206
1LG6 207
1LG6 220
1LG6 223
1LG6 253
1LG6 280
1LG6 283
1LG6 310
1LG6 313
1LG6 316
1LG6 317
1LG6 318
1LA8 315
1LA8 317
1LA8 353
1LA8 355
1LA8 357
1LA8 403
1LA8 405
1LA8 407
1LA8 453
1LA8 455
1LA8 457

40.5

54
66

81
97
134
158
192
230
275
340

435
540
620
690
860
950
1080
690 1)
780 1)
880 1)
970 1)

37.5

51
62

73
90
124
146
174
210
250
305

400
495
570
630
790
880
990
640 2)
730 2)
810 2)
890 2)

36
42.5

56
70
84
99
138
166
200
235
285
355

450
560
640
720
880
990
1100
710 1)
810 1)
910 1)
1000 1)

The rating plates of 1MJ6 motors specify the maximum current

in the voltage range in addition to the rated current.
This maximum is approximately 5 % higher than the rated current.

1)

Only available for 690 V, see catalog part 3 Non-standard motors frame
size 315 and above; but in 660 V design.

2)

Only available for 690 V, see catalog part 3 Non-standard motors frame
size 315 and above; but in 725 V design.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/27

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Outputs
The outputs and the rated outputs are listed in the selection tables and in the separate catalog parts for 50 Hz and in most
Table of rated output at 60 Hz for single-speed motors

cases also for 60 Hz. For 60 Hz, the rated output values must, in
some cases, be increased, e.g. for pole-changing motors.

Motor type

Motor type

Admissible output at 60 Hz
for voltages between 220 V
or 380 V and 725 V
2-pole
4-pole
6-pole
kW
kW
kW

8-pole
kW

1LA6, 1LG4, 1LG6, 1LA7, 1MJ6, 1MJ7 motors

1LA7 050
1LA7 053
1LA7 060
1LA7 063
1LA7 070
1LA7 073
1LA7 080
1LA7 083
1LA7 090
1LA7 096
1LA7 106
1LA7 107
1LA7 113
1LA7 130
1LA7 131
1LA7 133
1LA7 134
1LA7 163
1LA7 164
1LA7 166
1LA5 183
1LA5 186

1LA5 206
1LA5 207

1LA5 220
1LA5 223

1LA6 106
1LA6 107
1LA6 113
1LA6 130
1LA6 131
1LA6 133
1LA6 134
1LA6 163
1LA6 164
1LA6 166
1LG . 183
1LG . 186
1LG . 188
1LG . 206
1LG . 207
1LG . 208
1LG . 220
1LG . 223
1LG . 228
1LG . 253
1LG . 258
1LG . 280
1LG . 283
1LG . 288
1LG . 310
1LG . 313
1LG . 316
1LG . 317
1LG . 318

1MJ6 070
1MJ6 073
1MJ6 080
1MJ6 083
1MJ6 096
1MJ6 097
1MJ6 106
1MJ6 107
1MJ6 113
1MJ6 130
1MJ6 131
1MJ6 133
1MJ6 134
1MJ6 163
1MJ6 164
1MJ6 166
1MJ6 183
1MJ6 186

1MJ6 206
1MJ6 207

1MJ7 220
1MJ7 223

1MJ7 253

1MJ7 280
1MJ7 283

1MJ7 310
1MJ7 313

0.105
0.14
0.21
0.29
0.43
0.63
0.86
1.3
1.75
2.55
3.45

4.6
6.3
8.6

12.6
17.3
21.3
24.5

33.5
33.5
41.5
51

51
62
62
84
84
101
123
123
148
180
224

0.07
0.105
0.14
0.21
0.29
0.43
0.63
0.86
1.3
1.75
2.55
3.45
4.6
6.3

8.6

12.6

17.3
21.3
25.3
34.5

34.5
42.5
42.5
52
63
63
86
86
104
127
127
152
184
230

Admissible output at 60 Hz
for voltages between 380 V
and 725 V
2-pole
4-pole
6-pole
kW
kW
kW

8-pole
kW

280
353
398
448
560
616
693

184
230

288
362
408
460
518
575
644
725

1LA8 motors

0.1
0.21
0.29
0.43
0.63
0.86
1.3
1.75

2.55
3.45

4.6
6.3
8.6

12.6

18
22
22
26.5
36

36
44.5
44.5
54
54
66
90
90
108
132
158
192

0.1
0.14
0.21
0.29
0.43
0.63
0.86
1.3
1.75
2.55

3.45

4.6
6.3
8.6

3.2
18

18
22
22
26.5
36
36
44.5
44.5
54
66
66
90
108
132
158

Table of rated output at 60 Hz for pole-changing motors

At 60 Hz, the output can be increased in accordance with the
factors listed in the table below.
The output is increased separately for each number of poles, i.e.
for 6/4-pole motors, frame sizes 180 to 315, 60 Hz, the 6-pole
output can be increased by 20 % and the 4-pole output can be
increased by 15 %.

1LA8 315
1LA8 317
1LA8 353
1LA8 355
1LA8 357
1LA8 403
1LA8 405
1LA8 407
1LA8 453
1LA8 455
1LA8 457

288
362
408
460
575
644
725
817

230
288

362
460
518
575
644
725

The speed increases to approx. 120 % in relation to 50 Hz

motors.
Higher outputs/voltages are available on request!

Frame size
56 to 160
180 to 315

Number of
poles
2 to 8
2
4
6 and 8

Factor for increased output at 60 Hz for

voltages between 220 or 380 and 725 V
1.15
1.12
1.15
1.2

Possible versions of 2-pole motors

Horizontal type
of construction
50 Hz with foot

60 Hz with foot

50 Hz with flange

60 Hz with flange

315 L

315

355 and 400

450

Frame size
56 to 315 M

0/28

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Vertical type
of construction
50 Hz

60 Hz

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Assignment of the standard power kW-HP and vice versa in
accordance with IEC

The part-load values stated in the tables below are averages;

precise values can be provided on request.

kW 1,341 = HP
HP 0,746 = kW

Part-load power factor at

1/4
1/2
of full load
0.70
0.86
0.65
0.85
0.63
0.83
0.61
0.80
0.57
0.78
0.53
0.76
0.51
0.75
0.49
0.73
0.47
0.71
0.45
0.69
0.43
0.67
0.41
0.66
0.40
0.65
0.38
0.63
0.36
0.61
0.34
0.59
0.32
0.58
0.30
0.56
0.29
0.55
0.28
0.54
0.27
0.52
0.26
0.50

Prated
kW
0.06
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25

Prated
HP
0.08
0.12
0.16
0.25
0.33

Prated
kW
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5

Prated
HP
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2

Prated
kW
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5

Prated
HP
3
4
5
7.5
10

Prated
kW
11
15
18.5
22
30

Prated
HP
15
20
25
30
40

Prated
kW
37
45
55
75
90

Prated
HP
50
60
75
100
125

Prated
kW
110
132
160
200

Prated
HP
150
200
250
300

Efficiency, power factor, rated torque,

rated speed and direction of rotation
Efficiency and power factor
The efficiency and power factor cos for each rated output are
listed in the selection tables in the individual sections of this
catalog.
For EFF1 and EFF2 motors, the 3/4 load efficiency is also indicated.
Part-load efficiency % at
1/4
1/2
of full load
93
96
92
95
90
93.5
89
92.5
88
91.5
87
91
86
90
85
89
84
88
80
87
79
86
78
85
76
84
74
83
72
82
70
81
68
80
66
79
64
77
62
75.5
60
74
58
73
56
72
55
71
54
70
53
68
52
67
51
66
50
65
49
64
48
62
47
61
46
60
45
59
44
57
43
56
42
55
41
54

3/4

4/4

5/4

97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79.5
78.5
77.5
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
67.5
66.5
65
64
63
62
60.5
59.5
58.5

97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60

96.5
95.5
94.5
93.5
92.5
91.5
90
89
88
87
86
85
83.5
82.5
81.5
80.5
79.5
78.5
77.5
76.5
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60.5
59.5
58.5

3/4

4/4

5/4

0.90
0.89
0.88
0.86
0.85
0.84
0.83
0.81
0.80
0.79
0.77
0.76
0.75
0.74
0.72
0.71
0.70
0.69
0.68
0.67
0.63
0.62

0.92
0.91
0.90
0.89
0.88
0.87
0.86
0.85
0.84
0.83
0.82
0.81
0.80
0.79
0.78
0.77
0.76
0.75
0.74
0.73
0.72
0.71

0.92
0.91
0.90
0.89
0.88
0.87
0.86
0.86
0.85
0.84
0.83
0.82
0.81
0.80
0.80
0.79
0.78
0.78
0.77
0.77
0.76
0.76

Rated torque
The rated torque in Nm delivered at the motor shaft is
9.55 P 1000
M=
n
P
Rated output in kW
n
Speed in rpm
Note:
If the voltage deviates from its rated value within the allowed
limits, the locked-rotor torque, the pull-up torque and the breakdown torque vary with the approximate square of the value, but
the locked-rotor current varies approximately linearly.
In the case of squirrel-cage motors, the locked-rotor torque and
breakdown torque are listed in the selection tables as multiples
of the rated torque.
The normal practise is to start squirrel-cage motors directly on
line. The torque class indicates that with direct-on-line starting,
even if there is 5 % undervoltage, it is possible to start up the
motor against a load torque of
160 % for CL 16
130 % for CL 13
100 % for CL 10
70 % for CL 7
50 % for CL 5
of the rated torque.
The individual torque characteristics are available in the SD
configurator. In addition, it is possible to perform calculations
with the supplied start-up program.
For type 1MA motors in the standard design for T1/T2 and
T3 and different rated outputs, the torque class specified for the
higher output applies.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/29

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Rated speed and direction of rotation
The rated speeds are applicable for the rated data. The synchronous speed changes proportionally with the line frequency.
The motors are suitable for clockwise and counter-clockwise
rotation.
This does not apply to the following 2-pole motors:
1LA8, 1LL8 frame size 355 and above for clockwise rotation
only; alternatively order code K38 for counter-clockwise rotation only
1LA8, 1MJ6, 1MA6 and 1LG4 in VIK version from frame size
315 and above.
If U1, V1, W1 are connected to L1, L2, L3, clockwise rotation
results as viewed onto the drive-end shaft extension. Counterclockwise rotation is achieved by swapping two phases (see
also Heating and ventilation).

Rating plate and extra rating plates

DIN EN 60034-1 lays down that the approximate total weight for
all motors from frame size 90 (from approx. 30 kg) is indicated
on the rating plate.

An extra rating plate can be supplied loose for all motors,

order code K31.
Supplementary data can be indicated on the rating plate or extra
rating plate and on the packaging label (maximum of 20 characters), order code Y84.
An extra rating plate can also be supplied for the identification
code, order code Y82.
An extra rating plate or a rating plate can also be ordered with
different rating plate data, order code Y80.
An extra rating plate can be supplied loose for all motors of
frame sizes 100 to 315, order code B06.
In the standard version, the rating plate is available in international format or in the English/German language. The language
for the rating plate can be ordered by specifying in plain text. An
overview of the languages that can be ordered, at additional
cost in some cases, is provided by the table below.
In addition, for 1MA motors:
With the exception of 2-pole motors from frame size 225 M or
larger, all motors are suitable for both T1/T2 and T3 (uniform
design).
If the rated output for T1/T2 differs from that of T3, the data for
both output values is stated separately.

Overview of the languages on the rating plate

Motor
type

Frame size

Rating plate

International

1LA5
1LA6
1LA7
1LA8
1LA9
1LG4
1LG6
1LL8
1LP4
1LP5
1LP7
1MA6
1MA6
1MA6
1MA7
1MJ6
1MJ7
1PP4
1PP5
1PP6
1PP7
1PQ8

German
(de)

180 ... 225

100 ... 160
56 ... 160
315 ... 450
56 ... 200
180 ... 315
180 ... 315
315 ... 450
180 ... 315
63 ... 160
180 ... 200
100 ... 180
180 ... 200
225 ... 315
63 ... 160
71 ... 200
225 ... 315
180 ... 315
180 ... 200
100 ... 315
63 ... 160
315 ... 450

Standard version
Without additional charge
With additional charge

0/30

Siemens D 81.1 2008

English (en) German (de)/ French (fr)/ Italian (it)

English (en) Spanish (es)

Double rating plate

50 Hz and 60 Hz data
for
Portuguese Russian (ru) 500 VY and 230 V/
(pt)
575 VY
400 VY and
460 VY
500 V and 400 V/
575 V
690 VY and
460 V

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Examples of rating plates
See the catalog part Non-standard motors for rating plates for motor series 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8.
Temperature class
3~Mot. 1LG6 186-4AA60-Z

180 kg IM B3 180L

Frame size

50 Hz
22 kW
cos 0.84

IP55 Th.Cl. 155 (F) AMB 40 C

400/690 V /
40.5/24 A
1470/min

60 HZ
22 KW
PF 0.83

380-420/660-725 V /

460 V
36.5 A
1775RPM

42.5-40.5/24.5-23.5 A

NEMA NOM.EFF 92.4% 30.0HP

DESIGN A CODE K CC 032 A

IEC/EN 60034

MG1-12 SF1.15 CONT

60 Hz data

Degree of protection
Type of
construction
Date of manufacture
YY MM

G_D081_EN_00154a

H
3~Mot.
1LA9166-2KA60
E0107/471101 01 002 IEC/EN 60034
D-91056 Erlangen
120 kg IM B3 160L IP55 Th.Cl. 155 (F) AMB 40C
60 HZ 460 V
50 Hz 400/690 V /
18.5 KW 27.7 A
18.5 kW 31.5/18.2 A
PF 0.92 3550RPM
cos 0.92 2940/min
NEMA NOM.EFF 91.0% 25.0HP
380-420/660-725 V /
DESIGN A CODE J CC 032 A
34.0-30.5/19.6-17.6 A
MG1-12 SF1.15 CONT

3~Mot.
1MJ6166-2CA60-Z
E0107/471101 13 003 IEC/EN 60034
D-91056 Erlangen
160 kg IM B3 160L IP55 Th.Cl. 155 (F)
50 Hz 400/690 V /
VIK
18.5 kW 32.5/18.8 A
II 2 G
cos 0.91 2940/min Ex de II C T4
380-420/660-725 V /
34.0/19.6 A
PTB 01 ATEX 1093

H
0158
G_D081_EN_00156a

50 Hz data

33.5-31.0 A

34.0-32.0/19.6-18.5 A

D-91056 Erlangen UC 0202 /012415501

G_D081_EN_00155a

3~Mot. 1LA7166-2AA60
E0107/471101 01 001 IEC/EN 60034
D-91056 Erlangen
93kg IM B3 160L IP55 Th.Cl. 155 (F)
50 Hz 400/690 V /
60 Hz 460 V
18.5 kW 32.5/18.8 A
21.3 kW 32.0 A
cos 0.92 3540/min
cos 0.91 2940/min
440-480 V
380-420/660-725 V /

G_D081_EN_00153a

Factory number
Order No.
Weight

IA/IN 7.0

Coolant temperature and site altitude

The rated output specified in the selection tables is applicable
for continuous duty in accordance with DIN EN 60034-1 at a frequency of 50 Hz, a coolant temperature (CT) or ambient temperature (AT) of 40 C and a site altitude (SA) or up to 1000 m above
sea level.
For higher coolant temperatures and/or site altitudes higher than
1000 m above sea level, the specified motor output must be reduced using the factor kHT.
Depending on the frame size of the motor or the number of
poles, special windings may be added to the motors for the
different operating conditions.
This results in an admissible output of the motor of:
Padm. = Prated kHT

If the admissible motor output is no longer adequate for the

drive, it should be checked whether the motor with the next
higher rate output fulfills the requirements.
Abbreviation
Padm.
Prated
kHT

Description
Admissible motor output
Rated output
Factor for abnormal coolant temperature
and/or site altitude

Units
kW
kW

The motors are designed for temperature class 155 (F) and used
in temperature class 130 (B). Under non-standard operating
conditions, if they are to be used in class 130 (B), the admissible
output must be determined from the tables below.
If explosion-proof motors are to be used (with the exception of
1MJ6) at coolant temperatures that exceed 40 C and site
altitudes higher than 1000 m above sea level, the appropriate
correction factors must be requested.

Reduction factor kHT for different site altitudes and/or coolant temperatures
Site altitude above
sea level
m
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000

Site altitude above sea level

Coolant temperature
<30 C
30 C ... 40 C
1.07
1.00
1.04
0.97
1.00
0.94
0.96
0.90
0.92
0.86
0.88
0.82
0.82
0.77

45 C
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.86
0.82
0.79
0.74

50 C
0.92
0.89
0.86
0.83
0.79
0.75
0.71

55 C
0.87
0.84
0.82
0.78
0.75
0.71
0.67

60 C
0.82
0.79
0.77
0.74
0.70
0.67
0.63

Coolant temperature and site altitude are rounded-off to 5 C or

500 m.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/31

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

For the following outputs, rms values are specified for coolant
temperatures (CT) of 45 C and 50 C that must be specified
when ordering.

The following applies to all motors:

The motors can withstand 1.5 times the rated current at rated
voltage and frequency for two minutes (DIN EN 60034).

Power (kW)

Ambient temperature:
All motors can be used in the standard version at ambient temperatures between 20 and +40 C.
Motors can be used in temperature class 155 (F)
at 40 C with service factor 1.1, i.e. the motor can be continuously overloaded with 10 % of the rated output (for motors of
1LG6 and 1LA9 series, with the exception of 1LA9 with increased output, with service factor 1.15, i.e. 15 % of the rated
output)
above 40 C at rated output.

kW
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
145
160
180
200
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
710
800
900
1000

Admissible output at 50 Hz
For CT 45 C
For CT 50 C
kW
kW
10.5
10
14.5
13.8
17.8
17
21
20
29
27.5
35.5
34
43
41.5
53
51
72
69
86
83
106
101
127
122
139
133
153
147
173
166
192
184
240
230
269
258
302
290
340
325
384
368
432
414
480
460
538
515
605
580
682
663
768
736
864
828
960
920

For details of derating for use in class 155 (F), see

DURIGNIT IR 2000 insulation system.
Motors for coolant temperatures other than 40 C or site altitudes
higher than 1000 m above sea level for use in temperature class
130 (B), must always be ordered with the supplementary order
code Z and plain text. In the case of extreme derating, the
operating data for the motors will be less favourable due to
partial utilization.
The following special versions are possible for 1LG4, 1LG6,
1LP4, 1PP4 and 1LA8 motors:
Motors for coolant temperatures from 50 to +40 C
order code D02 (not for 1LA8)
Motors for coolant temperatures from 40 to +40 C
order code D03
Motors for coolant temperatures from 30 to +40 C
order code D04
The following special versions are possible for 1LA8, 1PQ8 and
1LL8 motors:
Motors for 45 C coolant temperature, 4 % derating, order
code D11
Motors for 50 C coolant temperature, 8 % derating, order
code D12
Motors for 55 C coolant temperature, 13 % derating, order
code D13
Motors for 60 C coolant temperature, 18 % derating, order
code D14
For details of order codes for use in temperature class 155 (F),
see DURIGNIT IR 2000 insulation system under Windings and
insulation.

0/32

Siemens D 81.1 2008

When motors are used in temperature class 130 (B) for higher
ambient temperatures and site altitudes, derating occurs in accordance with the table Reduction factor kHT for different site altitudes and/or coolant temperatures.
For motors ex-stock, the service factor is indicated on the rating
plate.
For other temperatures, special measures are necessary.
When brakes are to be mounted on motors intended for operation at temperatures below freezing, please contact your local
Siemens office.
Windings and insulation
DURIGNIT IR 2000 insulation system
The DURIGNIT IR 2000 insulation system comprises high-grade
enameled wires and insulating sheet materials combined with
solvent-free impregnating resin.
The system ensures a high level of mechanical and electrical
strength as well as good serviceability and a long motor life.
The insulation system protects the winding against aggressive
gases, vapors, dust, oil and increased air humidity. It can withstand the usual vibration stressing.
The insulation is suitable up to an absolute air humidity of 30 g
water per m3 of air. Moisture condensation should be prevented
from forming on the winding. Please contact your local Siemens
office if higher values are present.
Please inquire about extreme applications.
Winding and insulation design with regard to temperature class
and air humidity
All motors are designed for temperature class 155 (F).
At rated output with mains-fed operation, the motors can be
used in temperature class 130 (B).
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), with
service factor (SF)
For all 1LA motors (with the exception of 1LA9 with increased
output, as these are already used according to temperature
class 155 (F)), 1LG, 1LL8 and 1PP motors for mains-fed operation in frame sizes 56 to 355 for the rated output given in the selection table and rated voltage, a service factor of 1.1 can be
specified (for 1LA9 and 1LG6 SF = 1.15) and 1.05 for frame
sizes 400 and 450.
Order code C11.
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), for
increased output
For motors supplied from stock (with the exception of 1LA9 with
increased output, as these are already used according to temperature class 155 (F)) and 1LA8 motors, the service factor is
indicated on the rating plate as standard. For use according to
temperature class 155 (F), the rated output according to the
selection and ordering data can be increased by 10 % (15 % for
1LA9, with the exception of 1LA9 with increased output, and
1LG6) and by 1.05 for frame sizes 400 and 450.
Order code C12.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), with
increased coolant temperature
At the output specified in the catalog under mains-fed operation,
the coolant temperature can be increased to 55 C (50 C for
frame sizes 400 and 450) with the exception of 1LA9 with increased output.
Order code C13
The service factor (SF) is not indicated on the rating plate for
order codes C12 and C13.
For converter-fed operation at the output specified in the catalog, the motors are used according to temperature class
155 (F). Order codes C11, C12 and C13 are not possible. This
applies to motors up to 500 V and to motors up to 690 V.
Temperature class 180 (H), used according to 155 (F), with
Service Factor (SF1.1)
For all 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motors for mains-fed operation in
frame sizes 315 to 355 for the rated output given in the selection
table and rated voltage, a service factor of 1.1 and 1.05 can be
specified (for frame sizes 400 and 450. For use according to
temperature class 180 (H), as service factor of 1.1 for mains-fed
operation is also permissible.
For all 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motors for converter-fed operation
in frame sizes 315 to 450 for the rated output given in the selection table and rated voltage, a service factor of 1.1 can be specified. The thermal service life of the motor winding increases by
at least 5 times when used in converter-fed operation.
Use according to temperature class 180 (H) is not possible for
all motors. All 400 V versions are available only on request. Due
to the rated current, a larger connection box of type 1XB9600 is
generally provided for frame sizes 400 (2 and 4 pole) and 450
(all pole numbers) part of order code C14. The temperature
class 180 (H) does not apply to motors with separately driven fan
with 1PQ8.
Order code C14
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B), with
increased coolant temperature and/or site altitude
For standard motors, explosion-proof motors and fan motors
1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9 (with the exception of 1LA9 with increased output since these are already used according to temperature class 155 (F)), 1LG4, 1LG6, 1LP4, 1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP4,
1PP5, and 1PP7, a version designed for temperature class 155
(F) for use according to temperature class 130 (B) can be ordered with other customized requirements with specification in
plain text.
Order code Y50
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), other
requirements
For 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LG4, 1LG6, 1PP4, 1PP5 and
1PP7 standard motors and fan motors as well as 1MA6 and
1MA7 explosion-proof motors, a version can be ordered
designed for temperature class 155 (F), for use according to
temperature class 155 (F) with different customized requirements, by specifying the information in plain text. Certification
costs may be charged in the case of 1MA6 and 1MA7 motors.
Order code Y52
Temperature class 180 (H) at rated output and maximum
coolant temperature (CT) 60 C
For motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LG4, 1PP4, 1PP5 and
1PP7, use according to temperature class 180 (H) is permitted
at rated output and at a maximum coolant temperature of 60 C.
This does not apply to explosion-proof motors of Zones 2, 21 and
22 and to motors with UL approval (order code D31). Not possible for CSA approval (order code D40) for 1LA5, 1LG4, 1PP4
and 1PP5 motor series. The specified grease life applies to a
coolant temperature of 40 C. For a 10 K increase in coolant temperature, the grease life or lubrication interval is halved.
Order code C18

Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B), coolant temperature 45 C, approx. 4 % derating
For motors of series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9 (with the exception
of 1LA9 with increased output), 1LG4, 1LG6, 1MA6, 1MA7,
1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP4, 1PP5, and 1PP7, a version can be ordered
that is designed to temperature class 155 (F), for use according
to temperature class 130 (B) at a maximum coolant temperature
of 45 C at 4 % derating.
Order code C22
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B), coolant temperature 50 C, approx. 8 % derating
For motors of series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9 (with the exception
of 1LA9 with increased output), 1LG4, 1LG6, 1MA6, 1MA7,
1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP4, 1PP5, and 1PP7, a version can be ordered
that is designed to temperature class 155 (F), for use according
to temperature class 130 (B) at a maximum coolant temperature
of 50 C at 8 % derating.
Order code C23
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B), coolant temperature 55 C, approx. 13 % derating
For motors of series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9 (with the exception
of 1LA9 with increased output), 1LG4, 1LG6, 1MA6, 1MA7,
1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP4, 1PP5, and 1PP7, a version can be ordered
that is designed to temperature class 155 (F), for use according
to temperature class 130 (B) at a maximum coolant temperature
of 55 C at 13 % derating.
Order code C24
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B), coolant temperature 60 C, approx. 18 % derating
For motors of series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9 (with the exception
of 1LA9 with increased output), 1LG4, 1LG6, 1MA6, 1MA7,
1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP4, 1PP5, and 1PP7, a version can be ordered
designed for temperature class 155 (F), for use according to
temperature class 130 (B) at a maximum coolant temperature of
60 C at 18 % derating.
Order code C25
Increased air temperature/humidity with 30 to 60 g water
per m3 of air
For motors of series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LG4, 1LG6,
1LP4, 1LP5, 1LP7, 1MA6, 1MA7, 1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP4, 1PP5 and
1PP7, a version can be ordered for increased air humidity of between 30 and 60 g water per m3 of air depending on the temperature as listed in the table below. This version includes condensation drainage holes (order code L12) with the exception of
1MJ motors. A condensation protection by means of anti-condensation heaters for 230 V (order code K45) is included in
1MJ6 and 1MJ7 motors.
Order code C19.
Please contact your local Siemens office if order code C19 is to
be combined with additional mountings.
Increased air temperature/humidity with more than 60 g up
to 100 g water per m3 of air
For motors of series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LG4, 1LG6,
1LP4, 1LP5, 1LP7, 1MA6, 1MA7, 1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP4, 1PP5 and
1PP7, a version can be ordered for increased air humidity of between more than 60 g and 100 g water per m3 of air depending
on the temperature as listed in the table below. This version includes condensation drainage holes (order code L12) with the
exception of 1MJ motors. A condensation protection by means
of anti-condensation heaters for 230 V (order code K45) is included in 1MJ6 and 1MJ7 motors.
Order code C26.
Please contact your local Siemens office if order code C26 is to
be combined with additional mountings (e.g. rotary pulse encoders, brakes).

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/33

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Absolute/relative conversion of air humidity
Relative humidity
10 %
15 %
20 %
25 %
30 %
35 %
40 %
45 %
50 %
55 %
60 %
65 %
70 %
75 %
80 %
85 %
90 %
95 %
100 %

Temperature
20 C
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
17

30 C
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
14
15
17
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
29
30

40 C
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
26
28
31
33
36
38
41
43
46
49
51

The values in the table with a blue background are covered by the standard
version (up to 30 g water per m3 of air).
The values in the table with a light gray background are covered by order
code C19 (30 to 60 g of water per m3 of air).
The values in the table with a dark gray background are covered by order
code C26 (60 to 100 g of water per m3 of air).

Please contact your local Siemens office regarding requirements

exceeding 100 g water per m3 of air
Restarting against residual field and opposite phase
All motors can be reclosed against 100 % residual field after a
mains voltage failure.

Motor protection
A distinction is made between current-dependent and motortemperature-dependent protection devices.
Current-dependent protection devices
Fuses are only used to protect mains cables in the event of a
short-circuit. They are not suitable for overload protection of the
motor.
The motors are usually protected by delayed overload protection
devices (circuit-breakers for motor protection or overload relays).
This protection is current-dependent and is particularly effective
in the case of a locked rotor.
For standard duty with short start-up times and starting currents
that are not excessive and for low numbers of switching operations, motor protection switches provide adequate protection.
Motor protection switches are not suitable for high starting duty
or large numbers of switching operations. Differences in the thermal time constants for the protection equipment and the motor
results in unnecessary early tripping when the protection switch
is set to rated current.
Motor-temperature-dependent protection devices
Temperature detectors installed in the motor winding are suitable protection devices in the case of slowly rising motor temperature.

0/34

Siemens D 81.1 2008

50 C
8
12
17
21
25
29
33
37
41
46
50
54
58
62
66
70
74
79
83

60 C
13
19
26
32
39
45
52
58
65
71
78
84
91
97
104
110
117
123
130

70 C
20
30
39
49
59
69
79
89
98
108
118
128
138
148
157
167
177
187
197

80 C
29
44
58
73
87
102
116
131
145
160
174
189
203
218
233
247
262
276
291

90 C
42
63
84
105
126
146
167
188
209
230
251
272
293
314
335
356
377
398
419

When a limit temperature is reached, these bimetal switches

(NC contacts) can deactivate an auxiliary circuit. The circuit can
only be reclosed following a considerable fall in temperature.
When the motor current rises quickly (e.g. with a locked rotor),
these switches are not suitable due to their large thermal time
constants.
Temperature detectors for tripping
Order code A31
The temperature monitors have the following current carrying
capacity and switching capacity:
230 V AC cos: 2.5 A
24 V DC:
1.6 A
The most comprehensive protection against thermal overloading of the motor is provided by PTC thermistors (thermistor
motor protection) installed in the motor winding. Due to its low
heating capacity and excellent thermal contact with the winding,
the winding temperature can be closely monitored.
When a limit temperature is reached (nominal tripping temperature), the PTC thermistor undergoes a step change in resistance.
This is evaluated by a tripping unit and can be used to open auxiliary circuits. The PTC thermistors themselves cannot be subjected to high currents and voltages. This would result in destruction of the semiconductor. The switching hysteresis of the
PTC thermistor and tripping unit is low, which supports fast restarting of the drive. Motors with this type of protection are recommended for high duty starting, switching duty, extreme
changes in load, high ambient temperatures or fluctuating supply systems.
Motor protection with PTC thermistors with 3 embedded temperature sensors for tripping.
In the connection box, 2 auxiliary terminals are required. The
maximum number of auxiliary terminals in the main connection
box of the motor is specified under Number of auxiliary terminals in the section Motor connection and connection box. An
auxiliary connection box is required when the total number of
auxiliary terminals in the connection box of the motor exceeds
the specified values. For an additional charge, the connections
can be routed through a separate auxiliary connection box
(order code L97, M50 or M88, see Auxiliary connection box
in the section Motor connection and connection box).
Order code A11

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
For pole-changing motors with two separate windings, the number of temperature sensors must be doubled.
Two sets of three temperature sensors are used if a warning is
required before the motor is shut down (tripped). The warning is
normally set to 10 K below the tripping temperature.
Motor protection with PTC thermistors with 6 embedded temperature sensors for tripping and alarm.
In the connection box, 4 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A12
All 1LA8 motors are equipped in the standard version with
6 PTC thermistors for alarm and tripping.
For 1LA, 1MJ and 1LG motors, the tripping temperature
corresponds to PTC thermistors for temperature class 155 (F).
For 1LA8, 1LL and 1PQ motors, the tripping temperature corresponds to PTC thermistors for temperature class 155 (F),
also for 1LA8 in Zone 22.
For 1LA and 1LG motors for Zones 2, 21, 22 or VIK thermistors
temperature class 130 (B) (see catalog part Motors operating
with frequency converters).

Motor temperature detection with embedded temperature sensor KTY 84-130.

In the connection box, 2 auxiliary terminals are required.
The maximum number of auxiliary terminals in the main connection box of the motor is specified under Number of auxiliary terminals in the section Motor connection and connection box.
An auxiliary connection box is required when the total number of
auxiliary terminals in the connection box of the motor exceeds
the specified values. For an additional charge, the connections
can be routed through a separate auxiliary connection box
(order code L97, M50 or M88, see Auxiliary connection box in
the section Motor connection and connection box).
Order code A23
For 1LA8 motors, the standard PTC thermistors are omitted when
ordering with order code A23. A combination of A12 and A23 is
possible, price on request.
OR
Motortemperature detection with embedded temperature sensors 2 x KTY 84-130.
In the connection box, 4 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A25

In order to achieve full thermal protection it is necessary to combine a thermally delayed overcurrent release and a PTC thermistor. For full motor protection implemented only with PTC thermistors, please inquire.

The temperature sensor is embedded in the winding head of the

motor in the same manner as a PTC thermistor. Evaluation is performed, for example, in the converter.

Motor temperature detection with converter-fed operation

For mains-fed operation, the temperature monitoring device

3RS10 that is part of the protection equipment can be ordered
separately. For further details, see Catalog LV 1,
Order No.: E86060-K1002-A101-A7-7600.

KTY 84-130 temperature sensor

This sensor is a semi-conductor that changes its resistance
depending on temperature in accordance with a defined curve.
3

G_M015_EN_00190

2.5
k

Motor protection
1LA and 1LG motors for Zones 2, 21 and 22 for converter-fed operation already have a PTC thermistor for tripping as standard.
For converter-fed operation, a PTC thermistor for alarm can be
ordered additionally.
PTC thermistor for alarm for converter-fed operation in Zones 2,
21 and 22.
In the connection box, 2 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A10
1MJ motors:
PTC thermistors must always be used if the duty is not S1
(continuous operation) in accordance with IEC 60034-1/
DIN EN 60034-1.
If 1MJ motors are operated with converters, the PTC thermistor
in the winding is essential. For 1MJ6/1MJ7 motors, an additional
PTC thermistor is installed in the connection box.

1.5
D = 2 mA

Motor protection with PTC thermistors for converter-fed operation with 3 or 4 embedded temperature sensors for tripping.
In the connection box, 2 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A15.

0.5

or
0
0

50

100

150

200

250 C

300

KTY 84-130 temperature sensor characteristic

Some converters from Siemens determine the motor temperature using the resistance of the temperature sensor. They can be
set to a required temperature for alarm and tripping.

Motor protection with PTC thermistors for converter-fed operation with 6 or 8 embedded temperature sensors for alarm and
tripping.
In the connection box, 4 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A16.
For versions with temperature sensors, in some cases, anti-condensation heaters cannot be mounted or can only be mounted
for certain frame sizes. See Special versions in the corresponding catalog parts.
If thermistor protection is required, 3 PTC thermistors connected
in series are embedded in the stator winding of the motor.
The 3RN1 temperature monitoring device that is part of the protection equipment must be ordered separately it is PTB certified. For further details about mode of operation, circuit and
prices, see Catalog LV 1,
Order No.: E86060-K1002-A101-A7-7600.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/35

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Motor temperature detection with resistance thermometers

Heating and ventilation

The resistance thermometers are embedded in the stator winding or in the rolling contact bearings or bearing plates of the
motors. The following possibilities can be implemented:

Anti-condensation heaters

Stator winding:
3 or 6 PT 100 resistance thermometers are embedded in the stator winding in 2-wire connection. The two connections for each
resistance thermometer are routed through the main connection
box. In the connection box, 6 or 12 auxiliary terminals are required. The maximum number of auxiliary terminals in the main
connection box of the motor is specified under Number of auxiliary terminals in the section Motor connection and connection
box. An auxiliary connection box is required when the total number of auxiliary terminals in the connection box of the motor exceeds the specified values.
For an additional charge, the connections can be routed through
a separate auxiliary connection box (order code L97, M50 or
M88, see Auxiliary connection box in the section Motor connection and connection box); 3-wire or 4-wire connection (from
the terminal strip) is also possible (please inquire).
The resistance thermometer embedded in the winding head is
calbrated to 100 at 0 C. The base values for the resistances
(i.e. the relationship between the resistance and temperature) as
well as the admissible deviations are laid down in DIN IEC 751.
The changes in temperature are transferred to a display device
in the form of changes in resistance.
The display devices are not included in the price and are not
included in the delivery package.
Installation of 3 PT 100 resistance thermometers in stator winding.
In the connection box, 6 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A60
Installation of 6 PT100 resistance thermometers in stator winding.
In the connection box, 12 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A61
Note regarding non-standard 1LA8 motors: When A61 is ordered, the PTC thermistors installed as standard in the motor are
omitted. A combination of A12 and A61 is possible, price on request.
Rolling contact bearings or bearing plates:
The bearing thermometers are screwed into the bearing plates
of the drive end (DE) and non-drive-end (NDE). The wires are
routed through the main connection box.
In the connection box, auxiliary terminals are required. The maximum number of auxiliary terminals in the main connection box
of the motor is specified under Number of auxiliary terminals in
the section Motor connection and connection box. An auxiliary
connection box is required when the total number of auxiliary terminals in the connection box of the motor exceeds the specified
values.
For an additional charge, the connections can be routed through
a separate auxiliary terminal box (order code L97, M50 or M88,
see Auxiliary connection box in the section Motor connection
and connection box). The changes in temperature are transferred to a display device in the form of changes in resistance.
The display device is not included in the price and is not included in the delivery package.
Installation of 2 PT 100 screw-in resistance thermometers
(basic circuit) for rolling-contact bearings.
In the connection box, 4 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A72
Installation of 2 PT 100 screw-in resistance thermometers (3-wire
circuit) for rolling-contact bearings.
In the connection box, 6 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A78
Installation of 2 PT 100 double screw-in resistance thermometers (3-wire circuit) for rolling-contact bearings.
In the connection box, 12 auxiliary terminals are required.
Order code A80

0/36

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Supply voltage 230 V (1~)

Order code K45
or
Order code M15
Supply voltage 115 V (1~)
Order code K46
or
Order code M14
Motors whose windings are at risk of condensation due to the climatic conditions, e.g. inactive motors in humid atmospheres or
motors that are subjected to widely fluctuating temperatures can
be equipped with anti-condensation heaters.
An additional cable entry M16 x 1.5 or M20 x 1.5 (M20 x 1.5 or
M25 x 1.5 for 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motor series) is provided for
the connecting cable.
Anti-condensation heaters must not be switched on during operation.
1MJ6 motors:
For 1MJ6 motors up to frame size 160 L, a built-in anti-condensation heater is not possible for versions with PTC thermistors.
For 1MA and 1LA motors. In designs for Zone 21:
Built-in anti-condensation heaters are not possible up to frame
size 200L.
For 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motor series in designs for Zone 2, the anticondensation heater can only be switched on after the motor has
been switched off for one hour.
Instead of an anti-condensation heater, another possibility (without additional charge) is connection of a voltage that is approximately 4 to 10 % of the rated motor voltage to stator terminals U1
and V1; 20 to 30 % of rated motor current is sufficient to heat the
motor (this does not apply to 1MA6 frame sizes 225 M to 315 L,
1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8).
Motor series

Frame size

1LA5, 1LP5, 1PP5,

1LA6, 1LA7, 1LP7,
1PP7, 1LA9, 1MJ6

56 ... 80
90 ... 112
132 ... 200
225
180 ... 200
225 ... 250
180 ... 200
225 ... 250
280 ... 315
280 ... 315
280 ... 315

Heater output of the anticondensation heaters in Watt (W)

Supply voltage at
230 V
115 V
Order code
Order code
K45
K46
25
25
50
50
100
100
100
100
55
55
92
92
48
48
92
92
105
105
105
105
109
109

315 ... 450

200

1LG4, 1LP4, 1PP4,

1LG6, 1MA6, 1MJ7
1LG4, 1LG6
in designs for
Zone 2
1MA6
1LG4, 1LP4, 1PP4,
1LG6, 1MJ7
1LA8, 1PQ8, 1LL8

183

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Fans/Separately driven fans

Metal external fan impeller

Motors of frame sizes 63 to 450 have radial-flow fans in the standard version that cool regardless of the direction of rotation of
the motor (cooling method IC 411 acc. to DIN EN 60034-6, IC01
for 1LL8 motor series). The air flow is forced from the non-driveend (NDE) to the drive end (DE).
Motors of frame size 56 do not have a fan (IC 410).
For details of separately driven fans for frame sizes 100 to 315,
see also Page 0/76.

The standard fan impeller made of plastic can be replaced with

a fan impeller made of metal. This version can be supplied for
motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA8, 1LA9, 1LG4, 1LG6,
1MA6, 1MA7, 1MJ6, 1MJ7 and 1LL8.
For motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LG4 and 1LG6, the
metal external fan can also be used with converter-fed
operation.
A metal external fan is already included for the low-noise
version.
Up to frame size 160, the metal external fan impeller is manufactured from sheet aluminum or steel and for frame size 180 and
above it is manufactured from cast iron or sheet steel.
Order codes K35

1LA8 and 1LL8 (frame size 355 and above) 2-pole motors have
an axial-flow fan for clockwise rotation in the standard version.
The fan can be subsequently reinstalled for counter-clockwise
rotation.
Motors of the 1LA8 series are also available in a version with a
separately driven fan (cooling method IC 416 1PQ8 series)
and in a version with through-ventilation (cooling method IC 01,
IP23 degree of protection 1LL8 series).
1PQ8 motors have separately driven fans that cool regardless of
the speed of the main motor (IC416).
Supply voltages for 1PQ8 separately driven fans:
230 V/400 VY 10 %, 50 Hz, 460 V 10 %, 60 Hz.
Other voltages/frequencies can be ordered by specifying in
plain text with order code Y81 (additional charge).
Supply voltage of separately driven fan for 1LG motors:
The supply voltage of the separately driven fan conforms to the
stated rated voltage ranges of table Technical data of the separately driven fan, see Page 0/76. Deviating voltages/frequencies can be ordered with order code Y81 and plain text (additional charge).
When the motor is mounted and the air intake is restricted, then
it must be ensured that a minimum clearance is maintained between the fan cover and the wall. This clearance is calculated
from the difference between the protective cover and the fan
cover (dimension LM L) or is specified in the detail dimension
drawing.
For design of the fan/separately driven fan and the fan cover, see
the tables below.

Fan cover for textile industry

For motors 1LG4 and 1LG6, the fan cover can be used in the
standard version for the textile industry.
For motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7 and 1LA9, a version of the
fan cover can be supplied specially for the textile industry. This
has a protective cover and is made of non-corrosive sheet steel.
Order code H17
Cast-iron fan cover
For 1MA6 motor series, frame sizes 225 to 315, the fan cover can
be supplied in cast-iron instead of plastic.
Order code K34
Sheet metal fan cover
For 1LG4 and 1LG6 motor series, the fan cover can be supplied
in sheet metal instead of plastic.
Order code L36
For 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motor series, the sheet-metal fan
cover is supplied as standard.
Design of fan and fan cover for standard motors, explosion-proof
motors, motors operating with frequency converters, fan motors
and smoke extraction motors:
Motor series
1LA5, 1LA7
1LA9
1LA6
1MA7
1MA6
1MJ6
1MJ7
1LG4, 1LG6

Frame size
63 ... 225
63 ... 200
100 ... 160
63 ... 160
100 ... 315
71 ... 200
255 ... 315
180 ... 315

Fan material 1)
Plastic

Fan cover material 1)

Non-corrosive sheet
steel

Plastic

Glass fiber strengthened plastic 2)

Design of the fan/separately driven fan and the fan cover for non-standard motors
Motor series

1LA8, 1LL8
1PQ8
1LA8, 1LL8
1PQ8
1LA8, 1LL8
1PQ8

Frame size

315
355 ... 400
450

Fan material 3)
Number of poles
2
Radial-flow fan, plastic
Radial-flow fan, sheet steel
Axial-flow fan, cast aluminum
Radial-flow fan, sheet steel
Axial-flow fan, hub: cast aluminum,
vane: plastic
Radial-flow fan, sheet steel

1)

The plastic fan can be used at ambient temperatures of up to 70 C.

For designs for Zones 21 and 22 and VIK, other materials are used in
some cases.

2)

For designs:
for Zones 2, 21 and 22 VIK (order code K30),
CSA (order code D40)
UL (order code D31)
a fan cover is used that is made of non-corrosive sheet steel.

Fan cover material

Number of poles
4 ... 8
Radial-flow fan, plastic
Radial-flow fan, sheet steel
Radial-flow fan, plastic
Radial-flow fan, sheet steel
Radial-flow fan, plastic

Non-corrosive sheet steel

Radial-flow fan, sheet steel

3)

The plastic fan can be used at ambient temperatures of up to 70 C.

For designs for Zones 21 and 22, VIK and UL, other materials are used in
some cases.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/37

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Motor connection and connection box
Connection, circuit and connection box
Location of the connection box
The connection box of the motor can be mounted in four different
locations or positions. The position of the connection box must
always be viewed from the drive end (DE). The standard position
of the connection box is on top, with the exception of non-standard motors in which case the standard position of the connection box is on the right-hand side.
Connection box on right-hand side Order code K09
Connection box on left-hand side Order code K10
If rotation of the connection box is possible later for motors that
are supplied as standard with cast feet, the version Connection
box on top, feet screwed on is recommended.
Order code K11

K09

G_D081_XX_00189

The number of winding ends depends on the winding design.

Three-phase motors are connected to the three phase conductors L1, L2 and L3 of a three-phase system. The rated voltage of
the motor in the running connection must match the phase conductor voltages of the network.
When the three phases are operating in a time sequence and are
connected to the terminals of the motor in alphabetical order U1,
V1 and W1, clockwise rotation is established as viewed from the
motor shaft. The direction of rotation of the motor can be reversed if two connecting leads are interchanged.
Labeled terminals are provided to connect the protective conductor.
A protective earth terminal is provided in the connection box for
earthing. An earth terminal is located on the outside of the motor
housing (special version in the case of 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7 and
1LA9 motors. Order code L13).
If a brake control system or thermal protection is installed, the
connections will also be in the connection box.
The motors are suitable for direct connection to the line supply.
Design of the connection box
Connection boxes for motors to Exn (Zone 2) type of protection and for protection against dust explosions (Zone 21) differ from the basic version. For dust explosion protection
(Zone 22), the connection boxes of the basic version are
used.
For 1LG4 and 1LG6 motors, frame sizes 180 to 225 and 1MA6
motors frame sizes 180 to 200, 1MJ6 frame sizes 71 to 160 M
and frame sizes 180 to 200 L, a connection box is available in
cast iron.
Order code K15
For 1LA6 and 1MA6 frame size 100 160, 1MJ6 frame size
160 L and 1MJ7, 1MA6 frame size 225 315 standard version.
Not possible for 1LA7 and 1MA7.

1)

Possible for frame size IM B3, IM B6, IM B7, IM B8, IM V6 with/without

protective cover, IM B35.

0/38

Siemens D 81.1 2008

For 1MJ motors, an explosion-proof connection box with

Ex d II C type of protection is available.
Order code K53
For motor series 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8, the ends of the windings
are routed through single leadthroughs into the connection box.
The number of terminals and the size of the connection box is
designed for standard requirements. For special requirements
or if the customer requires a larger connection box, the connection box for the next larger frame size can be supplied.
For all motors except for non-standard motors and 1MJ motors:
Next larger connection box (only frame size 180 and above)
Order code L00
Detailed assignment of connection boxes, see Page 0/43 and
0/46.

K111)

K10

For 1MJ motors:

The connection boxes are designed to Ex e type of protection.
The ends of the windings for motors up to frame size 160 are
routed through a shared explosion-proof leadthrough into the
connection box; for frame size 180 and above, they are routed
through single leadthroughs.

For non-standard motors (motor series 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8)

Next larger 1XB1 621 connection box
Order code M58
Next larger 1XB1 631 connection box
Order code L00
Detailed assignment of connection boxes, see Page 0/43 and
0/44.
If the necessary installation angle of the motor would cause
machine components to collide with the connection box, the
connection box can be moved from the drive end (DE) to the
non-drive end (NDE).
Order code M64
Not possible for explosion-proof motors.
Motor connection
Line feeder cables
The line feeder cables must be dimensioned acc. to
DIN VDE 0298. The number of required feeder cables, if necessary in parallel, is defined by:
The max. cable cross-section which can be connected
The cable type
Routing
Ambient temperature and the corresponding admissible current in accordance with DIN VDE 0298
Parallel feeders
Some motors must be fitted with parallel feeders due to the
admissible current per terminal. These motors are indicated in
the selection and ordering data in the respective catalog parts.
With 1XB7 connection boxes, 2 parallel feeders are possible;
with 1XB1 631 connection boxes, up to 4 parallel feeders are
possible; and with GT640 and 1XB1 621 connection boxes,
2 parallel feeders are possible.
For motors with an upper connection box section and auxiliary
terminals (e.g. with order code A11), an M16 x 1.5 or M20 x 1.5
cable gland with plug is additionally available.
For further details, see the data sheet function in SD configurator.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
1LA7 and 1LA9 in frame size 100 L to 160 L
The connection box is integrated into the frame. Two knock-outs
are provided at each side for boltings. The nuts for the boltings
are supplied with the connection box.
Cable entry on connection box
Unless stated otherwise, the cable entry is located in the standard position as shown in the illustration below.
The connection box can also be rotated such that the cable
entry is located
Towards the drive end (DE)
(rotation of connection box by 90, entry from DE)
Order code K83
Towards the non-drive end (NDE)
(rotation of connection box by 90, entry from NDE)
Order code K84

With options K83 and K84, 1LA7 motors of frame sizes 100 to
160 require an additional connection box upper section. This
measure results in increased height of the connection box. The
dimension AD increases by approx. 30 mm, dimension AF
changes depending on the frame size by between 45 and
47 mm. For the precise values of AD and AF, see Dimension
drawings in the corresponding catalog parts.
If the cable entry is rotated by 180, special measures are required for 1LA7 and 1LA5 motors of frame sizes 63 to 90 as well
as 180 to 225 (without a change in dimensions). (Rotation of the
connection box by 180)
Order code K85
From frame size 100 to 160, the break-outs in the connection box
can be used.
The dimensions of the connection box are listed in the relevant
catalog parts in accordance with the frame size and the Dimension drawings.
If the position of the connection box (connection box RHS, LHS
or above) is changed, the position of the cable entry must be
checked and, if necessary, it can be ordered with the corresponding order codes (K83; K84; K85).
Ordering example
Connection box RHS (Order code K09):
If no other order code is specified, cable entry is from below.
With additional order code K83:
Cable entry from drive end (DE)

K85

Drive end
DE

K84

K83

Standard

Non-drive end
NDE

G_D081_EN_00157a

For cable entry to a standard connection box, a cable gland can

be ordered for motor connection.
One cable gland, metal
Order code K54
For cable entry to a connection box with the options of motor protection or anti-condensation heating, two cable glands will be
supplied.
Cable glands are supplied in metal as standard. For temperatures below 30 C and/or higher than +60 C, the material is selected/used according to the temperature.
Cable gland, maximum configuration
Order code K55

For non-standard motors (motor series 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8),

the cable entry can be implemented in accordance with DIN
89280 for the maximum possible configuration of cable glands
in the connection box.
Order code K57
A two-part plate on the connection box can be supplied if required.
Order code K06

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/39

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

For special requirements for which the standard holes for the
cable entries are inadequate, too large or when the routing must
be implemented differently, an undrilled entry plate can be supplied to allow holes to be drilled as required on assembly.
Order code L01
Protruding cable ends
For confined spaces, protruding cable ends can be ordered,
without a connection box with cover plate.
For protruding cable ends for smoke extraction motors, see catalog part 9 Smoke extraction motors.
The following lengths of protruding cables can already be ordered using order codes on request:
3 cables protruding, 0.5 m long 1)
Order code L44
3 cables protruding, 1.5 m long 1)
Order code L45
6 cables protruding, 0.5 m long
Order code L47
6 cables protruding, 1.5 m long
Order code L48
6 cables protruding, 3.0 m long
Order code L49
The cross-section of the named cables refers to a coolant temperature up to CT 40 C

For 1LG4/1LG6/1LP4/1PP4 motors, it is also possible to order

the length of protruding cable in plian text with order codes L51
and L52.
In combination with winding monitoring (order code A11, A12,
A15, A16, A23, A25 or A31) or anti-condensation heating (order
code K45 or K46), option L44, L45, L47, L48 or L49 must be
specified twice on ordering.
Position of protruding cables
Motor series 1LA7
Frame sizes 56 to 160:
As standard, above at drive end (DE).
Motor series 1LA6
Frame sizes 100 to 160:
As standard, above at drive end (DE).
Motor series 1LA5
Frame sizes 180 to 225:
As standard, above at drive end (DE).
Motor series 1LA9
Frame sizes 56 to 200:
As standard, above at drive end (DE).
Motor series 1LG4/1LG6/1LP4/1PP4
Frame sizes 180 to 315:
As standard, above at drive end (DE).
Optionally left or right at drive end (DE)

It is also possible to rotate the position of the three protruding

cables:
Cable connection on right side, as viewed from drive end
(DE) 2)
Order code L51
Cable connection on left side, as viewed from non-drive end
(NDE) 2)
Order code L52

1)

With only 3 protruding cables additional plain text specifying star or delta
connection is required.

0/40

Siemens D 81.1 2008

2)

For motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1PP5 and 1PP6 only possible for
smoke-extraction motors.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Connection, circuit and connection box
Type gk 030

Type gk 127

Type gk 130, gk 230, gk 330

(not for 1LA5, 1LG4, 1LG6)

Type gk 330 (for 1LA5, 1LG4, 1LG6)

Type gk 135, gk 235, gk 335

Type gk 430, gk 431

Type 1XB7 222

Type gt 520, gt 540, gt 620, gt 640

Type 1XB7 422, 1XB7 522

Type 1XB7 622

Type 1XB1 621

Type 1XB1 631

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/41

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Type gk 465

Type 1XC1 270, 1XC1 380

Type 1XC1 480, 1XC1 580

Type 1XB7 322

Connection boxes for 1LA, 1LG, 1LP and 1PP motors

Motors
1LA7, 1LA9
1LP7, 1PP7

Frame size
56 ... 71
80 ... 90
100 ... 160

1LA5, 1LA9
1LP5, 1PP5
1LA6
1LG4, 1LG6
1LP4, 1PP4, 1PP6
1LA8, 1PQ8, 1LL8

180 ... 225

100 ... 160
180 ... 200
225
250 ... 315
315 ... 355 2) 3)
400 ... 450

Number of cable entries

2 cable glands incl.
Plugs

Connection box material

Aluminum alloy

Feeder connection
Without cable lug or
with cable lug

2 holes 180 apart,

4 break-out openings sealed with cast
iron skin
(2 left, 2 right),
connection box is moulded
2 holes with plugs
Cast iron
Aluminum alloy 1)

Without cable lug

With cable lug

Cast iron
4 holes with plugs

Possible positions of connection boxes for 1LA, 1LG, 1LP and 1PP motors
Motors

Frame size

1LA5, 1LA7, 1LA9

1LP5, 1LP7
1PP5, 1PP7
1LA6
1LG4, 1LG6
1LP4, 1PP4, 1PP6
1LA8

Connection box position

top
Side, right or left

56 ... 71
80 ... 90
100 ... 160
180 ... 225
100 ... 160
180 ... 315
315
355
400, 450

2)

Retrofitting
possible

6)

Rotation of connection box

90 4)
180 4)

5)

2)
2)

Retrofitting
possible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Available version
For further details of 1LA8 motors, see Dimensions, 1LA8.

1)

Connection box in cast-iron version K15.

4)

The position of the cable entry must be specified when ordering.

2)

15 to the vertical in each case

5)

Design for 1LA7 motors available on request.

3)

Frame sizes 357-2 and 357-4 as for frame sizes 400 and 450

6)

Retrofittable with screwed on feet (order codes K09, K10 and K11).

0/42

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Connection boxes for 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1PP and 1PQ motors in standard version and for Zone 22
See the next section of the catalog for connection boxes for 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8.
Frame size

Connection box

Number of
terminals

Contact screw
thread

Type

Max. conductor
size

Sealing range

Cable entry 1) 2)

mm2

mm

Size

Cable entry for

CSA version order
code D40 3)
Size

1LA5, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LP5, 1LP7, 1PP5 and 1PP7

56
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160
180
200
225

gk 030
(gk 127) 4)

M4

1.5
(2.5 with cable
lug)

9 ... 17
4.5 ... 10

M25 x 1.5
M16 x 1.5

NPT 1/2

gk 130

M4

11 ... 21

2 x M32 x 1.5

NPT 3/4

gk 230
gk 330

6
6

M4
M5

6
16

11 ... 21
19 ... 28

2 x M32 x 1.5
2 x M40 x 1.5

gk 430
gk 431

6
6

M6
M8

25
35

27 ... 35
27 ... 35

2 x M50 x 1.5
2 x M50 x 1.5

NPT 3/4
NPT 1
NPT 1 1/2
NPT 2

gk 135

M4

11 ... 21

2 x M32 x 1.5

NPT 1/2

gk 235
gk 335

6
6

M4
M5

6
16

11 ... 21
19 ... 28

2 x M32 x 1.5
2 x M40 x 1.5

NPT 3/4
NPT 1

1LA6
100
112
132
160

1LG4, 1LG6, 1LP4, 1PP4 and 1PP6

180
200
225
250
280
315

gk 330
gk 430
gk 431
gt 520

6
6
6
6

M5
M6
M8
M10

16
25
35
120

19 ... 28
27 ... 35
27 ... 35
34 ... 42

M40 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5
M63 x 1.5

M40 x 1.5 13)

M50 x 1.5 13)
M50 x 1.5 13)
M63 x 1.5 13)

gt 620

M12

240 5)

38 ... 45

M63 x 1.5

M63 x 1.5 13)

The connection box table does not apply to pole-changing

motors with three speeds.
A two-part plate can be supplied. Order code K06. For frame
size 250 M and above, with strain relief.
Connection boxes for 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motors in standard version
Mains-fed operation
Frame size Connection Numbox
ber of
terminals

Contact Max. rec.

screw
conducthread
tor crosssection

Type

Outer cable Cable

diameter
entry 6)
(sealing
range)

Cable
gland
option
K57 7)

Auxiliary lead
Outer cable Cable entry
diameter

mm2

mm

Size

mm

Size

Size

Two-part plate option K06

Admissi- Cable
Auxiliary
ble outer entry
lead outer
cable
cable
diameter
diameter
mm
Size
mm

1LA8 . . .
1PQ8 . . .
. . . . 315
. . . . 317

gt 640

. . . . 353
. . . . 355
. . . . 357-6
. . . . 357-8
. . . . 357-2
. . . . 357-4
. . . . 40 .
. . . . 45 .

1XB1 621

M12

185

41.0 ... 56.5 2 x M72x2 + 2 x M72x2 7 ... 13

2 x M20x1.5

M16

240

56.0 ... 68.5 2 x M80x2 + 2 x M80x2 11.5 ... 15.5 2 x M25x1.5 40 ... 70
2 x M25x1.5

2 x D80 +
11.5 ... 15.5
2 x M25x1.5

M16

240

56.0 ... 68.5 4 x M80x2 + 4x M80x2 11.5 ... 15.5 2 x M25x1.5 40 ... 75
2 x M25x1.5

4 x D80 +
11.5 ... 15.5
2 x M25x1.5

8) 9) 11)
8) 10)

1XB1 631 10) 12

1XB1 631 12)

2 x M20x1.5

1)

Designed for cable glands with O-ring.

7)

With option K57, the cable glands can be supplied.

2)

For 1LA7 motors frame sizes 100 to 160, speed nuts are enclosed for the
cable glands.

8)

With option L00, the motor can be supplied with the 1XB1 631 connection
box (recommended for cable cross-sections 240 mm2).

3)

Not possible for motors in Zone 22.

9)

4)

(gk 127) For frame sizes 63 to 90, with additional installation of several
temperature sensors, order code A12, terminal strip for main and auxiliary
terminals order code M69 or a brake, a larger connection box will be necessary. The specified values do not change. The gk 127 is standard for
Zone 22.

Cable entry without removable plate, cable entry in connection box casing.

10)

Cable entry with removable plate or supports.

11)

With option M58, the motor can be supplied with the 1XB1 621 connection
box (recommended for cable cross-sections >185 mm2).

12)

With option K11 connection box on top the 1XB1 634 connection box will
be supplied.

13)

NPT-thread can be ordered with order code Y61.

5)

With cable cross-sections 240 mm2, it is recommended that the next

larger connection box is used (order code L00). Alternatively, order a twopart plate (order code K06).

6)

Others available on request.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/43

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Converter-fed operation
Frame size

Connection
box

Number of
terminals

Contact screw Max. rec.

thread
conductor
cross-section

Type

Cable
entry 1)

Cable gland
option K57 2)

Auxiliary lead
Outer cable
diameter

Cable gland
option K57 2)

mm2

Outer cable
diameter
(sealing
range)
mm

Size

Size

mm

Size

2 x M72x2 +
2 x M20x1.5
2 x M80x2 +
2 x M25x1.5

2 x M72x2

9 ... 13

2 x M20x1.5

2 x M80x2

11 ... 16

2 x M25x1.5

4 x M80x2

11 ... 16

2 x M25x1.5

1LA8 . . .
1PQ8 . . .
gt 640 3) 4) 6)

. . . . 315
. . . . 317
. . . . 353
. . . . 355
. . . . 357-6
. . . . 357-8
. . . . 357-2
. . . . 357-4
. . . . 40 .
. . . . 45 .

M12

185

41.0 ... 56.5

1XB1 621 3) 5) 6

M16

240

56.0 ... 68.5

1XB1 631 5) 7) 12

M16

240

56.0 ... 68.5

4 x M80x2 +
2 x M25x1.5

Connection boxes for 1LL8 motors in standard version

Mains-fed operation
Frame
size

Connection Num- Contact Max. rec. Outer cable Cable

box
ber of screw conduc- diameter
entry 1)
termi- thread tor cross- (sealing
nals
section range)

Cable
gland
option
K57 8)

mm2

mm

M16

240

M16

240

56.0 ... 68.5 2 x M80x2 + 2 x M80x2

2 x M25x1.5
56.0 ... 68.5 4 x M80x2 + 4 x M80x2
2 x M25x1.5

Type

Size

Size

Auxiliary lead
Two-part plate option K06
Outer cable Cable gland Admissible Cable entry Auxiliary
8)
diameter
option K57 outer cable
lead
diameter
outer cable
diameter
mm
Size
mm
Size
mm

1LL8 . . .
. . . . 31 .

1XB1 621

9) 5)

. . . . 35 .
. . . . 40 .
. . . . 45 .

5)

1XB1 631
12
1XB1 631 7)

11.5 ... 15.5 2 x M25x1.5 40 ... 70

2 x D80 +
11.5 ... 15.5
2 x M25x1.5
4 x D80 +
11.5 ... 15.5
2 x M25x1.5

11.5 ... 15.5 2 x M25x1.5 40 ... 75

Converter-fed operation
Frame size

Connection
box

Number
of terminals

Contact
screw thread

Cable
entry 1)

Cable gland
option K57 2)

Auxiliary lead
Outer cable
diameter

Cable gland
option K57 2)

mm2

Outer cable
diameter
(sealing
range)
mm

Size

Size

mm

Size

M16

240

56.0 ... 68.5

2 x M80x2

11 ... 16

2 x M25x1.5

M16

240

56.0 ... 68.5

2 x M80x2 +
2 x M25x1.5
4 x M80x2 +
2 x M25x1.5

4 x M80x2

11 ... 16

2 x M25x1.5

Type

Max. rec.
conductor
cross-section

1LL8 . . .
. . . . 31.
. . . . 35 .
. . . . 40 .
. . . . 45 .

1XB1 621 9) 5) 6
5)

1XB1 631
1XB1 631 7)

12

1)

Others available on request.

2)

Shielded cable (EMC); with option K57, the cable glands can be supplied.

3)

With option L00, the motor can be supplied with the 1XB1 631 connection
box (recommended for cable cross-sections 240 mm2).

4)

Cable entry without removable plate, cable entry in connection box casing.

5)

Cable entry with removable plate or supports.

0/44

Siemens D 81.1 2008

6)

With option M58, the motor can be supplied with the 1XB1 621 connection
box (recommended for cable cross-sections >185 mm2).

7)

With option K11 connection box on top the 1XB1 634 connection box will
be supplied.

8)

With option K57, the cable glands can be supplied.

9)

With option L00, the motor can be supplied with the 1XB1 631 connection
box.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Connection boxes for 1MA6 and 1MA7 explosion-proof motors and for 1LA6/7/9 and 1LG4/6 motors in Ex n version or for
Zone 2 and Zone 21
Motors
1MA7, 1LA7, 1LA9

Frame size
56 1) ... 90

100 ... 160

1MA6, 1LA6

100 ... 160

1MA6, 1LA9

180 ... 200

1LG4, 1LG6

225
250 ... 315
180 ... 225

250 ... 315

Number of cable entries

2 holes incl. 1 certified cable gland
with sealing washer and
1 certified plug
4 holes incl. 1 certified cable gland
with sealing washer and
3 certified plugs
2 holes incl. 1 certified cable gland
with sealing washer and
1 certified plug
2 holes incl. 1 certified cable gland
with sealing washer and
1 certified plug
2 holes with 2 certified cable glands
with sealing washer

Connection box material

Aluminum alloy

2 holes incl. 1 certified cable gland

with sealing washer and
1 certified plug
2 holes with 2 certified cable glands
with sealing washer

Aluminum alloy

Feeder connection
Without cable lug 2) or
with cable lug

Cast iron

Aluminum alloy

Cast iron

Cast iron

Connection boxes for 1LA8 and 1PQ8 explosion-proof motors in Ex n version or for Zone 2 and Zone 22
Motors
1LA8, 1PQ8

Frame size
315, 355 3) 4)
400, 450

Number of cable entries

Undrilled cable entry

Connection box material

Cast iron

Feeder connection
With cable lug

Connection boxes for 1LA8 and 1PQ8 explosion-proof motors in Ex n version or for Zone 2 and Zone 22
Frame size

Connection
box

Number of
terminals

Contact
screw thread

Type

Recommended
max. conductor
cross-section

Cable entry 5)

Two-part plate option K06

mm2

Size

Max. outer
cable
diameter
mm

Cable
entry
Size

Auxiliary lead
outer cable
diameter
mm

1LA8 . . .
1PQ8 . . .
. . . . 315
. . . . 317
. . . . 353
. . . . 355
. . . . 357-6
. . . . 357-8
. . . . 357-2
. . . . 357-4
. . . . 40 .
. . . . 45 .

1XB1 621

M16

240

Undrilled cable entry 40 70

2 x D80 +
2 x M25x1.5

11.5 15.5

1XB1 621

M16

240

Undrilled cable entry 40 70

2 x D80 +
2 x M25x1.5

11.5 15.5

1XB1 631

12

M16

240

Undrilled cable entry 40 75

4 x D80 +
2 x M25x1.5

11.5 15.5

6) 7)
6) 8)

8)

Possible positions of connection boxes for 1MA6 and 1MA7 explosion-proof motors and for 1LA6 and 1LA7 motors in Ex n
version or for Zone 2 and Zone 21
Motors

1MA7 and 1LA7 in

Zones 2, 21
1MA6 and 1LA6 in
Zones 2, 21

Frame size

56 10) ... 71
80 ... 90
100 ... 160
100 ... 160
180 ... 225
250 ... 315

Connection box position

Above
Side, right or left

Retrofitting
possible

Rotation of connection box

90 9)
180 9)

11)

Retrofitting
possible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Available version

1)

1MA7 motor series as well as 1LA7/1LA9 motor series in Zone 2, only

frame size 63 and above.

7)

Cable entry without removable plate, cable entry in connection box casing.

2)

The components required for connection without cable lugs are supplied
with motors of frame size 225 and above as an accessory pack in the connection box.

8)

Cable entry with removable plate or supports.

9)

The position of the cable entry must be specified when ordering.

10)

1MA7 motor series as well as 1LA7 motor series in Zone 2, only

frame size 63 and above.

11)

From frame size 100 upwards.

3)

15 to the vertical in each case.

4)

Frame sizes 357-2 and 357-4 as for frame sizes 400 and 450.

5)

Others available on request.

6)

With option L00, the motor can be supplied with the 1XB1 631 connection
box (recommended for cable cross-sections 240 mm2).

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/45

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Standard connection boxes for 1MA6, 1MA7 explosion-proof motors and for 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LG4 and 1LG6 motors in
Ex n, VIK version, Zone 2 and Zone 21
Frame size

Connection box

Number of
terminals

Contact screw
thread

Type

Max. connectable Sealing range

cross-section

Cable entry 1)

mm2

mm

Size

9 ... 17
4.5 ... 10

M25 x 1.5
M16 x 1.5

14 ... 21

M32 x 1.5

Two-part plate
Max. outer cable
diameter
mm

1MA7, LA7, 1LA9

56 2)
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160
180
200

gk 130

M4

gk 230
gk 330
1XB7 222
1XB7 322

6
6
6
6

M4
M5
M6
M8

6
16
10
50

14 ... 21
19 ... 28
19 ... 28
26 ... 35

M32 x 1.5
M40 x 1.5
M40 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5

gk 135

M4

14 ... 21

M32 x 1.5

gk 235
gk 335
1XB7 222
1XB7 322

6
6
6
6

M4
M5
M6
M8

6
16
10
50

19 ... 28
19 ... 28
26 ... 35

M40 x 1.5
M40 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5

1XB7 422

M10

120

34 ... 42

M63 x 1.5

1XB7 522

M12

240

38 ... 45

M63 x 1.5

gt 351
gt 451

6
6

M6
M8

16
50

19 ... 27
24 ... 35

M40 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5

gt 540

M10

120

34 ... 42

M63 x 1.5

gt 640

M12

240

38 ... 45

M63 x 1.5

1MA6, 1LA6
100
112
132
160
180
200
225
250
280
315

1LG4, 1LG6
180
200
225
250
280
315

With 1MA motors, unused drilled holes must be sealed in accordance with
EN 50014.
Connection boxes in Ex de IIC type of protection for explosion-proof motors 1MJ6 and 1MJ7
Motors
1MJ6

1MJ7

Frame size
71 ... 160 M
160 L
180 ... 200
225
250 ... 315

Number of cable entries

2 holes incl. 1 certified cable gland
with sealing washer and
1 certified plug
2 holes with 2 certified cable glands
with sealing washer

Connection box material

Aluminum alloy
Cast iron
Aluminum alloy
Cast iron

Feeder connection
Without cable lug 3) or
with cable lug

Possible positions of the connection boxes in Ex de type of protection for explosion-proof motors 1MJ6 and 1MJ7
Motors

Frame size

71 ... 200
225 ... 315

1MJ6
1MJ7

Connection box position

Above
Side, right or left Retrofitting
possible

Available version

1)

Designed for cable glands with O-ring.

2)

1MA7 motor series as well as 1LA7/1LA9 motor series in Zone 2, only

frame size 63 and above.

3)

The components required for connection without cable lugs are supplied
with 1MJ7 motors of frame size 225 M and above as an accessory pack in
the connection box.

4)

The position of the cable entry must be specified when ordering.

0/46

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Rotation of connection box

90 4)
180 4)

Retrofitting
possible
Yes
Yes

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Standard connection boxes in Ex de type of protection for explosion-proof motors 1MJ6 and 1MJ7
Frame size

Connection box

Number of terminals

Type

Contact screw thread Max. connectable

cross-section
mm2

Sealing range

Cable entry 1)

mm

Size
2 x M25 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5

1MJ6, 1MJ7
71
80
90
100
112
132
160 M
160 L
180

gk 330

M4

9 ... 17

gk 420

M4

gk 420

M4

9 ... 17
11 ... 21
11 ... 21

gk 420
gk 465
1XC1 270

6
6
6

M4
M5
M6

6
16
25

19 ... 28

200
225

1XC1 380

M8

50

26 ... 35

250
280
315

1XC1 480

M10

120

34 ... 42

2 x M40 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M40 x 1.5
Version with
auxiliary circuit
2 x M40 x 1.5
2 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M50 x 1.5
Version with
auxiliary circuit
2 x M50 x 1.5
2 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M63 x 1.5

1XC1 580

M12

240

38 ... 45

2 x M63 x 1.5

2 x M32 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5

19 ... 28

With 1MJ motors, unused drilled holes must be sealed in accordance with EN 50014.
Connection boxes in cast iron version (order code K15) for motors 1LG4, 1LG6 and 1MA6, 1MJ6, 1MJ7 explosion-proof
motors
Motors
1MJ6

Frame size
71 ... 160 M
180 ... 200

1LG4,
1LG6,
1MA6,
1MJ7

180 ... 225

Number of cable entries

2 holes incl. 1 certified cable gland
with sealing washer and
1 certified plug
2 holes incl. 2 certified cable glands
with sealing washer and
1 certified plug

Connection box material

Cast iron

Feeder connection
Without cable lug 3) or with cable
lug

Cast iron

Possible positions of the connection boxes in cast iron version (order code K15) for 1LG4, 1LG6 motors and
1MA6, 1MJ6, 1MJ7 explosion-proof motors
Motors

1MJ6

1LG4,
1LG6,
1MA6,
1MJ7

Frame size

Connection box position

Above
Side, right or left

71 ... 80
90 ... 160 M
180 ... 200
180 ... 225

Retrofitting
possible

Rotation of connection box

90 4)
180 4)

Retrofitting
possible
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Available version

1)

Designed for cable glands with O-ring.

2)

Standard version with cable entry glands split lengthwise for 35 to 75 mm

and strain relief.

3)

The components required for connection without cable lugs are supplied
with 1MJ7 motors of frame size 225 M and above as an accessory pack in
the connection box.

4)

The position of the cable entry must be specified when ordering.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/47

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Connection boxes in cast iron version (order code K15) for motors 1LG4, 1LG6 and 1MA6, 1MJ6, 1MJ7 explosion-proof
motors
Frame size

Connection box

Number of terminals

Type

Contact screw thread Max. connectable

cross-section
mm2

Sealing range

Cable entry 1)

mm

Size

1MJ6
71
80
90
100

gk 065

M4

9 ... 17

2 x M25 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5

gk 065

M4

6
6

11 ... 21

112

gk 265

M4

11 ... 21

132

gk 465

M4

11 ... 21

160 M

gk 465

M4

19 ... 28

160 L 2)

gk 465

M5

16

19 ... 28

180

1XC1 290

M6

25

26 ... 35

200

1XC1 390

M8

50

26 ... 35

2 x M32 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M32 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M32 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M40 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M40 x 1.5
1 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M50 x 1.5
Version with
auxiliary circuit:
2 x M50 x 1.5
2 x M16 x 1.5
2 x M50 x 1.5
Version with
auxiliary circuit:
2 x M50 x 1.5
2 x M16 x 1.5

gt 320
gt 420
gt 421

6
6
6

M5
M6
M8

16
25
25

19 ... 28
24 ... 35
24 ... 35

M40 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5

1XB7 323
1XB7 323

6
6

M8
M8

50
50

24 ... 35
24 ... 35

M50 x 1.5
M50 x 1.5

1LG4, 1LG6
180
200
225

1MA6
180
200

With 1MJ motors, unused drilled holes must be sealed in accordance with EN 50014.
Explosion-proof connection boxes in Ex d IIC type of protection (order code K53) for explosion-proof motors 1MJ6 and 1MJ7
Motors
1MJ6

Frame size
71 ... 200

1MJ7

225

Number of cable entries

In standard version:
1 certified plug
In versions with PTC thermistors:
2 certified plugs
In standard version:
1 certified cable gland and 1 certified plug
In versions with auxiliary circuit:
2 certified cable glands

Connection box material

Cast iron

Feeder connection 3)
Without cable lug 4) or
with cable lug

Welded steel

250 ... 315

Possible positions of the explosion-proof connection boxes in Ex d IIC type of protection (order code K53) for explosionproof motors 1MJ6 and 1MJ7
Motors

Frame size

Connection box position

Above
Side, right or left

71 ... 80
90 ... 200
225 ... 315

1MJ6
1MJ7

Available version

1)

Designed for cable glands with O-ring.

2)

With 1MJ6 frame size 160 L, option K15 is the standard version. The connection box corresponds to the standard connection box.

3)

The number of cables and their outer cable diameter must be specified
when ordering does not apply to 1MJ7 motors.

4)

The components required for connection without cable lugs are supplied
with 1MJ7 motors of frame size 225 M and above as an accessory pack in
the connection box.

5)

The position of the cable entry must be specified when ordering.

0/48

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Retrofitting
possible

Rotation of connection box

90 5)
180 5)

Retrofitting
possible
Yes
Yes
Yes

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Explosion-proof connection boxes in Ex d IIC type of protection (order code K53) for explosion-proof motors 1MJ6 and 1MJ7
Frame size

Connection box

Number of
terminals

Contact screw
thread

Type

Max. connectable Sealing range

cross-section
mm2
mm

Cable entry

Standard: 1 x M25 x 1.5 1)

Version with auxiliary circuit: 1 x M25 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5

Size

1MJ6, 1MJ7
71
80
90
100
112
132
160 M
160 L

gk 065d

M4

gk 065d
gk 265d
gk 465d
gk 465d
gk 465d

6
6
6
6
6

M4
M4
M4
M4
M5

6
6
6
6
6
16

180

1XC3 22.

M6

25

200

1XC3 32.

M8

50

225

1XC3 32.

M8

50

M40: 23.5 32
M20: 6.5 12

250
280

1XC3 42.

M10

120

M50: 31.5 44
M20: 6.5 12

315

1XC3 52.

M12

240

M50: 31.5 44
M20: 6.5 12

Standard: 1 x M32 x 1.5 1)

Version with auxiliary circuit: 1 x M32 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5
Standard: 1 x M40 x 1.5 1)
Version with auxiliary circuit: 1 x M40 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5
Standard: 1 x M40 x 1.5 1)
Version with auxiliary circuit: 1 x M40 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5
Standard: 1 x M50 x 1.5 1)
Version with auxiliary circuit: 1 x M50 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5
Standard: 1 x M40 x 1.5
1 x plug M40 x 1.5
Version with auxiliary circuit: 1 x M40 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5
Standard: 1 x M50 x 1.5
1 x plug M50 x 1.5
Version with auxiliary circuit:: 1 x M50 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5
Standard: 1 x M50 x 1.5
1 x plug M50 x 1.5
Version with auxiliary circuit: 1 x M50 x 1.5
1 x M20 x 1.5

With 1MJ motors, unused drilled holes must be sealed in accordance with
EN 50014.
Terminal connection
The terminal board accomodates the terminals that are connected to the leads to the motor windings. The terminals are designed so that up to frame size 225, the external (line) connections can be made without the need for cable lugs. With frame
size 250 and above, standard connection is with cable lugs.
For the 1LG4/1LG6/1LP4/1PP4 motor series, for frame sizes 250
to 315, stud terminals are available for connection using cable
lugs (accessory pack, 3 items).
Order code M46
With frame size 250 and above, if connection without cable lugs
is required, the appropriate saddle terminals for connection
without cable lugs (accessory pack, 6 items) must be ordered
for motor series 1LG4/1LG6/1LP4/1PP4 frame sizes 250 to 315.
In the connection box of 1MJ7 Ex motors, frame sizes 250 M to
315 L, 6 low saddle terminals are enclosed as standard for connection without cable lugs. When connecting cables with a large
cross-section (not stranded), they can be connected optionally
in two tiers. For this purpose, high saddle terminals can be supplied in the future as an accompanying pack (3 items).
Order code M47

1)

For Exe and Exde motors, connection is generally without cable

lugs.
The terminal board is permanently mounted on the housing for
all motors so that if the connection box is rotated, rotation of the
connections for the motor windings is prevented.
Exception:
With connection boxes 1XB1 621 and 1XB1 631, the terminal
support is mounted on the lower section of the connection box.
For motor series 1LA7/1LP7/1PP7 frame sizes 63 to 90, a terminal strip can be supplied for the main and auxiliary terminals.
Order code M69

Designed for explosion-proof cable glands. The drilled holes for cable
entry are closed with plugs certified for explosion-proof applications.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/49

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Number of auxiliary terminals for 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1PP
and 1PQ motors Standard version
Motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LP5, 1LP7, 1PP5, 1PP7 have
no auxiliary terminals in the standard version.
The maximum number of auxiliary terminals in the main connection box of the motor is specified. An auxiliary connection box is
required when the total number of auxiliary terminals exceeds
the specified values. The connections can be routed through a
separate auxiliary connection box.

Type series
1LG4,
1LG6,
1LP4,
1PP4,
1PP6

1MA6

1MJ7

1LA8,
1PQ8,
1LL8

0/50

Frame size
180
200
225
250
280
315
225
250
280
315
225
250
280
315
315
355
400
450

Siemens D 81.1 2008

For motor series

1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 frame sizes 315 to 450
1MA6 frame sizes 225 to 315
1MJ7 frame sizes 225 to 315
the 1XB3 020 connection box is available.
Order code L97
For non-standard motors (1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motor series),
the following can be supplied:
1XB9 016 auxiliary connection box Order code M50
1XB9 014 auxiliary connection box (aluminum) Order code M88

Main connection box

gk 330
gk 430
gk 431
gt 520

Maximum No. of auxiliary terminals

4
10
10
12

gt 620
1XB7 322
1XB7 422

18
8
12

1XB7 522
1XC1 380
1XC1 480

14
4

1XC1 580
gt 640
1XB1 621
1XB1 631

6
6
12
24

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
ECOFAST system

ECOFAST is a system which permits extensive decentralization

and a modular structure for installation elements on the component level.
The following motor connectors are available for the separate
MICROMASTER 411 frequency converter:
ECOFAST motor connector Han Drive 10e for 230 V/400 VY
Order code G55
ECOFAST motor connector EMC Han Drive 10e for
230 V/400 VY
Order code G56
In the basic version, cable entry for the ECOFAST connector
is towards the non-drive end (NDE). The dimensions of the
ECOFAST motor connector depend on the motor frame size and
can be read from the dimension drawing generator for motors in
the tool Selection tool SD configurator (see Appendix). It is particularly important to check the dimensions when a brake with a
manual release lever is used towards the non-drive end (NDE)
due to possible collision of the motor connector and manual release lever as well as in the direction of the drive end (DE) due
to possible collision with drive units such as coupling or gear
wheels.
Advantages:
The main advantages of the ECOFAST motor connector over a
terminal strip are as follows:
Fast assembly of I/O devices (e.g. motor starters) from the
ECOFAST system.
Reduction of assembly and repair times at the end user
No wiring errors due to connector technology
Replacement of motor without intervention in the electronics

The mounting dimensions of this casing match those of standard

industrial connectors, so it is possible to use a complete series
of different standard inserts (such as Han E, ES, ESS from Harting). The motor circuit (star or delta connection) is selected in the
mating connector for motor connection. The relevant jumpers
are inserted by the customer in the mating connector. As a casing for the mating connector, all standard sleeve casings with
lengthwise locking, frame size 10B (e.g. from Harting) can be
used.
Note:
Only one sensor (temperature sensor or PTC thermistor) can be
connected. The admissible mains voltage at the motor connector is 500 V
Availability of the ECOFAST motor connector
The ECOFAST motor connector can be supplied for the following
motor versions with the exception of the explosion-proof motors:
Frame sizes 56 M to 132 M
Output range 0.06 to 5.5 kW (7.5 kW on request)
Direct on-line starting: Voltage code 1 for 230 V/400 VY,
50 Hz
Star-delta starting: Voltage code 9 with order code L1U
400 V, 50 Hz
Further details:
Further information can be found in Catalog IK PI and in Catalog
DA 51.3 Distributed Drive Solutions MICROMASTER 411
COMBIMASTER 411 as well as on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/ecofast

Main features of the ECOFAST motor connector (with separate

MICROMASTER 411 frequency converter):
The motor connector is mounted at the factory and replaces the
connection box with terminal board. The connector is mounted
towards the non-drive end (NDE). It comprises an angled motor
connection casing that can be rotated by 4 x 90. A 10-pole
(+ earth) male insert is used in the housing. In the plug-in connector, the winding connections are connected and optionally
the power supply for the brake and the signal leads for the temperature sensors. The ECOFAST motor connector is compatible
with the products of the ECOFAST field device system. Further
information can be found in Catalog IK PI.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/51

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Types of construction
Standard types of construction and special types of construction
Type of construction acc. to DIN EN 60034-7

Frame size

Code
12th position

Order code

IM B3

56 M to 450

0 4)

IM B6/IM 1051,
IM B7/IM 1061,
IM B8/IM 1071

56 M to 315 L

IM V5/IM1011
without protective cover

56 M to 315 M
315 L

0 5)
9 1) 5)

M1D

IM V6/IM 1031

56 M to 315 M
315 L

0
9 1)

M1E

IM V5/IM 1011
with protective cover

63 M to 315 L

9 1) 7)

M1F

IM B5/IM 3001

56 M to 315 M

1 2)

IM V1/IM 3011
without protective cover

56 M to 315 M
315 L to 450

1 2) 3) 5)
8 1) 4) 5)

IM V1/IM 3011
with protective cover

63 M to 450

4 1) 2) 3) 7)

IM V3/IM 3031

56 M to 160 L
180 M to 315 M

1
9 2) 3)

M1G

IM B35/IM 2001 6)

56 M to 450

6 4)

Without flange

With flange

In the DIN EN 50347 standard, flange FF with through holes and

flange FT with tapped holes are specified.

1)

For 2-pole 1LG4 and 1LG6 motors, of frame size 315 L, a 60 Hz version is
possible on request.

2)

1LG4/1LG6, 1MA6 and 1MJ7 motors in frame sizes 225 S to 315 L are
supplied with two screw-in eyebolts (four eyebolts for 1LG6 318) in accordance with IM B5, whereby one can be rotated in accordance with IM V1
or IM V3. It is important to note that stress must not be applied perpendicular to the ring plane.

3)

For frame sizes 180 M to 225 M, the 1LA5 motors can be supplied with two
additional eyebolts; state Order No. suffix Z and order code K32.

4)

Frame size 450, 2-pole, 60 Hz is not possible.

0/52

Siemens D 81.1 2008

5)

For explosion-proof motors:

For types of construction with shaft extension pointing downwards, the
version with protective cover is mandatory. For types of construction with
shaft extension pointing upwards, a suitable cover must be implemented
to prevent small parts from falling into the fan cover (see the standard
IEC/EN 60079-0). The cover must not block the cooling air-flow.

6)

In the case of 1LA8, the corresponding flange diameter is greater than

twice the shaft height.

7)

A second K16 shaft extension is not possible.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Type of construction acc. to DIN EN 60034-7

Frame size

Code
12th position

Order code

IM B14/IM 3601,
IM V19/IM 3631,
IM V18/IM 3611
without protective cover

56 M to 160 L

2 2) 4)

IM V 18/IM 3611
with protective cover

63 M to 160 L

9 1) 2)

M2A

IM B34/IM 2101

56 M to 160 L

7 2) 4)

IM B14/IM 3601,
IM V19/IM 3631,
IM V18/IM 3611
without protective cover

56 M to 160 L

3 3) 4)

IM V18/IM 3611
with protective cover

63 M to 160 L

9 1) 3)

M2B

IM B34/IM 2101

56 M to 160 L

9 3)

M2C

With standard flange

With special flange

In DIN EN 50347, standard flanges are assigned to the frame

sizes as FT with tapped holes. The special flange was assigned
as a large flange in the previous DIN 42677.
The dimensions of the following types of construction are identical:
IM B3, IM B6, IM B7, IM B8, IM V5 and IM V6
IM B5, IM V1 and IM V3
IM B14, IM V18 and IM V19

Motor series 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 are available in types of construction IM B3, IM V1 with and without cover, as well as IM B35.
Frame design
Motors in the types of construction with feet have, in some case,
two fixing holes at the non-drive end (NDE), see dimension tables. A code is cast into the motor close to the retaining holes to
identify the frame size.

Motors in the standard output range can be ordered in basic

types of construction IM B3, IM B5 or IM B14 and operated in
mounting positions IM B6, IM B7, IM B8, IM V5, IM V6, IM V1,
IM V3 (up to frame size 160 L) or IM V18 and IM V19. Eyebolts
are available for transport and installation in a horizontal position. In conjunction with the eyebolts, for the purpose of stabilizing the position when the motor is arranged vertically,
additional lifting straps (DIN EN 1492-1) and/or clamping bands
(DIN EN 12195-2) must be used. If mounting position IM V1 is
ordered, eyebolts are supplied for vertical mounting.
For this reason, they are normally designated only with the
basic type of construction on the rating plate.
If motors of frame size 180 M in a type of construction with feet
are mounted on the wall, it is recommended that the motor feet
are supported.
With motors that have a vertical shaft extension, the end user
must prevent an ingress of fluid along the shaft.
In the case of all types of construction with shaft extension down,
the version with protective cover is urgently recommended,
see the section Degrees of protection.

1)

A second K16 shaft extension is not possible.

2)

For 1MJ6 motors, only possible up to frame size 90.

3)

For 1MJ6 motors, only possible up to frame size 80.

4)

For explosion-proof motors:

For types of construction with shaft extension pointing downwards, the
version with protective cover is mandatory. For types of construction with
shaft extension pointing upwards, a suitable cover must be implemented
to prevent small parts from falling into the fan cover (see the standard
IEC/EN 60079-0). The cover must not block the cooling air-flow.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/53

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Mechanical design and degrees of protection

Degrees of protection

Preparation for gear mounting

All motors are designed to IP55 degree of protection. They can be

installed in dusty or humid environments. The motors are suitable
for operation in tropical climates. Guide value <60 % relative air
humidity at CT 40 C. Other requirements are available on request.

The flange-mounting motors can be equipped with a radial seal

in order to mount gearing.
Order code K17.
It must be ensured that the sealing ring is lubricated using
grease, oil mist or oil spray (it is not permissible to use pressurized oil > 0.1 bar).
We recommend that the admissible bearing loads are carefully
checked.
Please inquire about gear mounting for 1LA8 non-standard motors.
Eyebolts and transport
1LA7, 1MA7 and 1LA5 motors of frame size 100 L and above
have two horizontal eyebolts in the horizontal type of construction. For motors in vertical type of construction, two rotatable
eyebolts are also supplied.
1LA6 and 1MA6 motors are supplied in a horizontal type of
construction with feet complete with one eyebolt.
Horizontal types of construction for flange-mounting in frame
sizes 100 to 160 are supplied with one eyebolt. With vertical
types of construction, a rotatable eyebolt is also supplied. All
flange-mounting types of construction in frame sizes 180 M to
315 L are supplied with two diagonal eyebolts. They can be
relocated for vertical types of construction.
1LG4 and 1LG6 motors are supplied in a horizontal type of construction with two diagonal eyebolts. For vertical types of construction, the eyebolts can be rotated.
All the available eyebolts specifically provided for the type of
construction must be used during transport.
1MA6, 1MJ6 and 1MJ7 motors of frame size 180 M and above
have one eyebolt in type of construction IM B3 in the standard
version and two eyebolts in type of construction IM B5. If type of
construction IM V1 is used, one of the eyebolts must be rotated
whereby it is important to note that forces perpendicular to the
ring plane are not permitted.
1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motors have two diagonally fixed eyebolts. The IM V1 types of construction have hinged eyebolts.
1MJ6 motors, frame sizes 90 L to 132 M have two eyebolts,
frame sizes 160 M and 160 L have one eyebolt.
For frame sizes 180 M to 225 M, 1LA5 motors can be supplied
with two additional eyebolts for types of construction
IM V1/IM V3.
Order code K32
Frame material
Type series
1LA5, 1LA7,
1LA9
1MA7
1LG4, 1LG6
1LA6, 1MA6

1MJ6
1MJ7
1LA8, 1PQ8,
1LL8

Frame size
56 to 100 1)
112 to 225
63 to 100 1)
112 to 160
180 M to 315 L
100 to 200
225 to 315 M
315 L
71 and 80
90 to 200
225 to 315
315 to 450

Frame material
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Cast iron
Cast iron
Cast iron
Cast iron
Cast iron
Cast iron
Cast iron
Cast iron

Frame feet
Cast
Screwed on
Cast
Screwed on
Cast 2)
Screwed on
Cast
Screwed on
Cast
Screwed on
Screwed on
Cast

1)

Frame sizes 80, 90 and 100 in the version Connection box on LHS/RHS
order code K09/K10 have feet that are screwed on.

2)

Basic version, cast feet: Special version screwed on feet for order codes
K09, K10 and K11.

0/54

Siemens D 81.1 2008

1LL8 motors are available to IP23 degree of protection and are

of a similar construction to 1LA8 motors. IP23 degree of protection is achieved by opening the internal cooling circuit and supplying it with external cooling air. Motors of the 1LL8 type series
are only intended for installation indoors. They must not be subjected to humid, salty or corrosive atmospheres.
Most motors can be supplied in IP56 and IP65 degrees of protection on request.
Brief explanation of the degrees of protection
IP55: Protection against harmful dust deposits, protection
against water jets from any direction.
IP56 (non-heavy-sea):
Protection against harmful dust deposits, protection against
water jets from any direction.
Order code K52
DIN EN 60034-5 defines protection level 6 for water protection as:
Protection against water due to heavy seas or water in a powerful
jet. IP56 non-heavy-sea degree of protection can only be used
with the requirement Protection against a powerful jet and not
for the requirement Protection against heavy sea.
This is not possible in combination with brake 2LM8 (used for
motors up to and including frame size 225, order code G26)
and/or in combination with order code (K23) without paint finish,
cast iron primed.
IP65: Complete protection against dust deposits, protection
against water jets from any direction.
Order code K50
In DIN EN 60034-5, the code 6 for protection against the ingress
of foreign bodies and touch hazard protection for electrical machines is not listed Data for code 6 (protection against the ingress of dust) is given in EN 60529.
Not possible in combination with rotary pulse encoder
HOG 9 D 1024l (order code H72, H79) and / or brake 2LM8
(used for motors up to and including frame size 225, order code
G26) and/or in combination with order code (K23) without paint
finish, cast iron primed.
DIN EN 60529 contains a comprehensive description of this
degree of protection as well as test conditions.
With motors that have a vertical shaft extension, the end user
must prevent an ingress of fluid along the shaft.
For motors with shaft extension pointing downwards, the version
with protective cover is urgently recommended, see Types of
construction.
With flange-mounting motors, for IM V3 type of construction, collection of fluid in the flange basin can be prevented by drainage
holes (on request).
Drainage holes are usually available in 1MA6 and 1MA7 motors
of frame size 225 and above and in all 1LG4 and 1LG6 motors.
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LA8, 1LL8, 1PQ8 motors and 1MA6 motors of
frame size 225 and above have condensation drainage holes
that are sealed with plugs.
Motors for Zones 2 and 21 (1MA6 of frame size 225 and above
and 1LG4 and 1LG6) have condensation drainage holes that are
sealed with screws.
Condensation drainage holes can also be implemented in motors designed for Zones 2, 21 and 22.
The condensation drainage holes at the drive end (DE) and nondrive end (NDE) are sealed (IP55) on delivery. If condensation
drainage holes are required in motors of the IM B6, IM B7 or
IM B8 type of construction (feet located on side or top), it is necessary to relocate the bearing plates at the drive end (DE) and
non-drive end (NDE) so that the condensation drainage holes
situated between the feet on delivery are underneath.
Order code L12

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
When the motors are used or are stored outdoors (not 1LL8) we
recommend that they are kept under some sort of cover so that
they are not subject to direct intensive solar radiation, rain, snow,
ice or dust over a long period of time. In such cases, technical
consultation may be appropriate.
When the motors are used outdoors or in a corrosive environment, it is recommended that non-rusting screws are used externally.
Order code M27
Vibration-proof version
A load of 1.5g in all 3 planes for up to 1 % of the service life of
the motor is possible.
Order code L03

Earth brushes are available for converter-fed operation for 1LG4

and 1LG6 motors.
Order code M44
Only available on request.
The rotary pulse encoders of modular technology and special
technology are fitted as standard with a protective cover made
of plastic, with the exception of 1LG motors. A protective cover
made of non-corrosive sheet steel is available for 1LA5, 1LA6
and 1LA7 motors, see Mechanical protection for encoders.
Order code M68

For availability of individual options for the relevant motor series,

see Section Special versions in the individual catalog parts.
Noise levels for mains-fed operation
The noise levels are measured in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 1680 in a dead room. It is specified as the Aweighted measuring-surface sound pressure level LpfA in
dB (A).
This is the spatial mean value of the sound pressure levels measured on the measuring surface. The measuring surface is a
cube 1 m away from the surface of the motor. The sound power
level is also specified as LWA in dB (A).
The specified values are valid at 50 Hz at rated output (see the
selection and ordering data in the appropriate catalog parts).
The tolerance is +3 dB. At 60 Hz, the values are approximately
4 dB (A) higher. Please inquire about the noise levels for polechanging motors, motors with increased output or converter-fed
motors.
To reduce noise levels, 2-pole motors with frame size 132 S and
above and 1LA8 and 1LL8 2-pole motors of frame size 315 can
be fitted with an axial-flow fan that is only suitable for one direction of rotation. The values can be taken from the table Lownoise version below and for 1LA8 or 1LL8 2-pole motors from
the selection and ordering data in catalog part 3 Non-standard
motors of frame size 315 and above.
Clockwise rotation
Order code K37
Counter-clockwise rotation
Order code K38
The motors up to frame size 315 L are up to 80 mm longer than
normal.
A second shaft extension and/or mounting of an encoder are not
possible (see Special versions in the relevant catalog parts).
Low-noise version
Type series
Frame size

1LA5, 1LA6,
1LA7, 1MA7,
1MA6, 1MJ6,
1MJ7

1LG4, 1LG6 1)

1)

132
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
180
200
225
250
280
315

2-pole motors
LpfA
dB (A)
64
64
63
63
68
70
72
74
65
70
68
70
72
74

LWA
dB (A)
76
76
76
76
80
82
84
86
78
83
81
83
85
87

Not necessary for 1LG6 motors because these motors are already noise
optimized.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/55

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Balance and vibration quantity
All of the rotors are dynamically balanced with half key. This corresponds to vibration quantity level A (normal). The vibrational
characteristics and behaviour of electrical machinery is specified in DIN EN 60034-14. Feather key agreement for balancing
half-key (H) is specified here based on DIN ISO 8821.
The feather key agreement type for balancing is stamped on the
face of the customer-specific drive-end (DE) / non-drive end
(NDE) shaft extension.
F = Balancing with full key
(Agreement full-key)
H = Balancing with half key
(Agreement half-key)
N = Balancing without key Plain text required
(without feather key agreement)
Motors up to frame size 112 have the type of balancing marked
exclusively on the rating plate.
Full key balancing or balancing with full key can be supplied if
order code L68 is specified (additional charge).

Balancing without key (N) is possible with order code M37 on request (additional charge).
The vibration quantity level A is the standard version and is valid
for a rated frequency up to 60 Hz.
For special requirements concerning smooth running,
a low-vibration version B can be supplied (additional charge).
Vibration quantity level B.
Not possible with parallel roller bearings.
Order code K02
The limits stated in the table below are applicable to freely suspended motors running uncoupled and at no load as well as to
rigidly installed 1LA8 motors, frame size 450.
For converter-fed operation with frequencies greater than 60 Hz,
special balancing is required for compliance with the specified
limit values (plain text: Max. supply frequency speed).
For further details, see the online help in SD configurator.

Limits (rms values) for max. vibration quantity of vibration distance (s), vibration speed (v) and acceleration (a) for the shaft height H
Vibration
Machine
Shaft height H in mm
quantity
installation
56 H 132
132 < H 280
H > 280
level
srms
vrms
arms
srms
vrms
arms
srms
vrms
m
mm/s
mm/s2
m
mm/s
mm/s2
m
mm/s
A
Free
25
1.6
2.5
35
2.2
3.5
45
2.8
suspension
Rigid
21
1.3
2.0
29
1.8
2.8
37
2.3
clamping
B
Free
11
0.7
1.1
18
1.1
1.7
29
1.8
suspension
Rigid

14
0.9
1.4
24
1.5
clamping

arms
mm/s2
4.4
3.6
2.8
2.4

For details, see standard DIN EN 60034-14 Sept. 2004.

Shaft and rotor
Shaft extension
60 center hole to DIN 332, Part 2 with M3 to M24 tapped hole
depending on the shaft diameter (see dimension tables in the
corresponding catalog parts)
Second standard shaft extension.
Order code K16.
Not possible for the motor version with protective cover.
The second shaft extension can transmit the full rated output via
a coupling output up to frame size 315 M (please inquire about
reduced transmitted power for frame sizes of 315 L and above).
For motor series 1LA8 and 1LL8, the second shaft extension can
transmit 50 % of the rated output with a coupling output. (Please
contact your local Siemens office if higher values are required.)
The full rated output is not applicable for 1LA motors, frame
sizes 90 S to 112 M. These motors can only transmit the rated
output of the next smaller size.
Please also inquire about the transmitted power and admissible
cantilever force if belt pulleys, chains or gear pinions are used
on the second shaft extension.
A second shaft extension is not available if a rotary pulse encoder and/or separately driven fan is mounted (also applicable
to motor series 1PQ8). Please inquire if a brake is mounted.
For motor series 1LA8 and 1LL8, the second standard shaft
extension is only available on request for 2-pole motors please
specify the weight of the coupling and type of lever arm.

0/56

Siemens D 81.1 2008

The non-drive end (NDE) of frame sizes 100 L to 225 M has an

M8 center hole, DR form, for mounting the 1XP8 001 rotary pulse
encoder or for fitting and extraction tools.
The non-drive end (NDE) of the 1LG4 and 1LG6 motors of frame
sizes 180 M to 315 L, has an M16 center hole, DS form.
Shaft extension (DE)
Diameter
mm
7 ... 10
>10 ... 13
>13 ... 16
>16 ... 21
>21 ... 24
>24 ... 30
>30 ... 38
>38 ... 50
>50 ... 85
>85 ... 130

Thread
mm
DR M3
DR M4
DR M5
DR M6
DR M8
DR M10
DR M12
DS M16
DS M20
DS M24

Dimensions and tolerances for keyways and keys are designed

to DIN EN 50347. The motors are always supplied with a key inserted in the shaft.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Shaft extension with standard dimensions, without featherkey way
For motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA8, 1LA9, 1LG4, 1LG6,
1LL8, 1LP4, 1LP5, 1LP7, 1MA6, 1MA7, 1PP4, 1PP5, 1PP7 and
1PQ8, the standard shaft extension can be ordered with standard
dimensions without a featherkey way.
Order code K42
Standard shaft made of non-rusting steel
For motor series 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LP5, 1LP7, 1PP5 and 1PP7,
a standard shaft made of non-rusting steel (material X20Cr13V)
can be ordered. This is only possible for shaft extensions of standard dimensions. For non-standard shaft dimensions, there will
be an additional charge!
Order code M65
Please inquire about other rust-resistant materials.
Please inquire regarding motor series 1LG4 and 1LG6.
Non-standard cylindrical shaft extension
The non-standard cylindrical shaft extension can be used on the
drive end (DE) or non-drive end (NDE). The featherkey is always
supplied with it.
Order code Y55
When motors are ordered which have a longer or shorter shaft extension as standard, the required position and length of the
featherkey way must be specified in a sketch. It must be ensured
that only featherkeys in accordance with DIN 6885, Form A are
permitted to be used. The location of the featherkey way is in the

center of the shaft extension and, in the case of non-standard

motors, 5 mm from the shaft extension. The length is defined by
the manufacturer normatively.
Not valid for: Conical shafts, non-standard threaded journals,
non-standard shaft tolerances, friction welded journals, extremely thin shafts, special geometry dimensions (e.g. square
journals, etc.), hollow shafts.
For 1MJ motors with longer shaft extensions than standard, the
admissible cantilever force must be reduced accordingly. This
will ensure that the shaft does not sag more than with the standard shaft extension (please inquire).
For order code Y55 and second standard shaft extension K16
(see previous page):
Dimensions D and DA must be less than or equal to the inner
diameter of the roller bearing (see dimension tables under
Dimensions in the relevant catalog parts)
Dimensions E and EA must be smaller than or equal to 2 x
length E (standard) of the shaft extension
A non-standard cylindrical shaft extension can be supplied for
the motor series listed in the table Admissible changes to shaft
extension below up to the specified maximum lengths and
diameters as compared to the standard shaft.
It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the
admissible cantilever forces are reduced in accordance with the
non-standard shaft extension.

Admissible changes to the shaft extension:

Motor series

Frame size

Number of poles

1LA6,
1LA7,
1LA9,
1MA6,
1LP7,
1PP7

56
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160
180
200
225

2 ... 8

1LA5,
1LA9,
1LG4,
1LG6,
1MA6,
1LP4,
1LP5,
1PP4,
1PP5

250
280
315

1LA8,
1PQ8

315 2)
355 2)
400
450

Shaft extension length

E in mm
Standard
Up to max.
20
40
23
46
30
60
40
80
50
100
60
120

Shaft extension diameter

D in mm
Standard
Up to max. 1)
9
12
11
14
15
19
20
24
25
28
30

80
110

160
220

38
42
48
55

140

280

60

2 ... 8
2
4 ... 8
2
4 ... 8
2
4 ... 8
2
4 ... 8
2
4 ... 8
2
4 ... 8
2
4 ... 8
2
4 ... 8

70
65

170
140
170
140
170

340
280
340
280
340

210
170
210

420
340
420

Concentricity of shaft extension, coaxiality and linear movement

in accordance with DIN 42955 Tolerance R for flange-mounting
motors
The following are specified in DIN 42955 with Tolerance N
(normal) and Tolerance R (reduced):
1. Concentricity tolerances for the shaft extension
2. Coaxiality tolerances for the shaft extension and flange
centering
3. Linear movement tolerances for the shaft extension and
flange surface
1)

40
45
48
55
60

At admissible diameter, a step increase in shaft diameter is not possible.

75
65
80
65
85
75
95
80
110
90
120

75
80
90
70
85
80
95
80
115
90
125

The concentricity of the shaft extension, coaxiality and linear movement according to DIN 42955 Tolerance R for flange-mounting motors can be ordered using order code K04.
This order code can be combined for motors with deep-groove
bearings of series 60.., 62.. and 63 This cannot be supplied in
combination with parallel roller bearings (e.g. bearings for increased
cantilever forces, order code K20), brake or encoder mounting.
Concentricity of the shaft extension can be ordered according to
DIN 42955 Tolerance R for types of construction without a flange
with order code L39.
2)

For bearing design for increased cantilever forces order code K20 a
shaft diameter of 95 mm for frame size 315 and a shaft diameter of 100
mm for frame size 355 is possible for 4, 6 and 8-pole motors. See
dimension drawings Page 3/65 and 3/67.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/57

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Bearings and lubrication
Bearing lifetime (nominal lifetime)
The nominal bearing lifetime is defined acc. to standardized calculation procedures (DIN ISO 281) and is reached or even exceeded for 90 % of the bearings when the motors are operated
in the compliance with the data provided in the catalog.
Under average operating conditions, a lifetime (Lh10) of 100,000
hours can be achieved.
Generally, the bearing lifetime is defined by the bearing size, the
bearing load, the operating conditions, the speed and the
grease lifetime.
Bearing system
The bearing lifetime of motors with horizontal type of construction is at least 40,000 hours if there is no additional axial loading
at the coupling output and at least 20,000 hours with the admissible permitted loads.
This assumes that the motor is operated at 50 Hz. The nominal
bearing lifetime is reduced for converter-fed operation at higher
frequencies.

A measuring nipple for SPM shock pulse measurement is

mounted to check bearing vibration. The motors have 1 or 2
tapped holes per bearing plate and a measuring nipple with a
protective cap. If a second tapped holes is provided, it is fitted
with a sealing cap.
Order code G50
Bearing arrangement for increased cantilever forces on Pages
0/62 and 0/63 admissible loading on Pages 0/67 and 0/68.
Insulated bearings
To prevent damage as a result of bearing currents, insulated
bearings can be supplied at the non-drive end NDE from frame
size 225 to 315 and are recommended for frame size 225 and
above. This bearing design is also possible for 1MJ7 motors
from frame size 250 to 315. In a version in combination with
mounting of brake (order code G26), the insulated motor bearings are mounted on the drive end (DE).
Order code L27
The insulated bearing is standard for all 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8
motors which are identified for converter-fed operation.
Permanent lubrication

For the admissible vibration values measured at the bearing

plate, evaluation zones A and B specified in ISO 10816 are applicable in order to achieve the calculated lifetime under continuous duty. If higher vibration speeds will occur under the operating conditions, special arrangements will be necessary
(please inquire).

For permanent lubrication, the bearing grease lifetime is

matched to the bearing lifetime. This can, however, only be
achieved if the motor is operated in accordance with the catalog
specifications.

For standard motors applies the following:

In the basic bearing system, the floating bearing is situated at
the drive end (DE) and the located bearing (axially located from
frame size 160 and above) is situated at the non-drive end
(NDE). On request, the located bearing can also be supplied at
the drive end (DE) (Fig. 3, Page 0/64).
For ordering standard motors quote
order code K94.

Regreasing

For 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 non-standard motors applies the

following:
In the basic bearing system, the floating bearing is situated at
the non-drive end (NDE) and the located bearing is situated at
the drive end (DE).
On request, the located bearing can also be supplied at the nondrive end (NDE).
Price on request.
The bearing system is axially preloaded with a spring element to
ensure smooth running of the motor without play.
This is not the case in versions with parallel roller bearings. The
bearings of these motors must always run under adequate radial
force (motors must not be operated on a testbed without additional radial loads).
Motors of series 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9 and 1MA7 up to and including frame size 132 have a floating bearing arrangement (see
Fig. 1, Page 0/64).
Up to frame size 132, an additional axially-secured located bearing can be supplied on the non-drive end (NDE) complete with
a retaining ring (see Figure 2, Page 0/64).
Order code L04
For frame size 160 and above, bearings are usually axially
located (see Figures 2, 4 and 5, Page 0/64).
For increased cantilever forces (e.g. belt drives), reinforced
bearings can be used at the drive end (DE).
Order code K20
Motors 1LG4/6 in frame sizes 180 to 315, 2-pole, can be supplied with reinforced deep-groove bearings at both ends (size
range 03).
Special bearings for DE and NDE, bearing size 63
Order code K36

0/58

Siemens D 81.1 2008

In the basic version, the motors up to and including shaft height

250 have permanent lubrication.
For motors which can be re-greased at defined re-greasing intervals, the bearing lifetime can be extended and/or unfavourable factors such as temperature, mounting conditions, speed,
bearing size and mechanical load can be compensated.
From a shaft height of 280 upwards, regreasing with an M10 x 1
flat greasing nipple to DIN 3404 is provided.
It is possible to regrease motors, shaft heights 100 to 250.
A lubricating nipple is optionally provided.
Order code K40
In the case of motors equipped with regreasing devices, information regarding greasing intervals, quantity and type of grease
and any additional data is provided on the lubrication or rating
plate. (Re-greasing intervals for basic version on Page 0/59).
The regreasing device cannot be mounted in combination with
mounting of the brake, order Code G26.
Mechanical stress and grease lifetime
High speeds that exceed the rated speed with converter-fed operation and the resulting increased vibrations alter the mechanical running smoothness and the bearings are subjected to increased mechanical stress. This reduces the grease lifetime and
the bearing lifetime (please inquire where applicable).
For converter-fed operation in particular, compliance with the
mechanical limit speeds nadm at admissible supply frequency
fmax. is essential, see catalog part 5 Motors operating with frequency converters.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Grease lifetime and regreasing intervals for horizontal installation
Permanent lubrication 1)
Type series

Frame size

All

56 to 250

Type

Number of
poles
2 to 8

Grease lifetime up to CT 40 C 2)
20000 h or 40000 h 3)

Regreasing (basic version) 1)

Type series

Frame size

Type

1LA6, 1PP6
1LA5, 1LP5, 1PP5
1LA7, 1LP7, 1PP7
1LA9
1LA8..
1PQ8..

100 to 160
100 to 225

. . . . 10 . to . . . . 16 .
. . . . 10 . to . . . . 22 .

315 to 400

180 to 280

. . . . 31. to . . . . 40 .
. . . . 31. to . . . . 40 .
. . . . 45 .
. . . . 45 .
. . . . 31 .
. . . . 31 .
. . . . 35 . to . . . . 45 .
. . . . 35 . to . . . . 45 .
. . . . 18 . to . . . . 28 .

315

. . . . 31

100 to 200
225 to 280

. . . . 10 . to . . . . 20 .
. . . . 22 . to . . . . 28 .

315

. . . . 315

100 to 160
180 to 200
225 to 280

. . . . 10 . to . . . . 16 .
. . . . 18 . to . . . . 20 .
. . . . 22 . to . . . . 28 .

315

. . . . 315

450
1LL8..

315
355 to 450

1LG4, 1LP4, 1PP4

1LG6, 1PP6

1MA6

1MA7
1MJ6,
1MJ7

1)

For special uses and special greases, please inquire about grease lifetime
and regreasing intervals.

2)

If the coolant temperature is increased by 10 K, the grease lifetime and

regreasing interval are halved.

3)

40 000 h applies for horizontally installed motors with coupling output without additional axial loads.

4)

Regreasing interval for IM V1 type of construction.

Number of
poles
2 to 8
2 to 8

Regreasing interval up to CT 40 C 2)

2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8

4000 h
6000 h
3000 h
6000 h
4000 h
8000 h / 4000 h 4)
4000 h
6000 h / 3000 h 4)
4000 h
8000 h
3000 h
6000 h
8000 h
4000 h
8000 h
3000 h
6000 h
8000 h
8000 h
4000 h
8000 h
4000 h
8000 h

8000 h
8000 h

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/59

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Bearing selection table for 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LG, 1LP, 1MA and 1PP motors basic version
The bearing selection tables are only intended for planning purposes. Authoritative information on the actual type of bearings
fitted in motors already supplied can be obtained by the factory
by quoting the serial number or can be read from the lubricating
plate on 1LA8 motors.
For motors
frame size

Type

Number of poles

When deep-groove ball bearings with sideplates are used, the

side plate is on the inside. For located bearings on drive end DE
for 1LA5, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1MA6 and 1MA7 motors, see special version in Figure 3 (Page 0/64).

Drive end
(DE) bearing
Horizontal type
of construction

Vertical type of
construction

Non-drive end
NDE bearing
Horizontal type
of construction

Vertical type of
construction

Figures
on Pages
0/64 and 0/65

1LA5 . . ., 1LA6 . . ., 1LA7 . . ., 1LA9 . . ., 1LP5 . . ., 1LP7 . . .,

1MA6 . . ., 1MA7 . . ., 1PP5 . . ., 1PP7 . . .
56 M
63 M
71 M
80 M
90 S/L
100 L
112 M
132 S/M
160 M/L
180 M/L
200 L
225 S/M
250 M
280 S/M

. . . . 05 .
. . . . 06 .
. . . . 07 .
. . . . 08 .
. . . . 09 .
. . . . 10 .
. . . . 11 .
. . . . 13 .
. . . . 16 .
. . . . 18 .
. . . . 20 .
. . . . 22 .
. . . . 25 .
. . . . 28 .

315 S/M

. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

315 L

2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8

6201 2ZC3
6201 2ZC3
6202 2ZC3
6004 2ZC3
6205 2ZC3
6206 2ZC3 1)
6206 2ZC3 1)
6208 2ZC3 1)
6209 2ZC3 1)
6210 ZC3 2)
6212 ZC3 2)
6213 ZC3 2)
6215 ZC3 2)
6216 C3
6317 C3
6217 C3
6319 C3

6201 2ZC3
6201 2ZC3
6202 2ZC3
6004 2ZC3
6205 2ZC3
6206 2ZC3 1)
6206 2ZC3 1)
6208 2ZC3 1)
6209 2ZC3 1)
6210 ZC3 2)
6212 ZC3 2)
6213 ZC3 2)
6215 ZC3 2)
6216 C3
6317 C3
6217 C3
6319 C3

6201 2ZC3
6201 2ZC3
6202 2ZC3
6004 2ZC3
6004 2ZC3
6205 2ZC3 1)
6205 2ZC3 1)
6208 2ZC3 1)
6209 2ZC3 1)
6210 ZC3 2)
6212 ZC3 2)
6212 ZC3 2) 5)
6215 ZC3 2)
6216 C3
6317 C3
6217 C3
6319 C3

6201 2ZC3
6201 2ZC3
6202 2ZC3
6004 2ZC3
6004 2ZC3
6205 2ZC3 1)
6205 2ZC3 1)
6208 2ZC3 1)
6209 2ZC3 1)
6210 ZC3 2)
6212 ZC3 2)
6212 ZC3 2) 5)
6215 ZC3 2)
6216 C3
6317 C3
6217 C3
6319 C3

2
4 to 8

6217 C3
6319 C3

6217 C3
6319 C3

6217 C3
6319 C3

7217 BEP
6319 C3

2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8

6210 ZC3 4)
6212 ZC3 4)
6213 ZC3 4)
6215 ZC3 4)
6217 C3
6317 C3
6219 C3
6319 C3

6210 ZC3 4)
6212 ZC3 4)
6213 ZC3 4)
6215 ZC3 4)
6217 C3
6317 C3
6219 C3
6319 C3

6210 ZC3 4)
6212 ZC3 4)
6213 ZC3 4)
6215 ZC3 4)
6217 C3
6317 C3
6219 C3
6319 C3

6210 ZC3 4)
6212 ZC3 4)
6213 ZC3 4)
6215 ZC3 4)
6217 C3
6317 C3
6219 C3
6319 C3

2
4 to 8

6219 C3
6319 C3

6219 C3 3)
6319 C3

6219 C3
6319 C3

7219 BEP 3)
6319 C3

Fig. 1

Fig. 2
Fig. 4

Fig. 5

1LG4 . . ., 1LG6 . . ., 1LP4 . . .,

1PP4 . . ., 1PP6 . . .
180 M/L
200 L
225 S/M
250 M
280 S/M

. . . . 18 .
. . . . 20 .
. . . . 22 .
. . . . 25 .
. . . . 28 .

315 S/M

. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

315 L

1)

Deep-groove bearings are used for regreasable versions (order code

K40).

2)

Deep-groove bearings are not used for regreasable versions (order code
K40) of 1MA6 motors of frame sizes 180 M to 250 M.

3)

Only at 50 Hz.

4)

Deep-groove bearings are not used for regreasable versions (order code
K40).

5)

For 1MA6 motors frame size 225 S/M bearing 6213 ZC3 at the non-drive
end NDE (BS).

0/60

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Bearing selection table for 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motors basic version
For motors
frame size

Type

Number of poles

Drive end
(DE) bearing
Horizontal type of
construction

Vertical type of
construction

Non-drive end
NDE bearing
Horizontal type
of construction

2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8

Figures
on Pages
0/64 and
0/65

Vertical type of
construction

6218 C3
6218 C3
6218 C3
6220 C3
6218 C3
6224 C3
6220 C3
6226 C3

6218 C3
6218 C3
7218 B + 6218 C3
7220 B + 6220 C3
7218 B + 6218 C3
7224 B + 6224 C3
7220 B + 6220 C3
7226 B + 6226 C3

6218 C3
6218 C3
6218 C3
6220 C3
6218 C3
6224 C3
6220 C3
6226 C3

6218 C3
6218 C3
6218 C3
6220 C3
6218 C3
6224 C3
6220 C3
6226 C3

Fig. 6 and
Fig. 7

6218 C3
6220 C3
6218 C3
6224 C3
6218 C3
6226 C3
6220 C3
6228 C3

6218 C3
7220 B + 6220 C3
6218 C3
7224 B + 6224 C3
6218 C3
7226 B + 6226 C3
6220 C3
7228 B + 6226 C3

6218 C3
6218 C3
6218 C3
6220 C3
6218 C3
6224 C3
6220 C3
6228 C3

6218 C3
6218 C3
6218 C3
6220 C3
6218 C3
6224 C3
6220 C3
6226 C3

No figure

Vertical type of
construction
6202 ZC3
6004 ZC3
6205 C3
6206 C3
6306 C3
6308 C3
6309 C3
6210 C3
6212 C3
6213 C3
6215 C3
NU 216
NU 217 1)
NU 218 2)

Non-drive end
NDE bearing
Horizontal type
of construction
6202 ZC3
6004 ZC3
6205 C3
6206 C3
6306 C3
6308 C3
6309 C3
6210 C3
6212 C3
6213 C3
6215 C3
6216 C3
6217 C3
6218 C3

1LA8 . . ., 1PQ8 . . .
315

. . . . 31 .

355

. . . . 35 .

400

. . . . 40 .

450

. . . . 45 .

315

. . . . 31 .

355

. . . . 35 .

400

. . . . 40 .

450

. . . . 45 .

1LL8 . . .

1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 non-standard motors are transported

horizontally. They can be transported vertically at an additional
charge on request.
Bearing selection table for 1MJ motors basic version
For motors
frame size

71 M
80 M
90 S/L
100 L
112 M
132 S/M
160 M/L
180 M/L
200 L
225 S/M
250 M
280 S/M
315 S/M

Type

1MJ6 07 .
1MJ6 08 .
1MJ6 09 .
1MJ6 10 .
1MJ6 11 .
1MJ6 13 .
1MJ6 16 .
1MJ6 18 .
1MJ6 20 .
1MJ7 22 .
1MJ7 25 .
1MJ7 28 .
1MJ7 31 .

Number of poles

2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8

1)

Special version with deep groove bearing 6216 C3 on request.

Recommended for coupling output or low cantilever forces.

2)

Special version with deep groove bearing 6217 C3 on request.

Recommended for coupling output or low cantilever forces.

Drive end
(DE) bearing
Horizontal type of
construction
6202 ZC3
6004 ZC3
6205 C3
6206 C3
6306 C3
6308 C3
6309 C3
6210 C3
6212 C3
6213 C3
6215 C3
NU 216
NU 217 1)
NU 218 2)

Vertical type of
construction
6202 ZC3
6004 ZC3
6205 C3
6206 C3
6306 C3
6308 C3
6309 C3
6210 C3
6212 C3
6213 C3
6215 C3
6216 C3
6217 C3
6218 C3

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Figure
on Page
0/65
Fig. 8
Fig. 9

Fig. 10
Fig. 11

Fig. 12

0/61

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Bearing selection table for 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA9, 1LG, 1LP, 1MA and 1PP motors Bearings for increased cantilever forces
Order code K20
Please inquire about noise and vibration data.
For NU bearings (parallel roller bearings), in contrast to standard
bearings, a minimum cantilever force is required. Parallel roller
bearings are not suitable for coupling output.
The bearing selection tables are only intended for planning purposes. Authoritative information on the actual type of bearings
fitted in motors already supplied can be obtained by the factory
For motors
frame size

Type

Number of poles

by quoting the serial number or can be read from the lubricating

plate on 1LA8 motors.
When deep-groove ball bearings with sideplates are used, the
side plate is on the inside.
1MJ8 motors at 60 Hz on request.

Drive end
(DE) bearing
Horizontal type of
construction

Vertical type of
construction

Non-drive end
NDE bearing
Horizontal type
of construction

Vertical type of
construction

Figure
on Page
0/64

1LA5 . . ., 1LA6 . . ., 1LA7 . . ., 1LA9 . . ., 1LP5 . . ., 1LP7 . . .,

1MA6 . . ., 1MA7 . . ., 1PP5 . . ., 1PP7 . . .
100 L
112 M
132 S/M
160 M/L
180 M/L
200 L
225 S/M
250 M
280 S/M

. . . . 10 .
. . . . 11 .
. . . . 13 .
. . . . 16 .
. . . . 18 .
. . . . 20 .
. . . . 22 .
. . . . 25 .
. . . . 28 .

315 S/M

. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

315 L

2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8

6306 ZC3
6306 ZC3
6308 ZC3
6309 ZC3
6310 ZC3
6312 ZC3
NU 213 E 2) 3)
NU 215 E 2)
NU 216 E
NU 317 E
NU 217 E
NU 319 E

6306 ZC3
6306 ZC3
6308 ZC3
6309 ZC3
6310 ZC3
6312 ZC3
NU 213 E 2) 3)
NU 215 E 2)
NU 216 E
NU 317 E
NU 217 E
NU 319 E

6205 2ZC3 1)
6205 2ZC3 1)
6208 2ZC3 1)
6209 2ZC3 1)
6210 ZC3
6212 ZC3
6212 ZC3 4)
6215 ZC3
6216 C3
6317 C3
6217 C3
6319 C3

6205 2ZC3 1)
6205 2ZC3 1)
6208 2ZC3 1)
6209 2ZC3 1)
6210 ZC3
6212 ZC3
6212 ZC3 4)
6215 ZC3
6216 C3
6317 C3
6217 C3
6319 C3

2
4 to 8

NU 217 E
NU 319 E

NU 319 E

6217 C3
6319 C3

6319 C3

2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8

NU 210
NU 212
NU 213
NU 215
NU 217
NU 317
NU 219 5)
NU 319

NU 210
NU 212
NU 213
NU 215
NU 217
NU 317
NU 219 5)
NU 319

6210 C3
6212 C3
6213 C3
6215 C3
6217 C3
6317 C3
6219 C3
6319 C3

6210 C3
6212 C3
6213 C3
6215 C3
6217 C3
6317 C3
6219 C3
6319 C3

2
4 to 8

NU 219 5)
NU 319

NU 219 5)
NU 319

6219 C3
6319 C3

6219 C3
6319 C3

No figure

1LG4 . . ., 1LG6 . . .,
1LP4 . . ., 1PP4 . . .
180 M/L
200 L
225 S/M
250 M
280 S/M

. . . . 18 .
. . . . 20 .
. . . . 22 .
. . . . 25 .
. . . . 28 .

315 S/M

. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

315 L

1)

Bearings wth a side plate are used for regreasable versions (order code
K40).

2)

Deep-groove bearings of size range 03 are also possible (order code

K36).

3)

For 1LA5 motors frame size 225 S/M bearing 6313 ZC3 at the drive end.

4)

For 1MA6 motors frame size 225 S/M bearing 6213 ZC3 at the non-drive
end.

5)

Only at 50 Hz.

0/62

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Bearing selection table for 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8 motors bearings for increased cantilever forces Order code K20
For motors
frame size

Type

Number of poles

Drive end
(DE) bearing
Horizontal type of
construction

NU 320 E
NU 322 E

Vertical type of
construction

Non-drive end
NDE bearing
Horizontal type
of construction

Vertical type of
construction

On request
On request

6218 C3
6220 C3

On request
On request

1LA8 . . .,
1PQ8 . . .
315
355

. . . . 31 .
. . . . 35 .

4 to 8
4 to 8

Please inquire about noise and vibration data. For NU bearings,

in contrast to standard bearings, a minimum cantilever force is
required. The bearing selection tables are only intended for
planning purposes. Binding statements about the bearings for
motors which have already been shipped can be requested.
Please specify the serial number.

No figure

The motors are transported horizontally; they can be transported

vertically at additional cost on request.
Reinforced bearings are available for frame sizes 400 and 450
as well as IM V1 types of construction as well as for 1LL8 motors
on request. Please specify cantilever force and dimension x.
Reinforced bearings cannot be supplied for 2-pole motors.

Bearing selection table for 1MJ6 and 1MJ7 motors Bearings for increased cantilever forces Order code K20
For motors
frame size

Type

Number of poles

Drive end
(DE) bearing
Horizontal type of
construction

Vertical type of
construction

Non-drive end
NDE bearing
Horizontal type
of construction

Vertical type of
construction

2 to 8
2 to 8

NU 210
NU 212

NU 210
NU 212

6210 ZC3
6212 ZC3

6210 ZC3
6212 ZC3

No figure

2 to 8
2 to 8

NU 213
NU 215

NU 213
NU 215

6213 C3
6215 C3

6213 C3
6215 C3

No figure

1MJ6 . . .
180 M/L
200 L

. . . . 18 .
. . . . 20 .

225 M/L
250 M

. . . . 22 .
. . . . 25 .

1MJ7 . . .

Bearing selection table for 1LG4, 1LG6, 1LP4 and 1PP4 motors Deep-groove bearings reinforced at both ends Order code K36
For motors
frame size

Type

Number of poles

Drive end
(DE) bearing
Horizontal type of
construction

6310 ZC3 1)
6312 ZC3 1)
6313 ZC3 1)
6315 ZC3 1)
6317 C3
6317 C3 2)
6316 C3
6319 C3 2)

Vertical type of
construction

Non-drive end
NDE bearing
Horizontal type
of construction

Vertical type of
construction

6310 ZC3 1)
6312 ZC3 1)
6313 ZC3 1)
6315 ZC3 1)
6317 C3
6317 C3 2)
6316 C3
6319 C3 2)

6310 ZC3 1)
6312 ZC3 1)
6313 ZC3 1)
6315 ZC3 1)
6317 C3
6317 C3 2)
6316 C3
6319 C3 2)

6310 ZC3 1)
6312 ZC3 1)
6313 ZC3 1)
6315 ZC3 1)
6317 C3
6317 C3 2)
6316 C3
6319 C3 2)

Figure
on Page
0/64

1LG4 . . ., 1LG6 . . .,
1LP4 . . ., 1PP4 . . .
180 M/L
200 L
225 S/M
250 M
280 S/M

. . . . 18 .
. . . . 20 .
. . . . 22 .
. . . . 25 .
. . . . 28 .

315 S/M/L

. . . . 31 .

2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2 to 8
2
4 to 8
2
4 to 8

1)

Deep-groove bearings are not used for regreasable versions (order code
K40).

2)

As for basic version.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

0/63

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Diagrams of bearings

Drive-end bearing
Non-drive end bearing
Located bearing for 1LA7, 1LA9, 1MA7, frame sizes 56 to 160

Drive-end bearing

Fig. 4

Drive-end bearing

Fig. 6

Drive-end bearing

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00102

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00107

G_D081_XX_00106

G_D081_XX_00105

G_D081_XX_00104

Fig. 3

Fig. 2

G_D081_XX_00108

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00103

Drive-end bearing

G_D081_XX_00101

Fig. 1

Located bearings for 1LA5, frame sizes 180 to 225;

1LA9, 1MA6, frame sizes 180 to 200

G_D081_XX_00110

Frame sizes
280 S to 315 L, 2-pole to 8-pole

Frame sizes
315 to 450, 2-pole to 8-pole, IM B3
Drive-end bearing

Frame size
315, 2-pole to 8-pole, IM V1

0/64

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Frame sizes
355 and 450, 2-pole to 8-pole, IM V1

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00114

Drive-end bearing

G_D081_XX_00113

Fig. 7

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00112

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00115

Drive-end bearing

G_D081_XX_00111

Fig. 5

G_D081_XX_00109

General technical data

Frame sizes
315 to 450, 2-pole to 8-pole, IM V1

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data

Fig. 11

Drive-end bearing

G_D081_XX_00117
G_D081_XX_00121

G_D081_XX_00120

G_D081_XX_00119

Drive-end bearing

Non-drive end bearing

Non-drive end bearing

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00123

Fig. 12

Drive-end bearing

G_D081_XX_00118

Drive-end bearing

Fig. 9

G_D081_XX_00122

Fig. 10

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00124

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00125

Drive-end bearing

G_D081_XX_00116

Fig. 8

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/65

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Admissible cantilever forces

Admissible cantilever forces for the basic 50 Hz version

Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values for x = l (l = shaft extension)
For
Admissible cantilever force Admissible cantilever force
motors
for x0
for xmax.
Frame Number Type
Type
size
of poles
N
N
N
N
N
N

Admissible cantilever forces, basic version

G_D081_XX_00128a

General technical data

FQ

x
xmax.

x0

In order to calculate the admissible cantilever forces for a radial

load, the line of force (i.e. the centerline of the pulley) of the
cantilever force FQ (N) must lie within the free shaft extension
(dimension x).
Dimension x [mm] is the distance between the point of application of force FQ and the shaft shoulder. Dimension xmax. corresponds to the length of the shaft extension.
Total cantilever force FQ = c Fu

56 M

63 M

The pre-tension factor c is a value gained from experience from

the belt manufacturer. The following approximate value can be
assumed:

71 M

For normal flat leather belts with an idler pulley c = 2;

for V-belts c = 2 to 2.5;
for special synthetic belts (depending on the type and load)
c = 2 to 2.5.

80 M

The circumferential force Fu (N) is calculated using the following

equation

Fu = 2 10 7
Fu
P
n
D

90 S
90 L

P
n D
100 L

circumferential force in N
rated motor power (transmitted power) in kW
rated motor speed
pulley diameter in mm

112 M

The pulleys are standardized acc. to DIN 2211, Sheet 3.

The admissible cantilever forces at 60 Hz are approx. 80 % of
the 50 Hz values (please inquire).
Admissible cantilever forces for the basic 50 Hz version
Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values for x = l (l = shaft extension)
For
Admissible cantilever force Admissible cantilever force
motors
for x0
for xmax.
Frame Number Type
Type
size
of poles
N
N
N
N
N
N

250 M

280 S
280 M

315 S
315 M

315 L

0/66

2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8

1LG4
1LG6

1MA6

1MJ6
1MJ7

1LG4
1LG6

1MA6

1MJ6
1MJ7

3190
4000
4700
5200
4000
8400
9700
10750
4750
9100
10700
11600
4000
8400
9700
11100

3650
4400
5350
5700
3350
8400
10000
11000
3950
9900
12100
13300
3100
8800
11400
12500

3650
4400
5350
5700
8100
9700
11700
12800
9000
13100
15600
16900
8800
24000
25000
26000

2530
3350
3900
4400
3250
7000
8100
9000
3890
7300
8700
9600
3280
7500
9100
10200

2950
3600
4350
4700
2800
7200
8900
9850
3350
8100
9900
10900
2700
7450
9600
10500

2950
3600
4350
4700
6700
8050
9700
10600
7600
10800
12800
13900
7600
12000
12000
12000

Siemens D 81.1 2008

132 S
132 M

160 M
160 L

180 M
180 L

200 L

225 S
225 M

2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8

1LA5
1LA7
1LA9
1MA6
1MA7
1LA6
1LP5
1LP7
1PP5
1PP7

1LG4
1LG6
1LP4
1PP4
1PP6

1MJ6
1MJ7

1LA5
1LA7
1LA9
1MA6
1MA7
1LA6
1LP5
1LP7
1PP5
1PP7

1LG4
1LG6
1LP4
1PP4
1PP6

1MJ6
1MJ7

270
350
415
270
350
415
415
530
630
690
485
625
735
815
725
920
1090
1230
1030
1310
1550
1720
1010
1270
1520
1690
1490
1940
2260
2500
1540
2040
2330
2660
2000
2350
2800
3050
2550
3350
3900
4150
3050
3750
4550
4850

1780
2240
2550
2860
2380
3050
3500
3800
2820
3500
4050
4500

260
260
260

485
560
560

725
920
1090
1230
1030
1310
1550
1720
1680
1960
2140
2450
2250
2720
3100
3400
2800
3330
3750
3750
2000
2350
2800
3050
2550
3350
3900
4150
3050
3750
4550
4850

240
305
360
240
305
360
355
450
535
585
400
515
605
675
605
775
910
1030
840
1060
1250
1400
830
1040
1240
1380
1180
1530
1780
1980
1210
1590
1820
2080
1550
1950
2250
2500
2100
2750
3200
3450
2550
2950
3600
3900

1410
1820
2120
2330
1930
2530
2930
3210
2290
2760
3240
3500

260
260
260

400
515
560

605
775
910
1030
840
1060
1250
1400
1490
1580
1720
1950
1820
2170
2420
2700
2250
2600
2900
2900
1550
1950
2250
2500
2100
2750
3200
3450
2550
2950
3600
3900

Table continues overleaf

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data

315
...
450

2 ... 8

1LA8, 1PQ8 1)

1LA8, 1PQ8 1)

See diagrams
Page 0/69

See diagrams
Page 0/69

For 1LA8 motors in horizontal type of construction, the admissible cantilever forces are specified with regard to the axial forces.
It should be observed that for types of construction IM B6,
IM B7, IM B8, IM V5 and IM V6 the belt tension is only permitted
to act parallel to the mounting plane or towards the mounting
plane and the feet must be supported. Both feet must be secured for foot-mounting types of construction.

Bearing design for increased cantilever forces

FQ

x
xmax.

x0

Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1LA, 1MA, 1MJ, 1LP and

1PP motors
Deep-groove ball bearings at the drive end (DE) Order code K20
For motors
Admissible cantilever force FQ
Frame size
Type
Number of
at x0
at xmax.
poles
N
N

1LA5 . . ., 1LA6 . . ., 1LA7 . . ., 1LA9 . . .,

1MA6 . . ., 1MA7 . . ., 1MJ6 . . ., 1MJ7 . . .,
1LP5 . . ., 1LP7 . . ., 1PP5 . . ., 1PP7 . . .,

Refer to Pages 0/67 to 0/68 if the cantilever forces are higher

than those listed above.

1)

G_D081_XX_00128a

Admissible cantilever forces for the basic 50 Hz version

Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values for x = l (l = shaft extension)
For
Admissible cantilever force Admissible cantilever force
motors
for x0
for xmax.
Frame Number Type
Type
size
of poles
N
N

100

. . . . 10 .

112

. . . . 113

132

. . . . 13 .

160

. . . . 16 .

180

. . . . 18 .

200

. . . . 20 .

225

1LA522 .
1LP5 . . .
1PP5 . . .

2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8

1680
1960
2140
2450
1680
1960
2140
2450
2250
2720
3100
3400
2800
3330
3750
3750
3700
4450
5100
5550
5200
6450
7300
7900
5200
6450
7300
7900

1490
1580
1720
1950
1490
1580
1720
1950
1820
2170
2420
2700
2250
2600
2900
2900
3000
3600
4150
4500
4300
5350
6100
6550
4300
5350
6100
6550

Data for 1LL8 is available on request.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/67

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1LG motors
Parallel roller bearings at the drive end (DE) Order code K20
Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values for x = l (l = shaft extension)
For motors
Admissible cantilever force FQ
Frame size
Type
Number of
at x0
at xmax.
poles
N
N

Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1LG motors

Deep-groove bearings reinforced at both ends DE/NDE Order code K36
Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values for x = l (l = shaft extension)
For motors
Admissible cantilever force FQ
Frame size
Type
Number of
at x0
at xmax.
poles
N
N

1LG4 . . ., 1LG6 . . .,
1LP4 . . ., 1PP4 . . .
180 M,
180 L

. . . . 18 .

200 L

. . . . 20 .

225 S,
225 M

. . . . 22 .

250 M

. . . . 25 .

280 S 1),
280 M 1)
315 S 1),
315 M 1)
315 L 1)

. . . . 28 .
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317

1LG4 . . .
1LG6 . . .

2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2

4550
5650
6350
6950
6600
8200
9300
10100
7500
9150
10400
11300
9100
11300
12800
14100
11400

3600
4050
4050
4050
5350
6850
6300
7400
6250
7200
7400
7350
7300
9300
10500
10500
9350

14700

12300

14600

12700

Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1MA and 1MJ motors

Parallel roller bearings at the drive end (DE) Order code K20
For motors
Admissible cantilever force FQ
Frame size
Type
Number of
at x0
at xmax.
poles
N
N

1MA6 . . .
1MJ7 . . .
225

. . . . 22 .

250

. . . . 25 .

280 1) 2)
315 S 1) 2)
315 M 1) 2)
315 L 1) 2)

. . . . 28 .
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317

2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
2

8100
9800
11200
12200
9600
11600
13200
14400
10000
12000

6800
7800
8800
9700
7900
9600
10800
11800
8400
10200

11800
10200
(horizontal type of
construction)

2 to 8

See diagrams Page 0/70

1LA8
1PQ8
315 to 355

It should be observed that for types of construction IM B6,

IM B7, IM B8, IM V5 and IM V6 the belt tension is only permitted
to act parallel to the mounting plane or towards the mounting
plane and the feet must be supported.

1)

Admissible cantilever forces for 1LG4, 1LG6, 1LP4, 1PP4 and 1MA6 frame
sizes 280 to 315 L in 4-pole to 8-pole version, see Page 0/70.

2)

Not applicable to 1MJ motors with frame sizes 280 to 315, because this is
the standard version.

0/68

Siemens D 81.1 2008

180 M,
180 L

. . . . 18 .

200 L

. . . . 20 .

225 S,
225 M

. . . . 22 .

250 M

. . . . 25 .

280 S,
280 M
315 S,
315 M
315 L

. . . . 28 .
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317

2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2
4
6
8
2

3280
4150
4750
5250
4350
5550
6350
7000
4850
6100
7050
7750
5800
7400
8500
9350

2600
3430
3950
4050
3500
4550
5350
5900
3950
4850
5650
6150
4600
6050
7050
7850

5650

4650

5450

4650

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motors basic version
Frame size 315, 1LA8 and 1PQ8 Type of construction IM B3
8
kN
7
Q

G_D081_EN_00129

8
kN
7

G_D081_EN_00130

750 rpm
1500 rpm

Q 6

750 rpm
1500 rpm

Frame size 355, 1LA8 and 1PQ8 Type of construction IM B3

1000 rpm

1000 rpm
4

3000 rpm

0
-10

-8

-6

-4
-2
0
2
4 kN 6
Tension A
Pressure A
Cantilever force Q at x = l (shaft extension) via axial force A at nominal
bearing service life h10 = 20000 h

Frame size 400, 1LA8 and 1PQ8 Type of construction IM B3

8
kN
7

750 rpm

G_D081_EN_00131

1500 rpm

Q 6

0
-10

3000 rpm

-8

-6

-4
-2
0
2
4 kN 6
Tension A
Pressure A
Cantilever force Q at x = l (shaft extension) via axial force A at nominal
bearing service life h10 = 20000 h

Frame size 450, 1LA8 and 1PQ8 Type of construction IM B3

8
kN
7

G_D081_EN_00132

750 rpm
1500 rpm
1000 rpm

Q 6

1000 rpm
5

0
-10

3000 rpm

4
3000 rpm

-8

-6

-4
-2
0
2
4 kN 6
Tension A
Pressure A
Cantilever force Q at x = l (shaft extension) via axial force A at nominal
bearing service life h10 = 20000 h

0
-10

-8

-6

-4
-2
0
2
4 kN 6
Tension A
Pressure A
Cantilever force Q at x = l (shaft extension) via axial force A at nominal
bearing service life h10 = 20000 h

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/69

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motors Bearings for increased cantilever forces Order code K20
Frame size 315, 1LA8 and 1PQ8 Type of construction IM B3
50
kN
46

Frame size 355, 1LA8 and 1PQ8 Type of construction IM B3

50
kN
46

G_D081_EN_00134

1000 rpm

42

42

1500 rpm

750 rpm
38

G_D081_EN_00135

750 rpm

38
1000 rpm

34
30

34
30

1500 rpm

26

26

22

22

18
0

18
40

80

120 160 mm 240

x

At 60 Hz, the admissible cantilever force must be reduced to

80 %.

40

80

120

160 mm 240
x

For all motors of frame sizes 400 and 450, IM V1 and 1LL8
motors with reinforced bearings available on request.
Please specify cantilever force and lever arm.

Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1LG motors Bearings for increased cantilever forces Order code K20
Frame size 280, 4-pole to 8-pole, 1LG4/1LG6,
1LP4/1PP4
44
kN
40

Frame size 315, 4-pole to 8-pole, 1LG4/1LG6,

1LP4/1PP4
40
kN
35

G_D081_EN_00136

FQ

FQ
36
32

40
kN
35

G_D081_EN_00137

1000 rpm

30
750 rpm

Frame size 315 S/M, 4-pole to 8-pole, 1LG4/1LG6,

1LP4/1PP4

FQ

G_D081_EN_00138

750 rpm
1000 rpm

30

n =1500 rpm

n =1500 rpm

25

25

20

20

1000 rpm
28

n =1500 rpm

24

15

15

750 rpm

20

10

10

16

12

0
40

80

120 160 mm 240

x

40

80

120

160 mm 240
x

40

80

120

160 mm 240
x

Admissible cantilever forces at 50 Hz for 1MA motors Bearings for increased cantilever forces Order code K20
Frame size 280, 4-pole to 8-pole, 1MA6
36
kN
32
FQ

Frame size 315 S/M, 4-pole to 8-pole, 1MA6

40
kN
36

G_D081_EN_00139

750

rpm

100
0 rp
m
28 n
=15
00 r
pm
24

FQ

Frame size 315 L, 4-pole to 8-pole, 1MA6

38
kN
34

G_D081_EN_00140

750
100

rpm

FQ

0 rp

32 n
=

150

30

0 rp

28

24

22

16

20

18

0/70

40

80

120 160 mm 240

x

Siemens D 81.1 2008

16

40

80

n =1

500

G_D081_EN_00141

rpm

26

20

12

750
rpm
100
0 rp
m

120 160 mm 240

x

14

40

80

120 160 mm 240

x

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Admissible axial load
1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LP5, 1LP7, 1MA6, 1MA7, 1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP5, 1PP6, 1PP7 motors in vertical type of construction
basic version
Frame
size

56
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160

Shaft extension pointing

3000 rpm
downwards
Load
down
up
N
N
80
245
80
245
105
365
110
425
110
440
140
700
140
710
(140)* (1050)*
200
1200
(1500)* (1550)*
1500
1400
(2000)* (1720)*

For motors
Frame
size
Type
1LA5 . . .
1MA6 . . .
1MJ6 . . .
1MJ7 . . .
1LP5 . . .
1PP5 . . .
180 M
180 L
200 L
225 S
225 M
250 M
280 S
280 M
315 S
315 M
315 L

. . . . 183
. . . . 186
. . . . 206
. . . . 207
. . . . 220
. . . . 223
. . . . 253
. . . . 280
. . . . 283
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

upwards
Load
down
up
N
N
230
95
230
95
335
130
360
160
360
180
550
280
550
300
(800)* (300)*
950
470
(1300)* (470)*
950
1900
(1300)* (2500)*

1500 rpm
downwards
Load
down
up
N
N
80
330
80
330
90
380
100
540
100
680
130
990
130
1000
(130)* (1350)*
180
1680
(1500)* (2100)*
1900
1800
(2500)* (2400)*

upwards
Load
down
up
N
N
310
95
310
95
440
130
480
165
580
190
820
285
820
310
(1100)* (300)*
1200
470
(1600)* (470)*
1300
2200
(1720)* (2800)*

1000 rpm
downwards
Load
down
up
N
N
80
410
80
410
90
590
100
650
100
920
130
1280
130
1290
(130)* (1720)*
180
1900
(280)* (2400)*
2200
2200
(2800)* (2800)*

upwards
Load
down
up
N
N
390
95
390
95
550
130
590
165
820
190
1110
285
1110
310
(1500)* (310)*
1600
470
(2100)* (470)*
1600
2700
(2130)* (3600)*

750 rpm
downwards
Load
down
up
N
N

90
700
100
760
100
1150
130
1560
130
1570
(130)* (2000)*
190
2200
(290)* (2800)*
2700
2700
(3600)* (3600)*

upwards
Load
down
up
N
N

660
130
700
165
1050
190
1390
285
1390
310
(1850)* (310)*
1900
440
(2400)* (440)*
1950
2900
(2600)* (3700)*

Shaft extension downwards

3000 rpm

1500 rpm

Load down
1LA5... 1MJ6..
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

Load up
1LA5... 1MJ6...
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

Load down
1LA5... 1MJ6...
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

Load up
1LA5... 1MJ6...
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

Load down
1LA5... 1MJ6...
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

Load up
1LA5... 1MJ6...
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

Load down
1LA5... 1MJ6...
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

Load up
1LA5... 1MJ6...
1MA6 1MJ7
1LP5
1PP5

N
1150

1650
1550

1890
1750
380
180
210
100
9270
9270
9270

N
1900

2750
2800

2190
2790
4480
4580
5270
5350
770
840
840

N
1400
1400

2000
2300
2180
2160
3830
3550
3700
3330
2330
1370
1370

N
2350
2400

3350
3020
3060
3760
8790
8910
10200
10400
10400
10800
10800

1700
2550
2400

2700
2740
5340
5000
5150
4740
3650
2990
2990

2850
3950
3950

3500
4340
10000
10100
11700
11700
11700
11600
11600

2000

2800
3200
3040
2990
6280
5930
6520
5800
4630
3760
3760

3150

4500
4080
4120
4890
11000
11100
13000
13000
13000
13000
13000

N
1150

1650
1550

1890
1750
1150
900
900
650

N
1900

2750
2800

2190
2790
3850
3900
4500
4550

N
1400
1400

2000
2300
2180
2160
1350
1000
1700
1600

1000 rpm

N
2350
2400

3350
3020
3060
3760
4950
5000
6400
6900

1700
2550
2400

2700
2740
2350
2000
2300
2050

750 rpm

2850
3950
3950

3500
4340
5650
5700
7050
7500

2000

2800
3200
3040
2990
2850
2450
3400
2800

3150

4500
4080
4120
4890
6250
6300
7950
8400

The values shown do not assume a cantilever force on the shaft

extension.
The admissible loads are valid for operation at 50 Hz; for 60 Hz,
please inquire.
The calculation of the admissible axial load was based on the
drive with generally available coupling. For suppliers, see the
relevant catalog part, section Accessories.
Please inquire if the load direction alternates.

* The values in brackets for frame sizes 112 to 160 apply to 1MJ6 motors.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/71

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LP7, 1MA6, 1MA7, 1MJ6, 1MJ7, 1PP6, 1PP7 motors in horizontal type of construction Basic version
Frame
size

3000 rpm
Tensile
load

56
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160

N
90
90
120
140
150
220
220
(220)*
350
(350)*
1500
(2100)*

Thrust load (N)

with radial load
at
x0
N
120
120
150
190
300
450
450
(850)*
650
(1000)*
850
(1280)*

For motors
Frame size

Type
1LA5 . . .
1MA6 . . .
1MJ6 . . .
1MJ7 . . .
1LP5 . . .
1PP5 . . .

180 M
180 L
200 L

. . . . 183
. . . . 186
. . . . 206
. . . . 207
. . . . 220
. . . . 223
. . . . 253
. . . . 280
. . . . 283
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

225 S
225 M
250 M
280 S
280 M
315 S
315 M
315 L

1500 rpm

xmax.
N
90
90
120
150
280
350
350
(700)*
520
(900)*
720
(1100)*

Tensile
without load
radial
load
N
240
240
350
400
400
630
630
(1050)*
1200
(1550)*
1500
(2100)*

N
90
90
120
140
150
220
220
(220)*
350
(350)*
1500
(2100)*

1000 rpm

Thrust load (N)

with radial load
at
x0
N
140
140
210
300
400
600
600
(1150)*
850
(1250)*
1050
(1680)*

xmax.
N
110
110
150
260
360
500
500
(1000)*
700
(1150)*
920
(1700)*

Tensile
without load
radial
load
N
320
320
460
510
630
910
910
(1350)*
1600
(2100)*
1800
(2350)*

Thrust load (N)

with radial load
at
x0
N
170
170
260
330
480
650
650
(1300)*
1020
(1500)*
1250
(2050)*

xmax.
N
120
120
180
280
430
550
550
(1150)*
890
(1400)*
1120
(1920)*

Tensile
without load
radial
load
N
400
400
570
620
870
1200
1200
(1720)*
1900
(2400)*
2200
(2900)*

120
140
150
220
220
(220)*
350
(350)*
1500
(2100)*

Thrust load (N)

with radial load
at
x0
N

300
340
550
750
750
(1450)*
1150
(1750)*
1350
(2400)*

xmax.
N

210
290
500
650
650
(1300)*
1020
(1650)*
1220
(2200)*

3000 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

1500 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

1000 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

750 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

N
1400

2000
1950

2390
2450
1330 (3700)*
1200 (3600)*
1500 (3800)*
1400 (3650)*
1080
940
940

N
1700
1700

2450
2980
2900
3070
5080 (4200)*
4990 (4000)*
5350 (4900)*
5260 (4900)*
4580
4170
4170

2050
3000
2900

3380
3620
6410 (5000)*
6260 (4800)*
6740 (5500)*
6560 (5450)*
5770
5410
5410

2400

3400
3880
3810
4000
7390 (5550)*
7220 (5350)*
8010 (6500)*
7690 (6250)*
6820
6410
6410

N
1400

2000
1950

1370
1655
2900 (2100)*
2800 (2000)*
3160 (2200)*
3180 (2050)*
2740
2600
2600

The values shown do not assume a cantilever force on the shaft

extension.
The admissible loads are valid for operation at 50 Hz; for 60 Hz,
please inquire.
The calculation of the admissible axial load was based on the
drive with generally available coupling. For suppliers, see the
relevant catalog part, section Accessories.
Please inquire if the load direction alternates.

* The values in brackets for frame sizes 112 to 160 apply to 1MJ6 motors and
frame sizes 280 S to 315 M apply to 1MJ7 motors.

0/72

N
90
90
120
140
150
220
220
(220)*
350
(350)*
1500
(2100)*

750 rpm

Siemens D 81.1 2008

N
1700
1700

2450
1960
1880
2270
6740 (2600)*
6650 (2400)*
7450 (3300)*
7360 (3300)*
6680
6270
6270

2050
3000
2900

2360
2820
8070 (3400)*
7920 (3200)*
8810 (3900)*
8660 (3850)*
7870
7510
7510

without
radial
load
N

680
730
1100
1480
1480
(2000)*
2200
(2800)*
2600
(3300)*

2400

3400
2860
2790
3200
9050 (3950)*
8880 (3750)*
10110 (4900)*
9790 (4650)*
8920
8510
8510

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
1LG4, 1LG6, 1LP4, 1PP4 and 1PP6 motors in vertical type of construction Basic version
For motors
Frame size

Type
1LG4 . . .
1LG6 . . .
1LP4 . . .
1PP4 . . .
1PP6 . . .

3000 rpm
Load
down

Load
up

1500 rpm
Load
down

Load
up

1000 rpm
Load
down

Load
up

750 rpm
Load
down

Load
up

1150

1190
1480
1530
1590

1990
2070
2760
2870
4670
4780
4950
6330
6490
590
690
800

1500
1380
1390

2030
1990
2110
1920
1950
2110
2110
3190
2790
2700
3380
2870
2450
1800
1620

1600
1630
1650

2100
2120
2690
2770
2840
3740
3960
8200
8340
8570
10200
10500
11000
11400
12000

1650
1640
2420
2220
2210

2260
2240
2740
2740
4510
4210
4170
4760
4200
3680
3100
2690

2000
2030
2550
2610
2680

3300
3430
4350
4520
9290
9450
9600
11500
11800
12300
12800
13400

2020
1880

2610
2600
2830
2620
2610
3070
3070
5510
5200
5160
5860
5420
4800
4410
3820

2250
2280

2970
3060
3710
3770
3880
4920
5160
10300
10400
10600
12600
12900
13400
13900
14300

390

430
330
380
440

970
1050
1960
2070
3100
3210
3380
4760
4920

2260
2140
2150

3180
3140
3130
2940
2970
2910
2910
4760
4360
4270
5380
4870
4450
3800
3620

840
870
890

950
970
1670
1750
1820
2940
3160
6630
6770
7000
8200
8500
9000
9400
10000

2410
2400
3570
3370
3360

3280
3260
3540
3540
6080
5780
5740
6760
6200
5680
5100
4690

1240
1270
1400
1460
1530

2280
2410
3550
3720
7720
7880
8030
9500
9800
10300
10800
11400

2780
2640

3760
3750
3850
3640
3630
3870
3870
7080
6770
6730
7860
7420
6800
6410
5820

1490
1520

1820
1910
2690
2750
2860
4120
4360
8730
8830
9030
10600
10900
11400
11900
12300

Shaft extension downwards

180 M
180 L
200 L

225 S
225 M
250 M
280 S
280 M
315 S
315 M
315 L

. . . . 183
. . . . 186
. . . . 188
. . . . 206
. . . . 207
. . . . 208
. . . . 220
. . . . 223
. . . . 228
. . . . 253
. . . . 258
. . . . 280
. . . . 283
. . . . 288
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

1140

1140
1610
1510
1510

1540
1540
1680
1660
390
100
100
840
530
8830
8410
8170

Shaft extension pointing upwards

180 M
180 L
200 L

225 S
225 M
250 M
280 S
280 M
315 S
315 M
315 L

. . . . 183
. . . . 186
. . . . 188
. . . . 206
. . . . 207
. . . . 208
. . . . 220
. . . . 223
. . . . 228
. . . . 253
. . . . 258
. . . . 280
. . . . 283
. . . . 288
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

1900

1900
2760
2660
2660

2560
2560
2480
2460
1960
1670
1670
2410
2100
10400
9980
9740

Values shown without assuming a cantilever force on the shaft

extension.
The admissible loads apply to operation at 50 Hz; please inquire
about 60 Hz.
The figures for the admissible axial loads have been calculated
assuming that standard coupling types are used for the drive.
For suppliers, see the relevant catalog part, section
Accessories.
Please inquire if the loading direction alternates.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/73

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

1LG4, 1LG6, 1LP4, 1PP4 and 1PP6 motors in horizontal type of construction Basic version
For motors
Frame size

180 M
180 L
200 L

225 S
225 M
250 M
280 S
280 M
315 S
315 M
315 L

Type
1LG4 . . .
1LG6 . . .
1LP4 . . .
1PP4 . . .
1PP6 . . .
. . . . 183
. . . . 186
. . . . 188
. . . . 206
. . . . 207
. . . . 208
. . . . 220
. . . . 223
. . . . 228
. . . . 253
. . . . 258
. . . . 280
. . . . 283
. . . . 288
. . . . 310
. . . . 313
. . . . 316
. . . . 317
. . . . 318

3000 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

1500 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

1000 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

750 rpm
Loading direction
Tension
Thrust

N
1550

1550
2150
2130
2130

2320
2320
2510
2510
1790
1720
1720
2610
2500
2450
2320
2300

N
1950
1890
1900

2670
2630
2950
2910
2910
3150
3140
4970
4860
4850
5520
5320
5230
5050
4950

2220
2220
3090
3030
3020

3360
3350
3750
3750
6180
6110
6100
6830
6520
6370
6110
5950

1460
1460
1940
1880
1870

2330
2320
2950
2950
7750
7680
7670
8830
8520
8370
8110
7950

2470
2460

3410
3410
3820
3760
3760
4180
4170
7170
7090
7080
7940
7850
7520
7350
7080

1710
1700

2260
2250
2790
2740
2730
3380
3370
8740
8660
8650
9940
9850
9520
9350
9080

1000 rpm
Load down

Load up

750 rpm
Load down

Load up

N
790

790
990
970
970

1290
1290
1710
1710
3360
3290
3290
4180
4070
4020
3890
3870

N
1190
1130
1140

1520
1480
1920
1880
1880
2350
2340
6540
6430
6420
7520
7320
7230
7050
6950

1LA8 and 1PQ8 motors in vertical type of construction Basic version

For motors
Frame size

315
355

400

450

Type
1LA8 . . .
1PQ8 . . .
1LL8 . . .
. . . . 315
. . . . 317
. . . . 353
. . . . 355
. . . . 357
. . . . 403
. . . . 405
. . . . 407
. . . . 453
. . . . 455
. . . . 457

Shaft extension facing downwards

3000 rpm
1500 rpm
Load down
Load up
Load down

1900
1440
8480
8180
7530
6780
6330
5930
5330
4730
4130

5240
5680
5570
5860
6500
7260
7700
8100
9650
10250
10840

2790
2280
14550
14200
13400
17640
17040
16340
17720
17020
16270

6930
7420
7900
8240
9030
11160
11750
12440
13020
13720
14460

3060
2390

15690
14540
19500
18750
17900
19950
19050
18000

8600
9230

10650
11780
14160
14910
15750
16250
17140
18180

3850
3190

17840
16690
22260
21510
20660
23040
22140
21090

9390
10030

11650
12780
15330
16070
16910
17550
18440
19480

For 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motors in a horizontal type of construction,

the admissible cantilever forces are specified with regard to the
axial forces, see Page 0/69.
Data is available for 1LL8 motors on request.
Values shown without assuming a cantilever force on the shaft
extension.
The admissible loads apply to operation at 50 Hz; please inquire
about 60 Hz.
The figures for the admissible axial loads have been calculated
assuming that standard coupling types are used for the drive.
For suppliers, see the relevant catalog part, section
Accessories.
Please inquire if the loading direction alternates.

0/74

Load up

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
It can also be ordered separately and retrofitted (please inquire
beforehand), Order No. 1XP8 001-1 or 1XP8 001-2 (see catalog
part 2 Standard motors, Accessories).

Modular technology
Basic versions
The range of potential applications for the 1LA and 1LG motors
can be broadened considerably by mounting the following modules (e.g. the motors can be used as brake motors).
1XP8 001 rotary pulse encoder, frame sizes 71 M to 315 L
Separately driven fan, frame sizes 100 L to 315 L
Brake, frame sizes 63 to 315 L

The 1XP8 001 rotary pulse encoder is suitable for standard applications. The encoder does not have insulated bearings; therefore, it cannot be recommended at the risk of bearing currents in
combination with insulated bearing cartridge NDE, order code
L27, or with insulated bearing cartridge DE. For further encoders, see Special technology from Page 0/85.

The brake must always be mounted in the factory for safety reasons. The rotary pulse encoder and/or the separately driven fan
can also be retrofitted.

All 1LG4 and 1LG6 motors that are listed in the catalog have an
M16 center hole, form DS on the non-drive end (NDE). When a
rotary pulse encoder is mounted, the length of the motor increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions
and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights.

The degree of protection of the motors with modular technology

is IP55. Higher degrees of protection on request.
When a rotary pulse encoder, brake or separately driven fan is
mounted, the length of the motor increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights.

The rotary pulse encoders of Modular technology and Special

technology are fitted as standard with a protective cover made
of plastic. A protective cover made of non-corrosive sheet steel
is available for 1LA5, 1LA6 and 1LA7 motors, see Mechanical
protection for encoders, order code M68, under Mechanical
design and degrees of protection.

1XP8 001 rotary pulse encoder

5.5
36.5

80

58

-0.01

10 -0.02

M8

G_M011_EN_00024

4,3
0.5

46.1

12

Mounting dimensions of 1XP8 001 rotary pulse encoder

1XP8 001 rotary pulse encoder

The rotary pulse encoder can be supplied already mounted in

an HTL version as 1XP8 001-1 with order code H57 or in a TTL
version as 1XP8 001-2 with order code H58. The rotary pulse
encoder can only be mounted on a standard non-drive end
(NDE), i.e. a second shaft extension or protective cover cannot
be supplied.
Technical data of rotary pulse encoders
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs
Pulse offset between the two outputs
Output amplitude
Minimum edge interval
Edge steepness
(without load or cable)
Maximum frequency
Maximum speed
Temperature range
Degree of protection
Admissible radial cantilever force
Admissible axial force
Termination system
Certification
Weight

Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher

than +40 C on request.

1XP8 001-1 (HTL version)

1XP8 001-2 (TTL version)
+10 V to +30 V
5 V 10 %
200 mA
150 mA
max. 100 mA
max. 20 mA
1024
1024
2 square-wave pulses A, B 2 inverted square-wave pulses A, B
Zero pulse and inverted zero pulse
90 20 %
90 20 %
UHigh >2.5 V
UHigh >UB 3.5 V
ULow <3 V
ULow <0.5 V
0.8 s at 160 kHz
0.45 s at 300 kHz
t+, t 200 ns
t+, t 100 ns
160 kHz
9000 rpm
20 to +80 C
IP66
60 N
40 N
12-pin connector (mating connector is supplied)
CSA, UL
0.3 kg

300 kHz
12000 rpm
20 to +100 C
IP66
60 N
40 N
CSA, UL
0.3 kg

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/75

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Separately driven fan
The use of a separately driven fan is recommended to increase
motor utilization at low speeds and to limit noise generation at
speeds significantly higher than the synchronous speed. Both of
these results can only be achieved with converter-fed operation.
Please inquire about traction and vibratory operation.
The separately driven fan can be supplied already fitted, order
code G17.
It can also be ordered separately and retrofitted. For selection
information and order numbers, see catalog part 2 Standard
motors, Accessories. A rating plate listing all the important
data is fitted to the separately driven fan. Order code Y81 and

plain text are required for supply voltages outside the rated voltage ranges for 1LG motors. Please note the direction of rotation
of the separately driven fan (axial-flow fan) when connecting it.
The admissible coolant temperatures for frame sizes 100 to
225 1) are CTmin. 25 C and CTmax. +65 C 2), lower/higher coolant temperatures on request. The admissible coolant temperatures for frame sizes 250 to 315 are CTmin. 20 C and CTmax.
+50 C, lower/higher coolant temperatures on request.
When a separately driven fan is mounted, the length of the motor
increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions
and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights.

Technical data of the separately driven fan (in accordance with tolerance DIN EN 60034-1)
Frame size
Rated voltage range
Frequency
Rated speed
V
Hz
rpm
100
1 AC
230 to 277
50
2790
3 AC
220 to 290
50
2830
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
2830
1 AC
230 to 277
60
3280
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3490
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60
3490
112
1 AC
230 to 277
50
2720
3 AC
220 to 290
50
2770
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
2770
1 AC
230 to 277
60
3000
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3280
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60
3280
132
1 AC
230 to 277
50
2860
3 AC
220 to 290
50
2880
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
2880
1 AC
230 to 277
60
3380
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3470
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60
3470
160 to 225 3)
1 AC
230 to 277
50
2780
3 AC
220 to 290
50
2840
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
2830
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3400
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60
3400
250 M to 280 M
3 AC
200 to 240
50
2720
3 AC
380 to 420 Y
50
2720
3 AC
440 to 480 Y
60
3320
315
3 AC
200 to 240
50
2750
2-pole
3 AC
380 to 420 Y
50
2750
3 AC
440 to 480 Y
60
3365
315
3 AC
200 to 240
50
2720
4, 6, 8-pole
3 AC
380 to 420 Y
50
2720
3 AC
440 to 480 Y
60
3320

1)

Separately driven fans with order numbers 1PP. ... are used for 1LG
motors of frame size 225 and above. The admissible coolant temperatures
are CTmin. 20 C and CTmax. +50 C

2)

The admissible coolant temperature for single phase versions (1AC) for
frame size 160 and above is CTmax. +50 C.

3)

Separately driven fans with order numbers 1PP. ... are used for 1LG
motors of frame size 225 and above. The values for frame sizes 250 M to
280 M are then applicable.

0/76

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Power consumption
kW
0.075
0.086
0.086
0.094
0.093
0.093
0.073
0.085
0.085
0.107
0.094
0.094
0.115
0.138
0.138
0.185
0.148
0.148
0.236
0.220
0.220
0.284
0.284
0.450
0.450
0.520
0.650
0.650
0.750
0.450
0.450
0.520

Rated current
A
0.29
0.27
0.16
0.28
0.27
0.16
0.26
0.27
0.15
0.31
0.28
0.16
0.40
0.45
0.24
0.59
0.41
0.24
0.96
0.76
0.43
0.94
0.56
2.00
1.15
1.05
2.85
1.64
1.60
2.00
1.15
1.05

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Mounting of separately driven fan and rotary pulse encoder with separately driven fan for 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7 and 1LG motors
Version
Frame size
Number of poles
Order No.
Separately driven fan
100
all
2CW2 180-8RF54-1AB0
1)
incl. mounting parts
112
all
2CW2 210-8RF54-1AB1
132
all
2CW2 250-8RF54-1AB2
160
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-1AB3
180
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-1AB4
200
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-1AB5
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-1AB6
225 2)
250
all
1PP9 063-2LA12-Z A11+K50 3)
280
all
1PP9 063-2LA12-Z A11+K50 3)
315
2
1PP9 070-2LA12-Z A11+K50 3)
315
4 to 8
1PP9 063-2LA12-Z A11+K50 3)
Separately driven fan and rotary
100
all
2CW2 180-8RF54-2AB0
pulse encoder
112
all
2CW2 210-8RF54-2AB1
1XP8 001-1 (HTL) 4)
132
all
2CW2 250-8RF54-2AB2
incl. mounting parts 1)
160
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-2AB3
180
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-2AB4
200
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-2AB5
all
2CW2 300-8RF54-2AB6
225 2)

Brakes
Spring-operated disk brakes are used for the brakes with order
code G26. Depending on the selected motor, brake types
2LM8 or KFB are used. In the standard version, the brakes are
supplied for connection to 230 V with rectifier. The supply voltage for brakes is explained under Modular technology Additional versions.

S Gap

For the design of each brake type, the braking time, run-on
revolutions, braking energy per braking procedure as well as the
service life of the brake linings, see Configuration of motors with
brakes.
When a brake is mounted, the length of the motor increases
by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions and
weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights. When a
brake is mounted on a 1LA7 motor, a larger connection box
(GK 127) is used for frame sizes 63 to 90.

Friction surface

Solenoid
assembly

Armature disk

Pressure
springs

Hub

Shaft

2LM8 spring-operated disk brake

Axially shiftable
rotor

This brake is mounted on 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors in the frame

sizes 63 to 225 and on 1LG motors in the frame sizes 180 to 225
as standard.
The 2LM8 brake has IP55 degree of protection.
Please inquire if motors with brakes are to be operated below the
freezing point or in very humid environments (e.g. close to the
sea) with long standstill times.
Design and mode of operation
The brake takes the form of a single-disk brake with two friction
surfaces.
The braking torque is generated by friction when pressure is applied by one or more pressure springs in the de-energized state.
The brake is released electromagnetically.

G_D081_EN_00076

Pressure
springs

Design of the 2LM8 spring-operated disk brake

Rating plate
The motors have a second rating plate on the opposite side
to the motor rating plate. The brake data is indicated on this
second rating plate.

When the motor brakes, the rotor which can be axially shifted on
the hub or the shaft is pressed via the armature disk against the
friction surface by means of the springs. In the braked state,
there is a gap SGap between the armature disk and the solenoid
component. To release the brake, the solenoid is energized with
DC voltage. The resulting magnetic force pulls the armature disk
against the spring force on to the solenoid component. The
spring force is then no longer applied to the rotor which can
rotate freely.
1)

2)

The separately driven fan 2CW2 ... comprises a complete fan unit with
impeller, the separately driven fan 1PP9 ... only comprises the fan motor
without mounting components and impeller.

3)

For replacement purposes only.

4)

Rotary pulse encoder 1XP8001-2 (TTL) on request.

For 1LG motors with separately driven fan with Order No.. 1PP9 0632LA12-Z A11+K50 (weight 4.37 kg).

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/77

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Operating values for spring-operated brakes with standard excitation
For motor Brake type
frame
size

63

2LM8 005-1NA10
2LM8 005-1NA60
2LM8 005-1NA80
71
2LM8 005-2NA10
2LM8 005-2NA60
2LM8 005-2NA80
80
2LM8 010-3NA10
2LM8 010-3NA60
2LM8 010-3NA80
90
2LM8 020-4NA10
2LM8 020-4NA60
2LM8 020-4NA80
100
2LM8 040-5NA10
2LM8 040-5NA60
2LM8 040-5NA80
112
2LM8 060-6NA10
2LM8 060-6NA60
2LM8 060-6NA80
132
2LM8 100-7NA10
2LM8 100-7NA60
2LM8 100-7NA80
160
2LM8 260-8NA10
2LM8 260-8NA60
2LM8 260-8NA80
180
2LM8 315-0NA10
2LM8 315-0NA60
2LM8 315-0NA80
200, 225 2LM8 400-0NA10
2LM8 400-0NA60
2LM8 400-0NA80

Rated
braking
torque at
100 rpm

Rated braking torque in Supply

relation to rated brak- voltage
ing torque at 100 rpm
in % for the following
speeds
1500 3000 Max.
rpm
rpm
speed

Current/power
input 1)

Brake
Brake
applica- release
tion time time
t2 2)

Nm
5

%
87

%
80

%
65

W
20

ms
25

ms
56

87

80

65

20

25

56

0.000013 77

105

16

10

85

78

65

25

26

70

0.000045 75

270

29

20

83

76

66

32

37

90

0.00016

75

740

79

40

81

74

66

40

43

140

0.00036

80

1350

115

60

80

73

65

53

60

210

0.00063

77

1600

215

100

79

72

65

55

50

270

0.0015

77

2450

325

260

75

68

65

100

165

340

0.0073

79

7300

935

315

75

68

65

100

152

410

0.0073

79

5500

470

400

73

68

65

A
0.1
0.11
0.83
0.1
0.11
0.83
0.12
0.14
1.04
0.15
0.17
1.25
0.2
0.22
1.67
0.25
0.28
2.1
0.27
0.31
2.3
0.5
0.47
4.2
0.5
0.56
4.2
0.55
0.61
4.6

Service capability
of the brake
Brake
Noise
Lifetime Air gap
moment level Lp of brake adjustof inertia with rated lining L ment
air gap
required
after
braking
energy
LN
kg m2
dB (A)
Nm 106 Nm 106
0.000013 77
105
16

110

230

390

0.0200

93

9450

1260

V
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24

1)

For 400 V AC and for 24 V DC, the power can deviate by up to +10 % as a
function of the selected supply voltage.

2)

The specified switching times are valid for switching on the DC side with a
rated release travel and with the coil already warm. They are average
values which may vary depending on factors such as the rectifier type and
the release travel. The brake application time for switching on the AC side,
for example, is approximately 6 times longer than for switching on the DC
side.

0/78

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Lifetime of the brake lining

Admissible speeds

The braking energy LN up to when the brake should be adjusted,

depends on various factors. The main influencing factors include the masses to be braked, the operating speed, the switching frequency and therefore the temperature at the frictional surfaces. It is therefore not possible to specify a value for the friction
energy until readjustment that is valid for all operating conditions.

The maximum admissible speeds from which emergency stops

can be made, are listed in the table. These speeds should be
considered as recommended values and must be checked under actual operating conditions.

The specific wear on the friction surfaces (volume of wear per

unit of friction energy) is approximately 0.05 to 2 cm3/kWh when
the brake is used as a service brake.

The maximum admissible friction energy depends on the switching frequency and is shown for the various brakes in the figure
Admissible switching energy as a function of the switching frequency. Increased wear can be expected when the brakes are
used for emergency stops.

2LM8 400
10 5

2LM8 315
2LM8 260
2LM8 100
2LM8 060
2LM8 040
2LM8 020

10

2LM8 010

2LM8 005

10 3

10 2

G_D081_EN_00077b

Admissible switching energy Q adm

10 6

10
1

10

10 2

10 3

10 4

Switching frequency S n

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/79

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

For motor
frame size

Brake type

63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160
180
200, 225

2LM8 005-1NA . .
2LM8 005-2NA . .
2LM8 010-3NA . .
2LM8 020-4NA . .
2LM8 040-5NA . .
2LM8 060-6NA . .
2LM8 100-7NA . .
2LM8 260-8NA . .
2LM8 315-0NA . .
2LM8 400-0NA . .

Admissible speeds
Max. operat- Max. no-load rpm with
ing rpm if
emergency stop function
max. operating energy Horizontal
Vertical
utlised
mounting
mounting
rpm
rpm
rpm
3000
6000
6000
3000
6000
6000
3000
6000
6000
3000
6000
6000
3000
6000
6000
3000
6000
6000
3000
5300
5000
1500
4400
3200
1500
4400
3200
1500
3000
3000

Changing the braking torque

Readjusting the air gap
Reduction
Dim. O1
Min. braking Rated air gap Max. air gap Min. rotor
per notch
torque
SGap Rated
SGap max.
thickness
hmin.

Nm
0.17
0.17
0.35
0.76
1.29
1.66
1.55
5.6
5.6
6.15

mm
7.0
7.0
8.0
7.5
12.5
11.0
13.0
17.0
17.0
21.0

Nm
3.7
3.7
7.0
18.2
21.3
32.8
61.1
157.5
178.4
248.7

mm
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.4
0.5

mm
0.4
0.4
0.45
0.55
0.65
0.75
0.75
1.2
1.0
1.5

mm
4.5
4.5
5.5
7.5
8.0
7.5
8.0
12.0
12.0
15.5

Changing the braking torque

KFB spring-operated brake

The brake is supplied with the braking torque already set. For
2LM8 brakes, the torque can be reduced to the dimension O1 by
unscrewing the adjusting ring with a hook spanner. The braking
torque changes by the values shown in the above table for each
notch of the adjusting ring.

This brake is the standard brake for 1LG motors in frame sizes
250 to 315. For frame sizes 180 to 225, apart from the standard
brake 2LM8, KFB brakes can also be supplied. Special brake
selections are available on request.

Readjusting the air gap

Under normal operating conditions, the brake is practically
maintenance-free. The air gap SGap must only be checked
at regular intervals if the application requires an extremely
large amount of frictional energy and readjusted to the rated
gap SGap Rated at the latest when the maximum air gap SGap max.
is reached.
G_M015_EN_00196

KFB spring-operated brake

The KFB solenoid double-disk spring-operated brake is a safety

brake which brakes the motor if the supply is disconnected
(power failure, emergency stop). The KFB brake, IP65 degree of
protection, is mainly used for electric motors for traversing,
cross-traversing and lifting gear in cranes as well as
for special industrial applications.
Design and mode of operation

h min.

0/80

S Gap
(S Gap rated )
(S Gap max. )

Siemens D 81.1 2008

O1

When the brake current is switched on, an electromagnetic field

develops which overcomes the spring force of the brake. The
corresponding modules, including the motor shaft, can rotate
freely. The brake is released. If the brake current is switched off
or if there is a power failure, the electromagnetic field of the
brake disappears. The mechanical braking energy is transferred
to the motor shaft. The motor is braked.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Rating plate

Axially shiftable
friction plate

Hub
Solenoid

The motors have a rating plate that indicates the brake data on
the opposite side to the motor rating plate.

Shaft

G_D081_EN_00078

Other characteristics of the KFB brake

High IP65 degree of protection
Corrosion-resistant in seawater and in the tropics.
The brake is a dynamic brake, not simply a holding brake. For
this reason there is less wear, especially in the case of emergency stops (commissioning).
High wear reserves repeated stepless air gap readjustment
is possible. This results in extremely long operating times and
low service and operating costs.
The function and wear can be monitored with microswitches
and proximity switches. Microswitch On/Off is standard for LG
motors. Anti-condensation heating is possible as an option.
Fully functional brake for enclosure acceptance test. Visual
inspection of brake is possible during operation.
The brake (air gap) can be adjusted in the factory, for example, and mounted on the motor without further adjustments.
The wear parts can be replaced without great outlay. After the
housing has been opened (three screws), it is easy to replace
the friction plate. It is not necessary to disassemble the entire
brake.

Pressure springs
Armature disk

Friction surface

Overview of brake selection for 1LG motors

Number of poles
NDE bearing
Flange bearing plate for NDE brake
mounting
Max. diameter for 2nd. shaft extension
Brake type
Braking torque
nmax. IM B3
nmax. IM V1
Output at 110 V DC
Current at 230 V AC
(207 V DC coil voltage)
Current at 400 V AC
(180 V DC coil voltage)
Current at 110 V DC
Current at 24 V DC
Application time t2
Release time
Brake moment of inertia
Lifetime of brake lining L
Air gap adjustment required
after braking energy LN

For motor
Frame size
180 1)
2 to 8
6310C3
A300

200 1)
2 to 8
6312C3
A350

225 1)
2 to 8
6313C3
A350

250 2)
2 to 8
6215C3
A400

280 2)
4 to 8
6317C3
A450

315 2)
4 to 8
6319C3
A550

Nm
rpm
rpm
W
A

48k6
KFB 25
250
6000
6000
158
0.77

55m6
KFB 40
400
5500
5500
196
0.91

55m6
KFB 40
400
5500
5500
196
0.91

48m6
KFB 63
630
4700
4700
220
1

65m6
KFB 100
1000
4000
4000
307
1.53

70m6
KFB 160
1600
3600
3600
344
1.64

0.8

1.18

1.18

1.25

1.8

2.1

A
A
ms
ms
Kg m2
Nm 106
Nm 106

1.44
5.21
70
240
0.0048
3600
810

1.78
6.92
80
250
0.0068
3110
935

1.78
9.62
80
250
0.0068
3110
935

2
8.17
110
340
0.0175
4615
1185

2.79
12.2
125
370
0.036
7375
2330

3.13
12.8
180
500
0.050
10945
3485

1)

The standard brake for frame sizes 180 to 225 is the 2LM8 brake.
KFB brake on request.

2)

The standard brake for frame sizes 250 to 315 is the KFB brake.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/81

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Configuration of motors with brakes

In order to calculate the lifetime of the brake lining in terms of

operations Smax., then the lifetime of the brake lining L in Nm
must be divided by the braking energy Qadm:

Braking time
The time it takes the motor to come to a standstill comprises two
components:
a.) The application time of the brake t2
b.) The braking time tBr

TL )

9.55 (T B

tBr

Braking time in s

Total moment of inertia in kgm

nRated Rated speed of the motor with brake in rpm

TB

Rated braking torque in Nm

TL

Average load torque in Nm

(if TL supports braking, TL is positive)

Braking energy per braking operation Qadm

The braking energy per braking operation in Nm comprises the
energy of the moments of inertia to be braked QKin and the energy QL, which must be applied in order to brake against a load
torque.
Qadm = QKin + QL
a.) The energy of the moments of inertia in Nm
2
J n rated

Q Kin =

182.4

nRated Rated speed before braking in rpm

Total moment of inertia in kgm2

b.) The braking energy in Nm against a load torque:

T L n rated t Br

QL =

19.1

TL average load torque in Nm

TL is positive if it acts against the brake
TL is negative if it supports the brake
Run-on revolutions U
The number of run-on revolutions U of the motor with brake can
be calculated as follows:

U=

n rated
60

t2 +

t Br
2

t2 Brake application time in ms

Lifetime of the brake lining L and readjustment of the air gap
The brake lining wears due to friction which increases the air gap
and the release time for the brake at standard excitation.
When the brake lining is worn out, it can be replaced easily.

0/82

Siemens D 81.1 2008

L
Q adm

The interval between adjustments N in can be calculated in

terms of operations by dividing the braking energy LN which the
brake can output until it is necessary to readjust the working air
gap by Qadm:

J n rated

t Br =

S max =

N=

LN
Q adm

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Additional versions
Depending on the selected motor, brake types 2LM8 or KFB are
used.
2LM8 spring-operated disk brake

KFB spring-operated brake

Motor series
This brake is mounted on 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors in the frame sizes 63 to 225
and on 1LG motors in the frame sizes 180 to 225 as standard.

This brake is the standard brake for 1LG motors in frame sizes 250 to 315.

Voltage and frequency

The solenoids and the rectifiers of the brakes are designed for connection to
the following voltages:
1 AC 50 Hz 230 V 10 % or
1 AC 60 Hz 230 V 10 %
When 60 Hz is used, the voltage for the brake must not be increased!
The brake can also be supplied for other voltages:
Brake supply voltage: 24 V DC
Order code C00
Brake supply voltage: 400 V AC
(directly at the terminal strip)
Order code C01
Brake supply voltage: 180 V DC, for operation on MM411 ECOFAST
(directly at the terminal strip)
Order code C02
Order codes C00, C01 and C02 may only be used in conjunction with order
code G26.

The solenoids and the rectifiers of the brakes are designed for connection to
the following voltages:
1 AC 50 Hz 230 V 10 %
When 60 Hz is used, the voltage for the brake must not be increased!
The brake can also be supplied for other voltages:
Brake supply voltage: 24 V DC
Order code C00
Brake supply voltage: 400 V AC
(directly at the terminal strip)
Order code C01

The codes C00 and C01 may only be used in conjunction with Code G26.

Connections
Labeled terminals are provided in the main connection box of the motor to
connect the brake.
The AC voltage for the brake excitation winding is connected to the two free
terminals of the rectifier block (~).
The brake can be released when the motor is at a standstill by separately
exciting the solenoid. In this case, an AC voltage must be connected at the
rectifier block terminals. The brake remains released as long as this voltage is
present.
The rectifier is protected against overvoltages by varistors in the input and
output circuits.
For 24 V DC brakes, the brake terminals are directly connected to the DC
voltage source.
See the circuit diagrams below.

The motors are equipped with an additional connection box on the side of
the main connection box that is used specifically for connection of the brake.
KFB brakes are connected through a standard bridge or half-wave rectifier.
See the circuit diagrams below.
A special circuit is not required. Optimal switching times are achieved without the need to use special circuits.

Fast brake application

If the brake is disconnected from the line supply, the brake is applied. The
application time for the brake disk is delayed as a result of the inductance of
the solenoid (shutdown on the AC side). This results in a considerable delay
before the brake is mechanically applied. In order to achieve short brake
application times, the circuit must be interrupted on the DC side. To realize
this, the wire jumpers, located between contacts 1+ and 2+ at the rectifier are
removed and replaced by the contact of an external switch (see circuit diagrams below).
For 1LG motors with a 2LM8 brake, Fast application of the brake is not possible in the standard version. Please contact your local Siemens office for
advice.

Not available for the KFB brake.

Manual brake release with lever

The brakes can be supplied with a mechanical manual release with lever.
Order code K82.
The dimensions of the brake lever depend on the motor frame size and can
be read from the dimension drawing generator for motors in the
SD configurator tool for low-voltage motors.

The brake can be released manually with screws as standard. Mechanical

manual release with a lever can be ordered with
Order code K82.
The dimensions of the brake lever depend on the motor frame size and can
be read from the dimension drawing generator for motors in the
SD configurator tool for low-voltage motors.

Bridge rectifier / half-wave rectifier

Brakes are connected through a standard bridge or half-wave
rectifier or directly to the 2LM8 or KFB brake. See the circuit
diagrams below.
D1

V1

1+

D2

2+

1+
2+

D1

2+

2+

D2
V2

V2
D3

D4

_
G_D081_XX_00086

_
G_D081_XX_00085

V1

Half-wave rectifier 400 V AC

Bridge rectifier, 230 V AC

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/83

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

G_D081_XX_00087

General technical data

L+ L-

Brake connection for 24 V DC

Combinations of basic versions

The following combinations of modular technology can be supplied by the factory when ordered using the predefined order
codes:
Mounting of brake 1) and 1XP8 001 rotary pulse encoder
The brake (order code G26) and the rotary pulse encoder
1XP8 001-1 HTL (order code H57) can be supplied already
mounted in combination.
Order code H62.
The brake (order code G26) and the rotary pulse encoder
1XP8 001-2 TTL (order code H58) can be supplied already
mounted in combination.
Order code H98.
Mounting of separately driven fan and 1XP8 001 rotary pulse
encoder
The separately driven fan (order code G17) and the rotary pulse
encoder 1XP8 001-1 HTL (order code H57) can be supplied
already mounted in combination.
Order code H61.
The separately driven fan (order code G17) and the rotary pulse
encoder 1XP8 001-2 TTL (order code H58) can be supplied
already mounted in combination.
Order code H97.
Mounting of brake 1) and separately driven fan
The brake (order code G26) and separately driven fan (order
code G17) can be supplied already mounted in combination.
Order code H63.
Mounting of brake,1) separately driven fan and 1XP8 001 rotary
pulse encoder
The brake (order code G26), the separately driven fan (order
code G17) and the rotary pulse encoder 1XP8 001-1 HTL (order
code H57) can be supplied already mounted in combination.
Order code H64.
The brake (order code G26), the separately driven fan (order
code G17) and the rotary pulse encoder 1XP8 001-2 TTL (order
code H58) can be supplied already mounted in combination.
Order code H99.
When a rotary pulse encoder, brake or separately driven fan is
mounted, the length of the motor increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights.

1)

The spring-operated brake 2LM8 (see from Page 0/77) is mounted as

standard on 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors in the frame sizes 63 to 225 and on
1LG motors in frame sizes 180 to 225.
For 1LG motors in the frame sizes 250 to 315 the spring-operated brake
KFB is the standard brake (see from Page 0/80).

0/84

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data

For motors

Brake size

1LA8, 1PQ8
31 .
35 .

NFA
160/250
160/250
250/400
250/400
400/630
400/630
630/1000

40 .
45 .

Holding brake torque

TH
Nm
2500
2500
4000
4000
6300
6300
10000

Manufacturer:
Leine and Linde (Germany) GmbH
Bahnhofstrae 36
73430 Aalen
Tel. +49 (0)73 61-78093-0
Fax +49 (0)73 61-78093-11
http://www.leinelinde.com
e-mail: info@leinelinde.se
24.5

69.5

For motor series 1LA8 and 1PQ8, a solenoid double-disk springoperated brake of type NFA (from Stromag) can be supplied at
the drive end (DE). The brake can only be used as a holding
brake. See the table below for values for the holding brake
torque.
Order code H47, price on request

100

Brake (specially for 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motor series)

The version of the rotary pulse encoder with a diagnostics system (ADS) can be supplied by Leine and Linde.

G_M015_EN_00212

Converter mounting is possible for motor series 1LA7 frame

sizes 56 to 132 for 230 V/400 VY if the MICROMASTER DA 51.3
type is specified. Not possible for motors with special insulation
for 690 V.
Order code H15

G7

Prepared for mounting MICROMASTER Integrated (MMI)

The LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder can be retrofitted. The
motor must be prepared for this. When the motor is ordered, order code H78 must be specified. The rotary pulse encoder is not
part of the scope of supply in this case. The mounting components required will be supplied. For motors in Zone 2 (Ex n), a
special rotary pulse encoder can be supplied (please inquire).

16

Special technology

When a brake is mounted, the length of the motor increases by

I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions and weights,
see Technology, Dimensions and weights.
The brake is generally procured and mounted by the factory.

Mounting dimensions of LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder

Further information is available on request.

Technical data for LL 861 900 220 (HTL version)

The Special technology comprises rotary pulse encoders for

frame sizes 100 L to 450 of 1LA5, 1LA6, 1LA7, 1LA8 and 1LG4/6
motors. Please inquire about the specified rotary pulse encoders
for 1LA9 motors.
The order codes listed under Special technology cannot be
combined in the case of 1LA motors with order codes from the
modular technology range.
For 1LG motors, order codes G17 (mounting of separately
driven fan), G26 (mounting of brake) and H63 (mounting of
brake and separately driven fan) from the modular technology
range can be combined with the Special technology rotary
pulse encoders.
When a rotary pulse encoder is mounted, the length of the motor
increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions
and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights.

Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher

than +40 C on request.

LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder

67

Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

Pulse offset between the two

outputs
Output amplitude
Mark space ratio
Edge steepness
Maximum frequency
Admissible speed
Temperature range
Degree of protection
Admissible radial cantilever force
Admissible axial force
Termination system
Weight

9 V to +30 V
max. 80 mA
40 mA
1024
6 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, A', B, B', 0, 0',
High Current HTL
90 25 el.
UHigh > UB 4 V
ULow <2.5 V
1:1 10 %
50 V/s (without load)
100 kHz for 350 m cable
4000 rpm
20 to +80 C
IP65
300 N
100 N
Terminal strips in encoder, cable
connection M20 x 1.5 radial
Approx. 1.3 kg

Mounting a special type of rotary pulse encoder

With its rugged construction, this rotary pulse encoder is also

suitable for difficult operating environments. It is resistant to
shock and vibration and has insulated bearings.

For motor series 1LA8, 1PQ8 and 1LL8, if the encoder designation is specified in the order, a special type of rotary pulse encoder can be supplied already mounted, provided the technical
executability is given. In this case, the encoder is procured by
the factory. When ordering, specify the rotary pulse encoder in
plain text.
Order code Y70. Price and availability on request.

The LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder can be supplied

already mounted.
Order code H70.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/85

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Technical data for HOG 9 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder
(HTL version)

HOG9 D 1024 l rotary pulse encoder

Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher

than +40 C on request.
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

The encoder is fitted with insulated bearings.

The HOG 9 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder can be supplied
already mounted.
Order code H72.
The HOG 9 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder can be retrofitted.
The motor must be prepared for this. When the motor is ordered,
order code H79 must be specified. The rotary pulse encoder
is not part of the scope of supply in this case. The mounting
components required will be supplied.
Manufacturer:
Baumer Hbner GmbH
Planufer 92b
10967 Berlin
Tel. +49 (0)30-6 90 03-0
Fax +49 (0)30-6 90 03-1 04
http://www.baumerhuebner.com
e-mail: info@baumerhuebner.com
~67

104.5

88

16 H7

General technical data

G_M015_EN_00213

HOG 9 D 1024 l rotary pulse encoder

0/86

Siemens D 81.1 2008

+9 V to +30 V
50 to 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA (peak)
1024
4 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A', B'
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
30 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP56
Admissible radial cantilever force
300 N
Admissible axial force
200 N
Termination system
Radial plug (mating connector is part
of the scope of supply)
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
73 522 E
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 0.7 kg

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
HOG 10 D rotary pulse encoder

HOG 10 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder

The rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 D 1024 I can be supplied
already mounted.
Order code H73
The rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 D 1024 I can also be retrofitted to a motor prepared for this. When the motor is ordered, order code H80 must be specified. The rotary pulse encoder is not
part of the scope of supply in this case. The mounting components required will be supplied.
Technical data for HOG 10 D 1024 I (HTL version)
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

This encoder is extremely rugged and is therefore suitable for

difficult operating conditions. It is fitted with insulated bearings.
The HOG 10 D rotary pulse encoder can be supplied already
mounted in different versions. The manufacturer is the same;
only the technical data and the respective dimensions and
weights change.
Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher
than +40 C on request.
Manufacturer:
Baumer Hbner GmbH
Planufer 92b
10967 Berlin
Tel. +49 (0)30-6 90 03-0
Fax +49 (0)30-6 90 03-1 04
http://www.baumerhuebner.com
e-mail: info@baumerhuebner.com

Rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I,

connection box protection against moisture
The rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I can be supplied
with the already mounted connection box in version with protection against moisture (IP56).
Order code J15
105

16 H7

G_D081_EN_00211

94 (2)
112 (1)
148.5 (3)
151.5 (4)

(1) Standard Order code H73

(2) With connection boxes Order codes J15, J16
(3) With mechanical centrifugal switch (FSL) Order codes Y74, Y76
(4) With electronical speed switch (ESL) Order code Y79

HOG 10 D 1024 rotary pulse encoder

+9 V to +30 V
Approx. 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA (peak)
1024
4 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A', B'
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
40 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP66
Admissible radial cantilever force
400 N
Admissible axial force
250 N
Termination system
Terminals, cable connection
M20 x 1.5
Mech. design acc. to Hbner Ident. 74 055 E
No.
Weight
Approx. 1.6 kg

Technical data HOG 10 DN 1024 l (HTL version),

connection box protection against moisture
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

+9 V to +30 V
Approx. 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA peak
1024
6 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A', B', N, N'
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
40 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP66
Max. admissible radial cantilever
400 N
force
Max. admissible axial force
250 N
Termination system
Terminals, cable connection
M20 x 1.5
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
74 007E-HOG10
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 1.6 kg

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/87

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I,
connection box protection against dust

Rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I + FSL,

(speed rpm), connection box protection against moisture

The rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I can be supplied

with the already mounted connection box in version with protection against dust (IP65).
Order code J16

The rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I can be supplied

with the already mounted connection box in version with protection against moisture (IP56) and mechanical centrifugal switch
(FSL).
An operating speed of the centrifugal switch within the admissible range must be specified in plain text, see technical data of
the rotary pulse encoder.
Order code Y74

Technical data HOG 10 DN 1024 I (HTL version),

connection box protection against dust
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

+9 V to +30 V
Approx. 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA peak
1024
6 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A', B', N, N'
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
40 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP66
Max. admissible radial cantilever
400 N
force
Max. admissible axial force
250 N
Termination system
Terminals, cable connection
M20 x 1.5
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
74 006E-HOG10
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 1.6 kg

0/88

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Technical data HOG 10 DN 1024 I (HTL version) + FSL,

(speed .... rpm), connection box protection against moisture
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

+9 V to +30 V
Approx. 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA peak
1024
6 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A', B', N, N'
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
40 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP66
Max. admissible radial cantilever
400 N
force
Max. admissible axial force
250 N
Centrifugal switch
Operating speed
850 ... 4900 rpm
Maximum speed
1.25 x n
Differential gap, clockwise/counter 3%
clockwise
Speed hysteresis
40 %
Switching capacity
6 A/230 V AC; 1 A 125 V DC
Termination system
Terminals, cable connection
M20 x 1.5 + M20 x 1.5
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
74 035F-HOG10
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 2.1 kg

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I +FSL,
connection box protection against dust

Rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I + ESL 93,

(speed rpm), connection box protection against dust

The rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I can be supplied

with the already mounted connection box in version with protection against dust (IP65) and mechanical centrifugal switch (FSL).
An operating speed of the centrifugal switch within the admissible range must be specified in plain text, see technical data of
the rotary pulse encoder.
Order code Y76

The rotary pulse encoder HOG 10 DN 1024 I can be supplied

with the already mounted connection box in version with protection against dust (IP65) and electronical speed switch (ESL).
One up to three operating speeds of the electronical switch
within the admissible range must be specified in plain text, see
technical data of the rotary pulse encoder.
Order code Y79

Technical data HOG 10 DN 1024 I (HTL version +) + FSL,

(speed . rpm), connection box protection against dust

Technical data HOG 10 DN 1024 I (HTL version) + ESL 93,

(speed . rpm), connection box protection against dust

Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

+9 V to +30 V
Approx. 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA peak
1024
6 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A', B', N, N'
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
40 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP66
Max. admissible radial cantilever
400 N
force
Max. admissible axial force
250 N
Centrifugal switch
Operating speed
850 ... 4900 rpm
Maximum speed
1.25 x n
Differential gap, clockwise/counter 3%
clockwise
Speed hysteresis
40 %
Switching capacity
6 A/230 V AC; 1 A 125 V DC
Termination system
Terminals, cable connection
M20 x 1.5 + M20 x 1.5
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
74 022F-HOG10
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 2.1 kg

+9 V to +30 V
Approx. 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA peak
1024
6 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A', B', N, N'
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
40 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP66
Max. admissible radial cantilever
400 N
force
Max. admissible axial force
250 N
Electronical switch
Operating speed
3 x 200 ... 5000 rpm
Maximum speed
6000 rpm
Switching accuracy
(2-4) %
Switching capacity
3 x 49 mADC
With relay module
3 x 6 A/230 V AC; 1 A 125 V DC
(external relay module required!)
Differential gap, clockwise/
3%
counter-clockwise
Speed hysteresis
max. 30 %
Principle
Electronics
Auxiliary power
12 V/5 mA
Termination system
Terminals, cable connection
M20 x 1.5 + M20 x 1.5
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
74 031E-HOG10
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 2.9 kg

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/89

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
Dimensions and weight

Rotary pulse encoders (on cover)

Order codes H57, H58, H70, H72, H73,
(H78), (H79), (H80), J15, J16, Y74, Y76, Y79

Fig. 4

Brake and rotary pulse encoder (on cover) 1XP8 001

Order codes H62, H98
[optionally with manual release, order code K82]

G_D018_XX_00091

Fig. 3

Brake for 1LA8 and 1PQ8 motor series at drive end (DE)
Order code H47

G_D018_XX_00088

Fig. 2

G_D018_XX_00089

Brake
Order code G26
[optionally with manual release, order code K82]

G_D018_XX_00090

Fig. 1

311

General technical data

G_D018_XX_00100

0/90

Siemens D 81.1 2008

For motor series 1LA5 frame sizes 180 to 225 with separately driven fan,
the fan attachment becomes narrower on the non-drive end (NDE) of the motor housing.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data

Fig. 5

1LA frame sizes 100 to 225,

1LG frame sizes 180 and 200
Separately driven fan
Order code G17

1LG frame size 225 and above

Rotary pulse encoder (under cover) 1XP8 001 and separately driven fan
Order codes H61, H97

G_D018_XX_00097

G_D018_XX_00096

Brake, rotary pulse encoder (under cover) 1XP8 001 and separately driven fan
Order codes H64, H99
[optionally with manual release (K82)]

G_D018_XX_00098

Fig. 8

G_D018_XX_00099

Fig. 7

G_D018_XX_00095

Brake and separately driven fan

Order code H63
[optionally with manual release K82]

G_D018_XX_00094

Fig. 6

G_D018_XX_00093

G_D018_XX_00092

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/91

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ

General technical data

Assignment
Fig. 1
Frame size Brake

Order code
G26
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Fig. 2
Brake

Fig. 3
Pulse encoder

1XP8 001

LL 861
900220

HOG9 D
1024 I

HOG10 D
1024 I

Order code
H47
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Order code
H57, H58
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Order codes
H70
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Order codes
H72
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Order codes
J15, J16
Y74, Y76
Y79
H73
l
Weight l
Weight l
Weight l
approx.
approx.
approx.
mm
kg
mm
kg
mm
kg
mm

Weight
approx.
kg

1LA7, 1LA5
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160
180
200
225

51
51
54
75
78
87
106
129
137
142
142

1
1
2
4
6
8
12
26
27
41
41

78
78
78
78
78
78
78

0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

91
91
91
91
91
91
91

1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3

89
89
89
89
89
89
89

0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9

134
134
134
134
134
134
134

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

78
78
78
78

0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

91
91
91
91

1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3

89
89
89
89

0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9

134
134
134
134

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

116
116
116
116

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

22
32
63
83
118
255

63
63
63
63
63
63

0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

86
86
86
86
86
86

1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3

72
72
72
72
72
72

0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9

116
116
116
116
116
116

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

98
98
98
98
98
98

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

153
153
153
153
153
153

2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1

156
156
156
156
156
156

2.9
2.9
2.9
2.9
2.9
2.9

205
225
251
270

120
165
220
325

125
125
125
125

1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3

125
125
125
125

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

125
125
125
125

1.3
1.3
1.3
1.3

125
125
125
125

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

1LA6
100
112
132
160

1LG4, 1LG6
180
200
225
250
280
315

125
137
239
225
227
265

1LA8, 1PQ8
315
355
400
450

1LL8
315
355
400
450

0/92

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LA, 1LG, 1LL, 1LP, 1MA, 1MJ, 1PP, 1PQ
General technical data
Assignment
Fig. 4
Frame size Brake and
rotary pulse encoder
(on cowl)
1XP8 001
Order codes
H62, H98
l
Weight,
approx.
mm
kg

Fig. 5
Separately driven fan 1)

Order code
G17
l
M
mm

mm

Weight,
approx.
kg

Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Brake and
Rotary pulse encoder
1)
separately driven fan
(under the cowl)
1XP8 001 and
separately driven fan 1)
Order code
Order codes
H63
H61, H97
l
Weight,
l
Weight,
approx.
approx.
mm
kg
kg
kg

Fig. 8
Brake, rotary pulse
encoder (under the
cowl) 1XP8 001 and
separately driven fan 1)
Order codes
H64, H99
l
Weight,
approx.
mm

Diameter
of the fan
cowl

mm

1LA7, 1LA5
63
71
80
90
100
112
132
160
180
200
225

156
165
184
207
215
220
220

6.3
8.3
12.3
26.3
27.3
41.3
41.3

141
158
177
227
269
272
272

30
30
40
40
40
40
40

4.0
4.5
5.5
7.0
10.0
11.0
11.0

141
158
177
227
269
272
272

10.0
12.5
17.5
33.0
37.0
52.0
52.0

226
226
247
289
269
272
272

4.3
4.8
5.8
7.3
10.3
11.3
11.3

226
226
247
289
269
272
272

10.3
12.8
17.8
33.3
37.3
52.3
52.3

202
227
226
320
311 (358)
311 (398)
311 (398)

141
158
177
227

30
30
40
40

4.0
4.5
5.5
7.0

226
226
247
289

4.3
4.8
5.8
7.3

202
227
226
320

22.3
32.3
63.3
83.3
118.3
255.3

269
272
235
235
235
247

40
40
0
0
0
0

10.0
11.0
22.0
25.0
28.0
36.0

269
272
576
578
550
577

32
43
85
108
146
291

269
272
425
425
425
437

10.3
11.3
22.3
25.3
28.3
36.3

269
272
576
578
550
577

32.3
43.3
85.3
108.3
146.3
291.3

356
396
439
489
539
604

1LA6
100
112
132
160

1LG4, 1LG6
180
200
225
250
280
315

203
215
317
303
305
343

The values in brackets ( ) refer to the diameter of the motor

flange because this is larger than the diameter of the fan cowl
(see figure on Page 0/90).

1)

For frame sizes 100 to 200 and for 1LA5 up to frame size 225, the dimensions of the connection box for the separately driven fan, length x width x
height, are 95 mm x 105 mm x 54 mm. For motor series 1LG4/1LG6 (frame
sizes 225 to 315), the dimensions of the connection box for the separately
driven fan, length x width x height, are 75 mm x 75 mm x 38 mm.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/93

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1, 1PC1

Order No. code

Overview
The order number consists of a combination of figures and letters and is divided into three blocks linked with hyphens for a
better overview, e.g.
1LE1001-1DB20-1AA5-Z
H00

For deviations in the second and third block from the catalog
codes, either -Z or 9 should be used as appropriate.
Ordering data:
Complete Order No. and order code(s) or plain text.
If a quotation has been requested, please specify the quotation number in addition to the Order No.
When ordering a complete motor as a spare part, please
specify the works serial No. for the previously supplied motor
as well as the Order No.

The first block (Positions 1 to 7) identifies the motor type; the

second block (Positions 8 to 12) defines the motor frame size
and length, the number of poles and in some cases the
frequency/output; and in the third block (Positions 13 to 16), the
frequency/output, type of construction and other design features
are encoded.
Structure of the Order No.:

Position:

A
...
D

10 11 12 -

13 14 15 16

IEC squirrel-cage motors, surface-cooled

Positions 1 to 4:
New generation
1 L E 1
Digit, letter, letter, digit Design or version (motor type)
Standard:
Self-ventilated by fan mounted on and driven
by rotor
Expansion option (F90):
Forced-air cooled by air flow from the fan to be
driven
Special: Self-cooled without external fan and 1 P C 1
fan cover
Positions 5 to 7:
Motors with high efficiency
0 0
(High Efficiency, EFF1), aluminum housing
3 digits
Motors with improved efficiency
0 0
(Improved Efficiency, EFF2), aluminum housing
Positions 8, 9 and 11: Motor frame size
(frame size as a combination of shaft height and overall length, encoded)
Digit, letter, digit
Position 10:
Letter

Number of poles
A ... D = 2-, 4-, 6-, 8-pole

Positions 12 and 13:

2 digits

Voltage, circuit and frequency

Position 14:
Letter

Type of construction
(A V)

Position 15:
Letter

Motor protection
(A Z; special versions encoded)

Position 16:
Digit

Mechanical design (motor version and connection box position)

General Line motors with shorter delivery times, limited options
(connection box on top, cast feet, only basic versions possible,
non-drive-end (NDE) cannot be modified)
All options are possible or can be modified
- Connection box on top
- Connection box on RHS (viewed from DE)
- Connection box on LHS (viewed from DE)
- Connection box below
Special order versions:
encoded additional order code required
not encoded additional plain text required

1
2
0
...
6
A
...
D
0
...
9

A
...
V
A
...
Z
0

4
5
6
7
- Z

Ordering example
Selection criteria
Motor type

Motor frame size/No. of poles/speed

Rated output
Voltage and frequency
Type of construction
(Special versions)

Mechanical design
(motor version)

1)

Requirement
New generation
Standard motor with high efficiency EFF1,
IP55 degree of protection, aluminum version
160/4-pole/1500 rpm
11 kW
230 V/400 VY, 50 Hz
IM V5 with protective cover 1)
3 PTC thermistors
(motor protection with 3 embedded temperature
sensors for tripping 2)
Connection box on RHS
(viewed from DE)
Mounted separately driven fan

Standard without protective cover the protective cover is defined with

option H00 and this option must be ordered in addition.

0/94

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0
...
8

2)

Structure of the Order No.

1LE1001-

1LE1001-1DB2 1LE1001-1DB22-2
1LE1001-1DB22-2C
-Z
H00
1LE1001-1DB22-2CB -Z
H00
1LE1001-1DB22-2CB5-Z
H00
1LE1001-1DB22-2CB5-Z
H00 F70

No additional option must be specified in the order.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1, 1PC1
Special versions

Overview
The order codes and availability are assigned to the individual
motor series in the Selection and ordering data in catalog part 1.
For
Voltages
Types of constructions
Motor protection
Motor connection and connection box

Attention:
For 1LE1 and 1PC1 motors apply only the Special versions of
the following table and of catalog part 1. Motor protection and
motor connection or connection box can be defined as Order
No. supplement with the positions 15 or 16 of the Order No.

see the relevant heading in section General technical data in

this catalog part.
All available options are listed according to topics in the following table. An alphanumerical listing according to order codes can be
found in the appendix under Overview of order codes.
Order code

Special versions

For further information,

see Page

Motor connection and connection box

R15
R10
R11
R12
R50
R30
H04
R20
R21
R22
R23
R24
H08

New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!

One cable gland, metal

Rotation of the connection box through 90, entry from DE
Rotation of the connection box through 90, entry from NDE
Rotation of the connection box through 180
Larger connection box
Reduction piece for M cable gland in accordance with British standard, both cable entries mounted
External earthing
3 cables protruding, 0.5 m long
3 cables protruding, 1.5 m long
6 cables protruding, 0.5 m long
6 cables protruding, 1.5 m long
6 cables protruding, 3 m long
Connection box on NDE

0/114
0/114
0/114
0/114
0/113
0/114
0/113
0/114
0/114
0/114
0/114
0/114
0/113

Windings and insulation

N01
N02
N03
N11
N20
N05
N06
N07
N08
N21
Y52

New!
New!

New!

Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), with service factor (SF)
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), with increased output
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), with increased coolant temperature
Temperature class 180 (H) at rated power and max. CT 60 C
Increased air humidity/temperature with 30 to 60 g water per m3 of air
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 45 C, derating approx. 4 %
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 50 C, derating approx. 8 %
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 55 C, derating approx. 13 %
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 130 (B), coolant temperature 60 C, derating approx. 18 %
Increased air humidity/temperature with 60 to 100 g water per m3 of air
Temperature class 155 (F), used acc. to 155 (F), other requirements

0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108
0/108

Colors and paint finish

Y54
Y51
S03
S00
S01

New!

Special finish in other standard RAL colors

Special finish in special RAL colors
Special finish sea air resistant
Unpainted (only cast iron parts primed)
Unpainted, only primed

0/101
0/101
0/100
0/100
0/100

Modular technology Basic versions

F70
F01
G01
G02

Mounting of separately driven fan

Mounting of brake
Mounting of 1XP8012-10 (HTL) rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of 1XP8012-20 (TTL) rotary pulse encoder

0/129
0/130 ...
0/128
0/128

Modular technology Additional versions

F10
F11
F12
F50

Brake supply voltage 24 V DC

Brake supply voltage 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Brake supply voltage 400 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Mechanical manual brake release with lever (no locking)

0/133
0/133
0/133
0/133

Special technology
G04
G05
G06

Mounting of LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder

Mounting of HOG 9 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder
Mounting of HOG 10 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder

0/134
0/135
0/136

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/95

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1, 1PC1

Special versions
Overview Special versions (Fortsetzung)
Order code

Special versions

For further information,

see Page

Mechanical design and degrees of protection

H00
H01
H23
F77
F78
H20
H22
H02
H03
H07
G40
G41
G42
G43

New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!
New!

Protective cover for types of construction

Screwed-on feet (instead of cast)
Radial seal on DE for flange-mounting motors with oil resistance to 0.1 bar
Low-noise version for 2-pole motors with clockwise direction of rotation
Low-noise version for 2-pole motors with counter-clockwise direction of rotation
IP65 degree of protection
IP56 degree of protection (non-heavy-sea)
Vibration-proof version
Condensation drainage holes
Non-rusting screws (externally)
Prepared for mountings, only center hole
Prepared for mountings with D12 shaft
Prepared for mountings with D16 shaft
Protective cover for encoder (loosely enclosed only for mountings acc. to order codes G40, G41 and G42)

0/119
0/113
0/118
0/119
0/119
0/119
0/119
0/119
0/119
0/119
0/118
0/118
0/118
0/118

Coolant temperature and site altitude

D03
D04

New!
New!

Coolant temperature 40 C to +40 C

Coolant temperature 30 C to +40 C

New!
New!
New!
New!

Electrical according to NEMA MG1-12

Design according to UL with Recognition Mark
Canadian regulations (CSA)
PSE Mark Japan

0/107
0/107

Designs in accordance with standards and specifications

D30
D31
D40
D46

0/99
0/99
0/98, 0/99
0/99

Bearings and lubrication

Measuring nipple for SPM shock pulse measurement for bearing inspection
Bearing design for increased cantilever forces
Special bearing for DE and NDE, bearing size 63
Regreasing device
Located bearing at DE
Located bearing at NDE

Q01
L22
L25
L23
L20
L21

0/122
0/122, 0/124 ...
0/122, 0/124 ...
0/122
0/122
0/122

Balance and vibration quantity

Vibration quantity level B
Full-key balancing
Balancing without fitted key

L00
L02
L01

0/120
0/120
0/120

Shaft and rotor

L08
L05
L04
L07
L06
Y55

New!
New!

Concentricity of shaft extension, coaxiality and linear movement in accordance with DIN 42955
Tolerance R for flange-mounting motors
Second standard shaft extension
Shaft extension with standard dimensions, without featherkey way
Concentricity of shaft extension in accordance with DIN 42955 Tolerance R
Standard shaft made of non-rusting steel
Non-standard cylindrical shaft extension

0/121
0/121
0/121
0/121
0/121
0/121

Heating and ventilation

F75
F76
Q02
Q03
F74

New!
New!

Fan cover for textile industry

Metal external fan
Anti-condensation heaters for 230 V
Anti-condensation heaters for 115 V
Sheet metal fan cover

0/111
0/111
0/111
0/111
0/111

Rating plate and extra rating plates

Second rating plate, loose
Nirosta rating plate
Extra rating plate or rating plate with deviating rating plate data
Extra rating plate with identification codes
Additional information on rating plate and on package label (max. of 20 characters)

M10
M11
Y80
Y82
Y84

0/106
0/106
0/106
0/106
0/106

Packaging, safety notes, documentation and test certificates

B00
B01
B02
B04
B83
B99
M01
M02

New!

0/96

Without safety and commissioning note. Customer's declaration of renouncement required.

With one safety and start-up guide per box pallet
Acceptance test certificate 3.1 in accordance with EN 10204
Printed operating instructions English/German enclosed
Type test with heat run for horizontal motors, with acceptance
Wire-lattice pallet
Connected in star for dispatch
Connected in delta for dispatch

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/102
0/102
0/102
0/102
0/102
0/102
0/102
0/102

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data

Overview
Cut-away diagram of a low-voltage motor

$ Motor protection Page 0/110

Motor connection and connection box Page 0/113
Voltages, currents and frequencies Page 0/103

% Windings and insulation Page 0/108

Coolant temperature and site altitude Page 0/107

& Heating and ventilation Page 0/111

Mechanical design and degrees of protection Page 0/118
Modular technology Page 0/127
Special technology Page 0/134

( Bearings and lubrication Page 0/122

) Shaft and rotor Page 0/121
Balance and vibration quantity Page 0/120

* Colors and paint finish Page 0/100

+ Types of construction Page 0/116
, Rating plates and extra rating plates Page 0/106

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/97

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Designs in accordance with standards and specifications
Applicable standards and specifications
The motors comply with the appropriate standards and regulations, especially those listed in the table below.
Title
General specifications for rotating
electrical machines
Specification of the losses and efficiency of rotating electrical machines
Asynchronous AC motors for general
use with standardized dimensions
and outputs
Restart characteristics for rotating
electrical machines
Terminal designations and direction
of rotation for electrical machines
Designation for type of construction,
installation and connection box
position
Entry to connection box
Built-in thermal protection
Noise limit values for rotating electrical machines
IEC standard voltages
Cooling methods for rotating electrical machines
Vibration severity of rotating electrical
machines
Vibration limits
Degrees of protection of rotating
electrical machines

IEC/EN
IEC 60034-1,
IEC 60085
IEC 60034-2

DIN EN
DIN EN 60034-1

IEC 60072
mounting
dimensions only
IEC 60034-12

DIN EN 50347

DIN EN 60034-12

IEC 60034-8

DIN EN 60034-8

IEC 60034-7

DIN EN 60034-7

DIN EN 60034-2

IEC 60034-11
IEC 60034-9

DIN 42925
DIN EN 60034-11
DIN EN 60034-9

IEC 60038
IEC 60034-6

DIN IEC 60038

DIN EN 60034-6

IEC 60034-14

DIN EN 60034-14

IEC 60034-5

DIN ISO 10816

DIN EN 60034-5

National standards
The motors comply with the IEC or European standards listed
above. The European standards replace the national standards
in the following EU member states: Germany (VDE), France
(NF C), Belgium (NBNC), Great Britain (BS), Italy (CEI),
Netherlands (NEN), Sweden (SS), Switzerland (SEV) etc.
The motors also comply with various national standards. The following standards have been harmonized with IEC publication
60034-1 or replaced with DIN EN 60034-1 so that the motors can
be operated at standard rated output.
Title
CSAC22.2, No. 100

Country
Canada

IS 325
IS 4722
NEK IEC 60034-1

India
Norway

Locked-rotor torque 15 % to +25 %

Breakdown torque 10 %
Moment of inertia 10 %
Energy-saving motors with European efficiency classification in
accordance with EU/CEMEP (European Commitee of Manufacturers of Electrical Machines and Power Electronics)
Low-voltage motors in the output range of 1.1 to 90 kW, 2-pole
and 4-pole are marked in accordance with the EU/CEMEP
agreement with the efficiency class
(Improved Efficiency) or
(High Efficiency).
So that the requirements of efficiency classes
and
are
fulfilled, the active parts of the motor have been optimized. The
procedure for calculating the efficiency is based on the losssummation method according to IEC 60034-2.
Motors for the North American market
For motors which comply with North American regulations
(NEMA, CSA, UL, etc.), it must always be checked whether the
motors will be used in the US or Canada and whether they are
subject to state laws.
Minimum efficiencies required by law
In 1997, an act was passed in the US to define minimum efficiencies for low-voltage three-phase motors (EPACT = Energy Policy
Act). An act is in force in Canada that is largely identical, although it is based on different verification methods. The efficiency is verified for these motors for the USA using IEEE 112,
Test Method B and for Canada using CSA-C390. Apart from a
few exceptions, all low-voltage three-phase motors exported to
the USA or Canada must comply with the legal requirements on
efficiency.
The law requires minimum efficiencies for 2, 4 and 6-pole motors
with a voltage of 230 and 460 V/60 Hz, in the output range of 1
to 200 HP (0.75 to 150 kW).
According to EPACT, the following are excluded from the efficiency requirements, for example.
Motors whose frame size output classification does not
correspond with the standard series according to
NEMA MG1-12.
Flange-mounting motors without feet
Brake motors
Converter-fed motors
Motors with design letter C and higher
For more information on EPACT:
http://www.eren.doe.gov/
Special requirements for the USA: Energy Policy Act

Tolerances for electrical data

According to DIN EN 60034, the following tolerances are permitted:
Motors which comply with DIN EN 60034-1 must have a voltage
tolerance of 5 % / frequency tolerance of 2 % (Design A). If utilized, the admissible limit temperature of the temperature class
may be exceeded by 10 K.
A tolerance of 5 % also applies to the rated voltage range in
accordance with DIN EN 60034-1. For rated voltage and rated
voltage range, see Page 0/103.
Efficiency at
Prated 150 kW: 0.15 (1 )
Prated > 150 kW: 0.1 (1 )
With being a decimal number.

1 cos
6
Minimum absolute value: 0.02
Maximum absolute value: 0.07
Power factor

Slip 20 % (for motors <1 kW 30 % is admissible)

Locked-rotor current +20 %

0/98

Siemens D 81.1 2008

The act lays down that the nominal efficiency at full load and a
CC number (Compliance Certification) must be included on
the rating plate. The CC number is issued by the US Department of Energy (DOE). The following information is stamped on
the rating plate of EPACT motors which must be marked by law:
Nominal efficiency (service factor SF 1.15), design letter, code
letter, CONT, CC-Nr. CC 032A (Siemens) and NEMA MG1-12.
Special requirements for Canada: CSA Energy Efficiency
Verification
These motors fulfill the minimum efficiency requirements laid
down by the CSA standard C390. These motors are available as
1LE1 and can be ordered with order code D40 and are also
marked with the CSA-E verification on the rating plate.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
NEMA Order code D30
The motors with increased efficiency according to EPACT are
designed to meet the NEMA MG1-12 electrical standard and are
marked accordingly. The mechanical design of all motors is
compliant only to IEC, not to NEMA dimensions.
All motors in the EPACT and D30 version correspond to NEMA
Design A (i. e. standard torque characteristic in accordance with
NEMA and no starting current limitation).
For Design B, C and D, a special version is required (on request).
All other 1LE1/1PC1 motors must be ordered with order code
D30.
Data on the rating plate: Rated voltage (voltage tolerance of
10 %), nominal efficiency, design letter, code letter, CONT and
NEMA MG1-12.
UL approval Order code D31
The motors based on the 1LE1/1PC1 basic series are listed for
up to 600 V by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (Recognition
Mark = R/C).
This is not possible in combination with the option temperature
class 180 (H) at rated output and maximal coolant temperature
of 60 C, order code N11.
According to UL, motor voltages are only certified up to 600 V,
i.e. voltage codes 22, 27 or 40. For this reason, the indication
690 VY for voltage code 34 (400 V/690 VY/ 50 Hz or
460 V/60 Hz), for example, is omitted on the rating plate.

The motors must be ordered with the order code D40, voltage
code 90 and order code for voltage and frequency. The CSA
mark and the rated voltage (voltage tolerance of 10 %) are included on the rating plate.

When energy-saving motors (1LE1 in design EFF1) are ordered,

they also include the CSA-E mark on the rating plate.

Export of low-voltage motors to China

CCC China Compulsory Certification Order code D01
Small power motors which are exported to China must be
certified up to a rated output of:
2-pole: 2.2 kW
4-pole: 1.1 kW
6-pole: 0.75 kW
8-pole: 0.55 kW
The 1LE1 motors which must be certified have been certified
by the CQC (China Quality Cert. Center). When ordered with the
D01 order code, the CCC logo and Factory Code are included on the rating plate and packaging.

The UL Recognition Mark is included on the rating plate of the

motor.
Factory Code:
In addition, the motor is designed to meet the NEMA MG1-12
electrical standard and includes the following data on the rating
plate: Rated voltage (voltage tolerance of 10 %), nominal efficiency, design letter, code letter, CONT and NEMA MG1-12. The
motors must only be ordered with order code D31.
Externally or internally mounted components such as
Motor protection
Heating element
Separately driven fan
Brake
Encoder
Power connection
Plug connector
are UL-R/C, CSA or C-US listed or used by manufacturers in accordance with regulations. It may have to be decided whether
the motor is suitable for the application.
The motors can be operated with a frequency converter with
50/60 Hz.
Deviating frequency settings must be tested at final acceptance.

A005216 = Works Bad Neustadt

A010607 = Works Mohelnice
Note:
Chinese customs checks the need for certification of imported
products by means of commodity code.
The following do not need to be certified:
Motors imported to China which have already been installed
in a machine
Repair parts
Export of low-voltage motors to Japan
PSE Mark Japan Order Code D46
PSE marking is a mandatory certification in Japan in accordance
with the electrical devices and safety of materials act. Small
power motors with a rated output of up to 3 kW which are
exported to Japan must bear the PSE marking.
The motors concerned are marked on the rating plate with the
following PSE logo.

The following versions are possible:

2-pole motors, only in combination with F77 or F78 low-noise
versions
4, 6 and 8-pole motors, only in combination with F76 metal external fan
CSA approval Order code D40
Motors based on the 1LE1/1PC1 basic series are approved for
up to 690 V in accordance with the Canadian regulations of the
Canadian Standard Association (CSA). Externally or internally
mounted components which are used are listed by CSA or are
used by manufacturers in accordance with regulations. It may
have to be decided whether the motor is suitable for the application.
This is not possible in combination with the option temperature
class 180 (H) at rated output and maximal coolant temperature
of 60 C, order code N11, for 1LE1 and 1PC1 motor series.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/99

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Colors and paint finish
To protect the drives against corrosion and external influences, high-quality coatings based on 2-K epoxy resin are offered in various
different colors.
Type
Special finish

Suitability of paint finish for climate group in accordance with DIN IEC 60721, Part 2-1
Worldwide (global)
Briefly: Up to 140 C
for outdoor use in direct sunlight and/or weather condiContin.: Up to 120 C
tions. Suitable for use in the tropics for <60 % relative
Also: for aggressive atmospheres up to 1 % acid and alkali
humidity at 40 C
concentrations or permanent dampness in sheltered
rooms

Special finish system sea air resistant Order code S03

Field of application
Recommended for indoor installations or outdoor installations exposed
to direct weather conditions
Industrial climate with moderate SO2 exposure, inshore maritime climate,
but not offshore maritime climate, e.g. for crane drives and also in the paper
industry
Complies with the test requirements of DIN EN ISO 12944-2 Corrosion
Category C4

All motors are painted with RAL 7030 (stone gray) if the color is
not specified.
Other colors in special finish must be ordered with order codes
Y51 or Y54 and the required RAL number in plain text (for a
selection of the available RAL numbers/colors, see the following
page for tables for order codes Y51 and Y54).
Direct sunlight may change the color. If consistent colors are
required, we recommend paint based on polyurethane. Please
inquire.
All paint finishes can be painted over with commercially available paints. Special paints and increased layer thickness available on request.
If required, the motors can be supplied coated only in primer,
order code S01, or unpainted (unmachined cast-iron surfaces,
but primed) using order code S00.

0/100

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Resistance
Chemical exposure to 5 % acid and caustic solution concentration
Suitable for use in the tropics up to 75 % relative humidity at 50 C
Thermal stability from 40 to 140 C

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Special finish in standard RAL colors Order code Y54 (RAL number is required in plain text)
RAL No.
1002
1013
1015
1019
2003
2004
3000
3007
5007
5009
5010
5012
5015
5017
5018
5019

Color name
Sand yellow
Pearl white
Light ivory
Gray beige
Pastel orange
Pure orange
Flame red
Black red
Brilliant blue
Azure blue
Gentian blue
Light blue
Sky blue
Traffic blue
Teal blue
Capri blue

RAL No.
6011
6019
6021
7000
7001
7004
7011
7016
7022
7031
7032
7033
7035
9001
9002
9005

Color name
Reseda green
Pastel green
Pale green
Squirrel gray
Silver gray
Signal gray
Iron gray
Anthracite gray
Umber gray
Blue gray
Pebble gray
Cement gray
Light gray
Cream
Gray white
Jet black

Special finish in special RAL colors Order code Y51 (RAL number is required in plain text)
RAL No.
1000
1001
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1011
1012
1014
1016
1017
1018
1020
1021
1023
1024
1027
1028
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
2000
2001
2002
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3009
3011
3012
3013

Color name
Green beige
Beige
Signal yellow
Golden yellow
Honey yellow
Maize yellow
Daffodil yellow
Brown beige
Lemon yellow
Dark ivory
Sulfur yellow
Saffron yellow
Zinc yellow
Olive yellow
Rape yellow
Traffic yellow
Ochre yellow
Curry
Melon yellow
Broom yellow
Dahlia yellow
Pastel yellow
Pearl beige
Pearl gold
Sun yellow
Yellow orange
Red orange
Vermilion
Bright red orange
Traffic orange
Signal orange
Deep orange
Salmon orange
Pearl orange
Signal red
Carmine red
Ruby red
Purple red
Wine red
Oxide red
Brown red
Beige red
Tomato red

RAL No.
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3020
3022
3027
3031
3032
3033
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5008
5011
5013
5014
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
6000
6001
6002

Color name
Antique pink
Light pink
Coral red
Rose
Strawberry red
Traffic red
Salmon pink
Raspberry red
Orient red
Pearl ruby red
Pearl pink
Red lilac
Red violet
Heather violet
Claret violet
Blue lilac
Traffic purple
Purple violet
Signal violet
Pastel violet
Tele magenta
Pearl violet
Pearl blackberry
Violet blue
Green blue
Ultramarine
Saphire blue
Black blue
Signal blue
Gray blue
Steel blue
Cobalt blue
Pigeon blue
Ocean blue
Water blue
Night blue
Distant blue
Pastel blue
Pearl gentian
Pearl night blue
Patina green
Emerald green
Leaf green

RAL No.
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6020
6022
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
7002
7003
7005
7006
7008
7009
7010
7012
7013
7015
7021
7023
7024
7026
7034

Color name
Olive green
Blue green
Moss green
Gray olive
Bottle green
Brown green
Fir green
Grass green
Black green
Reed green
Yellow olive
Black olive
Turquoise green
May green
Yellow green
Chrome green
Olive drab
Traffic green
Fern green
Opal green
Light green
Pine green
Mint green
Signal green
Mint turquoise
Pastel turquoise
Pearl green
Pearl opal green
Olive gray
Moss gray
Mouse gray
Beige gray
Khaki gray
Green gray
Tarpaulin gray
Basalt gray
Brown gray
Slate gray
Black gray
Concrete gray
Graphite gray
Granite gray
Yellow gray

RAL No.
7036
7037
7038
7039
7040
7042
7043
7044
7045
7046
7047
7048
8000
8001
8002
8003
8004
8007
8008
8011
8012
8014
8015
8016
8017
8019
8022
8023
8024
8025
8028
8029
9003
9004
9006
9007
9010
9011
9016
9017
9018
9022
9023

Color name
Platinum gray
Dusty gray
Agate gray
Quartz gray
Window gray
Traffic gray A
Traffic gray B
Silk gray
Tele gray 1
Tele gray 2
Tele gray 4
Pearl mouse gray
Green brown
Ocher brown
Signal brown
Clay brown
Copper brown
Fawn brown
Olive brown
Nut brown
Red brown
Sepia brown
Chestnut
Mahogany
Chocolate
Gray brown
Black brown
Orange brown
Beige brown
Pale brown
Terra brown
Pearl copper
Signal white
Signal black
White aluminum
Gray aluminum
Pure white
Graphite black
Traffic white
Traffic black
Papyrus white
Pearl light gray
Pearl dark gray

Coating structure and colors not specified in the catalog are available on request.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/101

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Packaging, safety notes, documentation and test certificates
Connected in star for dispatch Order code M01
The terminal board of the motor is connected in star for dispatch.
Connected in delta for dispatch Order code M02
The terminal board of the motor is connected in delta for dispatch.
Packing weights
Packing weights
For motors
Frame size
Type
1LE1 ... 1PC1 ... -

100 L

1A.4
1A.5
1A.6
1B.2
1B.6
1C.0
1C.1
1C.2
1C.3
1C.6
1D.2
1D.3
1D.4
1D.6

112 M
132 S
132 M

160 M
160 L

For land transport

Type of construction IM B3
In box
On wooden
board ISPM
Tare
covered by
cardboard on
top and sides
Tare
kg
kg

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0
4.7

4.7

4.7

4.7

8.7

4.8

4.8

4.8

8.8

On battens
Tare

In crate
Tare

kg

kg

Data apply for individual packaging. Packing in wire-lattice pallets can be used, order code B99.
Safety notes
If the motors are to be delivered without safety and commissioning notes, a customers declaration of renouncement is required.
Without safety and commissioning note Order code B00
The motors are supplied with only one set of safety and commissioning notes per wire-lattice pallet for most motor types and
frame sizes.
Complete with one set of safety and commissioning notes
per wire-lattice pallet Order code B01
Documentation
The following documents are optionally available:
Printed operating instructions English/German enclosed
Order code B04
All manuals for low-voltage motors, geared motors and lowvoltage converters are now available on DVD in 5 languages,
see SD Manual Collection for CA 01 in catalog part 11
Appendix.

0/102

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Type of construction IM B5, IM V1

In box
On wooden
On battens
board ISPM
Tare
Tare
covered by
cardboard on
top and sides
Tare
kg
kg
kg

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.2

5.2

5.2

5.2

9.2

5.7

5.7

5.7

9.7

In crate
Tare

kg

Test certificates
Acceptance test certificate 3.1 according to EN 10204
Order code B02
An acceptance test certificate 3.1 according to EN 10204 can
be supplied for most motors.
Type test with heat run for horizontal motors, with acceptance Order code B83
During the type test, a temperature-rise test is performed; noload, short-circuit and load characteristics are recorded; the iron
losses and friction losses are determined and the efficiency is
calculated from the summed losses. This option is only applicable to motors with a horizontal type of construction. The acceptance is carried out by an external representative (e.g. customer,
classification society).

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Voltages, currents and frequencies

Non-standard voltages and/or frequencies

Standard voltages

The tolerance laid down by DIN EN 60034-1 applies to all nonstandard voltages.
Order codes have been allocated for a number of non-standard
voltages at 50 or 60 Hz. They are ordered by specifying the code
digit 9 for voltage in the 12th position of the Order No. as well as
the code digit 0 in the 13th position of the Order No. and the appropriate order code.

EN 60034-1 differentiates between Category A (combination of

voltage deviation 5 % and frequency deviation 2 %) and Category B (combination of voltage deviation 10 % and frequency
deviation +3/5 %) for voltage and frequency fluctuations. The
motors can supply their rated torque in both Category A and
Category B. In Category A, the temperature rise is approx. 10 K
higher than during rated duty.
Standard
60034 1
Voltage deviation
Frequency deviation
Rating plate data stamped with
rated voltage a (e.g. 230 V)
Rating plate data stamped with
rated voltage ranges b to c
(e.g. 220 to 240V)

Category
A
5 %
2 %
a 5 %
(e.g. 230 V 5 %)
b 5 % to c +5 %
(e.g. 220 5 %
to 240 +5 %)

Category
B
10 %
+3 %/5 %
a 10 %
(e.g. 230 10 %)
b 10 % to c
+10 % (e.g. 220
10 %
to 240 +10 %)

According to the standard, longer duty is not recommended for

Category B. See Rating plates and extra rating plates for details of the rating plate inscriptions and corresponding examples. The selection and ordering data state the rated current at
400 V. The DIN IEC 60038 standard specifies a tolerance of
10 % for mains voltages of 230 V, 400 V and 690 V. The rating
plates of motors with voltage code 22 or 34 specify a rated voltage range in addition to the rated voltage (see table below).

M1Y Non-standard winding for voltages between 200 V and

690 V and rated outputs.
For voltages and rated outputs outside the range, please inquire.
Motor
series
1LE1

Frame
size

Rated voltages that are available for M1Y

Lowest/highest voltage in V for
Delta connection
Star connection
100 160 200/690
250/690

Order codes for other rated voltages are listed under Order No.
supplements in the Selection and ordering data as well as
Special versions under Voltages.

The rated currents at 380/420 V are specified in the table Rated

currents for rated voltage range 380 V to 420 V at 50 Hz and on
the rating plate.
Mains voltages

Rated voltage range

Voltage code

220 ... 240 V/380 ... 420 VY, 50 Hz

380 ... 420 V/660 ... 725 VY, 50 Hz

22
34
27
40

1LE1 motors
230 V/400 VY, 50 Hz
400 V/690 VY, 50 Hz
500 VY, 50 Hz
500 V, 50 Hz

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/103

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Rated currents for rated voltage range 380 V to 420 V at 50 Hz
Motor type

Frame size

Currents for voltage and number of poles

380 V
420 V
380 V
2-pole
4-pole
I
I
I
A
A
A

420 V
I
A

380 V
6-pole
I
A

420 V
I
A

380 V
8-pole
I
A

420 V
I
A

General Line motors with shorter delivery time

Self-ventilated energy-saving motors with improved efficiency Aluminum series 1LE1
Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and fan cover with improved efficiency Aluminum series 1LE1
1LE1002-1A.4
1LE1002-1A.5
1LE1002-1B.2
1LE1002-1C.0
1LE1002-1C.1
1LE1002-1C.2
1LE1002-1C.3
1LE1002-1D.2
1LE1002-1D.3
1LE1002-1D.4

100 L
100 L
112 M
132 S
132 S
132 M
132 M
160 M
160 M
160 L

6.3

8.3
10.9
14.5

21.7
29.6
35.0

5.7

7.5
10.3
13.9

20.7
28.9
33.5

5.0
6.4
8.4
11.5

15.2

22.4

30.0

4.9
6.1
8.1
11.4

15.2

22.8

30.2

3.75

5.4
7.3

9.3
13.7
17.0

22.3

4.15

5.5
7.7

9.4
12.9
17.7

24.7

2.8
3.65
4.0
5.9

7.9

10.5
13.8
18.9

3.3
4.1
4.4
6.0

8.1

11.6
14.6
19.4

Self-ventilated energy-saving motors with high efficiency Aluminum series 1LE1

Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and fan cover with high efficiency Aluminum series 1LE1
1LE1001-1A.4
1LE1001-1A.5
1LE1001-1B.2
1LE1001-1C.0
1LE1001-1C.1
1LE1001-1C.2
1LE1001-1C.3
1LE1001-1D.2
1LE1001-1D.3
1LE1001-1D.4

100 L
100 L
112 M
132 S
132 S
132 M
132 M
160 M
160 M
160 L

6.1

7.8
10.1
14.2

20.0
28.0
34.0

6.1

7.6
10.5
13.7

21.0
27.0
33.0

4.65
6.2
8.3
11.4

14.8

21.5

28.5

4.65
6.1
8.2
11.4

14.4

20.5

27.5

3.55

5.1
7.0

8.6
12
16.1

22.5

3.55

5.0
7.1

8.9
11.9
15.8

21.5

2.65
3.85
4.3
6.6

7.9

9.8
13.4
17.5

2.95
4.35
4.3
6.6

8.2

9.6
13.3
16.8

5
8.0
17.6
34.0

4.95
6.5
16.5
29.0

Self-ventilated motors with increased output with improved efficiency Aluminum series 1LE1
1LE1002-1A.6
1LE1002-1B.6
1LE1002-1C.6
1LE1002-1D.6

100 L
112 M
132 M
160 L

8.1
11.2
20.3
40.2

7.9
10.2
18.9
37.9

8.5
12
21.8
36.1

8.5
10.8
21.3
35.5

5.4
7.5
17.0
33.5

Self-ventilated motors with increased output and high efficiency Aluminum series 1LE1
1LE1001-1A.6
1LE1001-1B.6
1LE1001-1C.6
1LE1001-1D.6

0/104

100 L
112 M
132 M
160 L

7.8
10.4
20
40.0

Siemens D 81.1 2008

7.6
9.8
19.1
37.5

8.3
11.2
21.5
35.5

8.4
11.1
21
34.5

5.0
6.6
16.5
30.5

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Outputs
The outputs or rated outputs are listed in the selection tables for
both 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Assignment of the standard power kW-HP and vice versa in
accordance with IEC
kW 1.341 = HP
HP 0.746 = kW
Prated
kW
0.06
0.09
0.12
0.18
0.25

Prated
HP
0.08
0.12
0.16
0.25
0.33

Prated
kW
0.37
0.55
0.75
1.1
1.5

Prated
HP
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2

Prated
kW
2.2
3
4
5.5
7.5

Prated
HP
3
4
5
7.5
10

Prated
kW
11
15
18.5
22
30

Prated
HP
15
20
25
30
40

Prated
kW
37
45
55
75
90

Prated
HP
50
60
75
100
125

Prated
kW
110
132
160
200

Prated
HP
150
200
250
300

Efficiency, power factor, rated torque, rated speed and

direction of rotation
Efficiency and power factor
The efficiency and power factor cos for each rated output are
listed in the selection tables in the individual sections of this catalog.
For EFF1 and EFF2 motors, the 3/4-load-efficiency is also indicated in the selection tables.
The part-load values stated in the two tables below are averages; precise values can be provided on request.
Part-load efficiency in % at
1/4
1/2
of full load
93
96
92
95
90
93.5
89
92.5
88
91.5
87
91
86
90
85
89
84
88
80
87
79
86
78
85
76
84
74
83
72
82
70
81
68
80
66
79
64
77
62
75.5
60
74
58
73
56
72
55
71
54
70
53
68
52
67
51
66
50
65
49
64
48
62
47
61
46
60
45
59
44
57
43
56
42
55
41
54

3/4

4/4

5/4

97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79.5
78.5
77.5
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
67.5
66.5
65
64
63
62
60.5
59.5
58.5

97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60

96.5
95.5
94.5
93.5
92.5
91.5
90
89
88
87
86
85
83.5
82.5
81.5
80.5
79.5
78.5
77.5
76.5
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60.5
59.5
58.5

Part-load power factor at

1/4
1/2
of full load
0.70
0.86
0.65
0.85
0.63
0.83
0.61
0.80
0.57
0.78
0.53
0.76
0.51
0.75
0.49
0.73
0.47
0.71
0.45
0.69
0.43
0.67
0.41
0.66
0.40
0.65
0.38
0.63
0.36
0.61
0.34
0.59
0.32
0.58
0.30
0.56
0.29
0.55
0.28
0.54
0.27
0.52
0.26
0.50

3/4

4/4

5/4

0.90
0.89
0.88
0.86
0.85
0.84
0.83
0.81
0.80
0.79
0.77
0.76
0.75
0.74
0.72
0.71
0.70
0.69
0.68
0.67
0.63
0.62

0.92
0.91
0.90
0.89
0.88
0.87
0.86
0.85
0.84
0.83
0.82
0.81
0.80
0.79
0.78
0.77
0.76
0.75
0.74
0.73
0.72
0.71

0.92
0.91
0.90
0.89
0.88
0.87
0.86
0.86
0.85
0.84
0.83
0.82
0.81
0.80
0.80
0.79
0.78
0.78
0.77
0.77
0.76
0.76

Rated speed and direction of rotation

The rated speeds are applicable for the rated data. The synchronous speed changes proportionally with the line frequency. The
motors are suitable for clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation.
If U1, V1, W1 are connected to L1, L2, L3, clockwise rotation
results as viewed onto the drive-end shaft extension. Counterclockwise rotation is achieved by swapping two phases (see
also Heating and ventilation, Page 0/111).
Rated torque
The rated torque in Nm delivered at the motor shaft is

M=
P
n

9.55 P 1000
n
Rated output in kW
Speed in rpm

Note:
If the voltage deviates from its rated value within the admissible
limits, the locked-rotor torque, the pull-up torque and the breakdown torque vary with the approximate square of the value, but
the locked-rotor current varies approximately linearly.
In the case of squirrel-cage motors, the locked-rotor torque and
breakdown torque are listed in the selection tables as multiples
of the rated torque.
The normal practice is to start squirrel-cage motors directly on
line. The torque class indicates that with direct-on-line starting,
even if there is an undervoltage of 5 %, it is possible to start up
the motor against a load torque of
160 % for CL 16
130 % for CL 13
100 % for CL 10
70 % for CL 7
50 % for CL 5
of the rated torque.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/105

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
Rating plate and extra rating plates
DIN EN 60034-1 lays down that the approximate total weight for
all motors is indicated on the rating plate.
An extra rating plate can be supplied loose for all motors, order
code M10.
Non-rusting steel rating plate, for scratch, heat, cold and acid resistance can be obtained, order code M11.
Supplementary data (max. of 20 characters) can be indicated on
the rating plate or extra rating plate and on the packaging label,
order code Y84.

An extra rating plate for identification codes is also possible,

order code Y82.
An extra rating plate or a rating plate with different rating plate
data can also be ordered, order code Y80.
In the standard version, the rating plate is available in international format or in the German/English language. The language
for the rating plate can be ordered by specifying it in plain text.
An overview of the languages that can be ordered, at additional
cost in some cases, is provided in the table below.

Overview of the languages on the rating plate

Motor type

Frame size Rating plate

International

German
(de)

English
(en)

German
(de)/
English
(en)

1LE1/1PC1 100 160

Standard version
Without additional charge
Example of a rating plate
2 4 18

23

16

D-91056 Erlangen

1
16

3~Mot. 1LE1 002-1DB43-4AA0

IEC/EN 60034 160L IMB3
73 kg Th.Cl. 155(F)
Bearing
DE 6209-2ZC3
NE 6209-2ZC3

15
17

E0605/0496382 02 001

IP55

21
20

19
V
Hz
50
400
690 Y 50
460
60

A
29,5
17,1
29,5

V
eta 1/min
A
kW cos
15 0,82 89,4% 1460 380-420 30,0-30,2
15 0,82 89,4% 1460 660-725 17,4-17,5
17,3 0,82 89,4% 1760 440-480 30,2-29,8

10

11

1 Machine type: Three-phase

Low-voltage motor
2 Order No.
3 Factory number (Ident No.,
serial number)
4 Type of construction
5 Degree of protection
6 Rated voltage [V] and
winding connections
7 Frequency [Hz]
8 Rated current [A]
9 Rated output [kW]
10 Power factor [cos ]
11 Efficiency
12 Rated speed [rpm]

0/106

Siemens D 81.1 2008

12

13

14

G_D081_EN_00180

General technical data

22

Voltage range [V]

Current range [A]
Machine weight [kg]
Standards and regulations
Temperature class
Frame size
Additional details (optional)
Operating temberature range
(only if it deviates from
normal)
21 Site altitude (only when
higher than 1000 m)
22 Customer data (optional)
23 Date of manufacture YYMM

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

French
(fr)/
Spanish
(es)

Italian
(it)

Portuguese (pt)

Russian
(ru)

Double rating plate

50/60 Hz data for
500 VY
230 V/
and
400 VY and
575 VY
460 V
500 V
400 V/
and
690 VY and
575 V
460 V

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Coolant temperature and site altitude
The rated output specified in the selection tables is applicable
for continuous duty in accordance with DIN EN 60034-1 at the
frequency of 50 Hz, a coolant temperature (CT) or ambient temperature of 40 C and a site altitude (SA) up to 1000 m above
sea level.
For higher coolant temperatures and/or site altitudes greater
than 1000 m above sea level, the specified motor output must be
reduced using the factor kHT.
Depending on the frame size of the motor or the number of
poles, special windings may be added to the motors for different
operating conditions.

If the admissible motor output is no longer adequate for the

drive, it should be checked whether the motor with the next
higher rated output fulfills the requirements.
Abbreviation

Description

Unit

Padm.

Admissible motor output

kW

Prated

Rated output

kW

kHT

Factor for abnormal coolant temperature and/or

site altitude

The motors are designed for temperature class 155 (F) and used
in temperature class 130 (B). Under non-standard operating
conditions, if they are to be used in class 130 (B), the admissible
output must be determined from the tables below.

This results in an admissible output of the motor of:

Padm. = Prated kHT
Reduction factor kHT for different site altitudes and/or coolant temperatures
Site altitude
above sea level
m
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000

Site altitude above sea level

Coolant temperature
<30 C
30 C ... 40 C
1.07
1.00
1.04
0.97
1.00
0.94
0.96
0.90
0.92
0.86
0.88
0.82
0.82
0.77

45 C
0.96
0.93
0.90
0.86
0.82
0.79
0.74

50 C
0.92
0.89
0.86
0.83
0.79
0.75
0.71

55 C
0.87
0.84
0.82
0.78
0.75
0.71
0.67

60 C
0.82
0.79
0.77
0.74
0.70
0.67
0.63

Coolant temperature and site altitude are rounded-off to 5 C or 500 m.

For the following outputs, rms values are specified for coolant
temperatures (CT) of 45 C and 50 C that must be specified
when ordering.
Power
kW
11
15
18.5
22
30

Admissible output at 50 Hz
for CT 45 C
for CT 50 C
kW
kW
10.5
10
14.5
13.8
17.8
17
21
20
29
27.5

For details of derating for use in class 155 (F), see DURIGNIT
IR 2000 insulation system.
Motors for coolant temperatures other than 40 C or site altitudes
higher than 1000 m above sea level for use in temperature class
130 (B) must always be ordered with the supplementary order
code -Z and plain text. In the case of extreme derating, the operating data for the motors will also be less favorable due to partial utilization.

Ambient temperature:
All motors can be used in the standard version at ambient temperatures between 20 to +40 C.
Motors can be used in temperature class 155 (F)
at 40 C with service factor 1.1, i.e. the motor can be continuously overloaded with 10 % of the rated output in the case of
EFF2 motors
at 40 C with service factor 1.15, i.e. the motor can be continuously overloaded with 15 % of the rated output in the case of
EFF1 motors
above 40 C at rated output.
When motors are used in temperature class 130 (B) for higher
ambient temperatures and/or site altitudes, derating occurs in
accordance with the table Reduction factor kHT for different site
altitudes and/or coolant temperatures.
For motors ex stock, the service factor is indicated on the rating
plate.
For other temperatures, special measures are necessary.
When brakes are to be mounted on at temperatures below
freezing, please inquire.

The following special versions are possible for 1LE1 and 1PC1
motors:
Motors for coolant temperatures from 40 to +40 C
order code D03
Motors for coolant temperatures from 30 to +40 C
order code D04
When ordering with order codes D03 and D04 in combination
with mountings, the respective technical data have to be observed; request required.
For details of order codes for use in temperature class 155 (F),
see DURIGNIT IR 2000 insulation system under Windings and
insulation, Page 0/108.
The following applies to all motors:
The motors can withstand 1.5 times the rated current at rated
voltage and frequency for two minutes (DIN EN 60034).

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/107

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Windings and insulation
DURIGNIT IR 2000 insulation system
The DURIGNIT IR 2000 insulation system comprises high-grade
enameled wires and insulating sheet materials combined with
solvent-free impregnating resin.
The system ensures a high level of mechanical and electrical
strength as well as good serviceability and a long motor life.
The insulation system protects the winding against aggressive
gases, vapors, dust, oil and increased air humidity. It can withstand the usual vibration stressing.
The insulation is suitable up to an absolute air humidity of 30 g
water per m3 of air. Moisture condensation should be prevented
from forming on the winding. Please inquire if higher values are
required.
Please inquire about extreme applications.
Restarting against residual field and opposite phase
All motors can be reclosed against 100 % residual field after a
mains voltage failure.
Winding and insulation design with regard to temperature class
and air humidity
All motors are designed for temperature class 155 (F).
At rated output with mains-fed operation, the motors can be
used in temperature class 130 (B).
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), with
service factor (SF)
For all 1LE1/1PC1 motors for mains-fed operation for the rated
output given in the selection table and rated voltage, a service
factor of 1.1 can be specified for EFF2 motors (SF = 1.15 for
EFF1 motors) also for motors with increased output.
Order code N01
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), for
increased output
When used according to temperature class 155 (F), the rated
output as specified in the selection and ordering data can be increased by 10 % for EFF2 motors (15 % for EFF1 motors) also for
motors with increased output.
Order code N02
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), with
increased coolant temperature
For mains-fed motors at outputs in accordance with the catalog,
the coolant temperature can be raised to 55 C.
Order code N03
The service factor (SF) is not indicated on the rating plate for order codes N02 and N03.
For converter-fed operation at the output specified in the catalog, the motors are used in accordance with temperature class
155 (F). Order codes N01, N02 and N03 are not possible. This
applies to motors up to 460 V.
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 155 (F), other
requirements
The motors can be ordered according to temperature class 155
(F) for use according to temperature class 155 (F) with other customized requirements if they are specified in plain text in the order.
Order code Y52

0/108

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Temperature class 180 (H) at rated output and maximum

coolant temperature CT 60 C
For motor series 1LE1 and 1PC1, use according to temperature
class 180 (H) is permitted at rated output and at a maximum
coolant temperature of 60 C. This does not apply to motor series 1LE1 and 1PC1 with UL approval (order code D31) and CSA
approval (order code D40). The specified grease life applies to
a coolant temperature of 40 C. For a 10 K increase in coolant
temperature, the grease life or lubrication interval is halved.
Order code N11
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B),
coolant temperature 45 C, approx. 4 % derating
For the 1LE1 motor series, a version for temperature class 155
(F) can be used according to temperature class 130 (B) at a
maximum coolant temperature of 45 C with a 4 % reduction in
rated output.
Order code N05
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B),
coolant temperature 50 C, approx. 8 % derating
For the 1LE1 motor series, a version for temperature class 155
(F) can be used according to temperature class 130 (B) at a
maximum coolant temperature of 50 C with a 8 % reduction in
rated output.
Order code N06
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B),
coolant temperature 55 C, approx. 13 % derating
For the 1LE1 motor series, a version for temperature class 155
(F) can be used according to temperature class 130 (B) at a
maximum coolant temperature of 55 C with a 13 % reduction in
rated output.
Order code N07
Temperature class 155 (F), used according to 130 (B),
coolant temperature 60 C, approx. 18 % derating
For the 1LE1 motor series, a version for temperature class 155
(F) can be used according to temperature class 130 (B) at a
maximum coolant temperature of 60 C with a 18 % reduction in
rated output.
Order code N08
Increased air temperature/humidity with 30 to 60 g water
per m3 of air
For motors of series 1LE1 and 1PC1, a version can be ordered
for increased air humidity of between 30 and 60 g water per m3
of air depending on the temperature as listed in the table below.
This option includes condensation drainage holes (order code
H03).
Order code N20
Please contact your local Siemens office if order code N20 is to
be combined with additional mountings (eg. rotary pulse encoders, brakes).
Increased air temperature/humidity with 60 to 100 g water
per m3 of air
For motors of series 1LE1 and 1PC1, a version can be ordered
for increased air humidity of between 60 and 100 g water per m3
of air depending on the temperature as listed in the table below.
This option includes condensation drainage holes (order code
H03).
Order code N21
Please contact your local Siemens office if order code N21 is to
be combined with additional mountings (eg. rotary pulse encoders, brakes).

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Absolute/relative conversion of air humidity
Relative humidity
10 %
15 %
20 %
25 %
30 %
35 %
40 %
45 %
50 %
55 %
60 %
65 %
70 %
75 %
80 %
85 %
90 %
95 %
100 %

Temperature
20 C
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
17

30 C
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
14
15
17
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
29
30

40 C
5
8
10
13
15
18
20
23
26
28
31
33
36
38
41
43
46
49
51

50 C
8
12
17
21
25
29
33
37
41
46
50
54
58
62
66
70
74
79
83

60 C
13
19
26
32
39
45
52
58
65
71
78
84
91
97
104
110
117
123
130

70 C
20
30
39
49
59
69
79
89
98
108
118
128
138
148
157
167
177
187
197

80 C
29
44
58
73
87
102
116
131
145
160
174
189
203
218
233
247
262
276
291

90 C
42
63
84
105
126
146
167
188
209
230
251
272
293
314
335
356
377
398
419

The values in the table with a blue background are covered by the standard
version (up to 30 g water per m3 of air).
The values in the table with a light gray background are covered by order
code N20 (30 to 60 g of water per m3 of air).
The values in the table with a dark gray background are covered by order
code N21 (60 to 100 g of water per m3 of air).

Please contact your local Siemens office regarding requirements

exceeding 100 g water per m3 of air
Restarting against residual field and opposite phase
All motors can be reclosed against 100 % residual field after a
mains voltage failure.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/109

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Motor protection
The order variants for motor protection are coded with letters in
the 15th position of the Order No. and, if necessary, using order
codes.
In the standard version, the motor is designed without motor protection.
15th position of Order No. letter A
A distinction is made between current-dependent and motortemperature-dependent protection devices.
Current-dependent protection devices
Fuses are only used to protect mains cables in the event of a
short-circuit. They are not suitable for overload protection of the
motor.
The motors are usually protected by delayed overload protection
devices (circuit breakers for motor protection or overload relays).
This protection is current-dependent and is particularly effective
in the case of a locked rotor.
For standard duty with short start-up times and starting currents
that are not excessive and for low numbers of switching operations, motor protection switches provide adequate protection.
Motor protection switches are not suitable for heavy starting duty
or large numbers of switching operations. Differences in the thermal time constants for the protection equipment and the motor
results in unnecessary early tripping when the protection switch
is set to rated current.

Two sets of three temperature sensors are used if a warning is

required before the motor is shut down (tripped). The warning is
normally set to 10 K below the tripping temperature.
Motor protection with PTC thermistors with 6 embedded temperature sensors for alarm and tripping. In the connection box,
4 auxiliary terminals are required.
15th position of Order No. letter C
In order to achieve full thermal protection, it is necessary to
combine a thermally delayed overcurrent release and a PTC
thermistor. For full motor protection implemented only with PTC
thermistors, please inquire.
Motor temperature detection with converter-fed operation
KTY 84-130 temperature sensor
This sensor is a semiconductor that changes its resistance depending on temperature in accordance with a defined curve.
3

G_M015_EN_00190

2.5
k
2

1.5
D = 2 mA

Motor-temperature-dependent protection devices

Temperature detectors installed in the motor winding are suitable protection devices in the case of slowly rising motor temperature.
When a limit temperature is reached, these bimetal switches
(NC contacts) can deactivate an auxiliary circuit. The circuit can
only be reclosed following a considerable fall in temperature.
When the motor current rises quickly (e.g. with a locked rotor),
these switches are not suitable due to their large thermal time
constants.
Temperature detectors for tripping
15th position of Order No. letter Z and order code Q3A
The most comprehensive protection against thermal overloading of the motor is provided by PTC thermistors (thermistor
motor protection) installed in the motor winding. The temperature of the winding can be accurately monitored thanks to its low
heating capacity and the excellent heat contact with the winding. When a limit temperature is reached (rated tripping temperature), the PTC thermistors undergo a step change in resistance.
This is evaluated by a tripping unit and can be used to open
auxiliary circuits. The PTC thermistors themselves cannot be
subjected to high currents and voltages. This would result in
destruction of the semiconductor. The switching hysteresis of the
PTC thermistor and tripping unit is low, which supports fast restarting of the drive. Motors with this type of protection are recommended for heavy duty starting, switching duty, extreme
changes in load, high ambient temperatures or fluctuating supply systems.
Motor protection with PTC thermistors with 3 embedded temperature sensors for tripping. In the connection box, 2 auxiliary terminals are required.
15th position of Order No. letter B
The temperature detectors have the following current carrying
capacity and switching capacity:
230 V AC cos: 2.5 A
24 V DC:
1.6 A

0/110

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0.5

0
0

50

100

150

200

250 C

300

KTY 84-130 temperature sensor characteristic

Some converters from Siemens determine the motor temperature using the resistance of the temperature sensor. They can be
set to a required temperature for alarm and tripping.
Motor temperature detection with embedded temperature sensor KTY 84-130. Two auxiliary terminals are required in the connection box.
15th position of Order No. letter F
The temperature sensor is embedded in the winding head of the
motor in the same manner as a PTC thermistor. Evaluation is performed, for example, in the converter.
For mains-fed operation, the temperature monitoring device
3RS10 that is part of the protection equipment can be ordered
separately. For further details, see Catalog LV 1,
Order No.: E86060-K1002-A101-A7-7600.
With NTC thermistors (mainly in the case of special machines),
the tripping temperature can also be adjusted later on the tripping unit. NTC thermistors for tripping
15th position of Order No. letter Z and order code Q2A

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Heating and ventilation

Metal external fan impeller

Anti-condensation heaters

The standard fan impeller made of plastic can be replaced with

a fan impeller made of metal. This version can be supplied 1LE1
(with the exception of 1LE1 with option F90 version Forced-air
cooled motors without external fan and fan cover). With the
1LE1 mortor series, the metal fan can also be used for converterfed operation.
A metal external fan is already included for the low-noise version.
Up to frame size 160, the metal external fan impeller is manufactured from sheet aluminum or steel.
Order codes F76

Supply voltage 230 V (1~)

Order code Q02
Supply voltage 115 V (1~)
Order code Q03
Motors whose windings are at risk of condensation due to the
climatic conditions, e.g. inactive motors in humid atmospheres
or motors that are subjected to widely fluctuating temperatures,
can be equipped with anti-condensation heaters.
An additional M16 x 1.5 cable entry is provided for the connecting cable in the connection box.
Anti-condensation heaters must not be switched on during operation.
Motor series

Frame size

1LE1/1PC1
1LE1/1PC1

100 ... 112

132 160

Heater output of anti-condensation

heaters in Watt (W)
Supply voltage at
230 V
115 V
Order code
Order code
Q02
Q03
50
50
100
100

Instead of an anti-condensation heater, another possibility (at no

extra cost) is connection of a voltage that is approximately 4 to
10 % of the rated motor voltage to stator terminals U1 and V1;
20 to 30 % of the rated motor current are sufficient to heat the
motor.
Fans/Separately driven fans
1LE1 motors of frame sizes 100 ... 160 have radial-flow fans in
the standard version (with the exception of 1LE1 with option F90
version Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and fan
cover) that cool regardless of the direction of rotation of the motor (cooling method IC 411 acc. to DIN EN 60034-6). The air flow
is forced from the non-drive-end (NDE) to the drive end (DE).
For details of separately driven fans for frame sizes 100 ... 160,
see Page 0/129.

Fan cover for textile industry

For motors 1LE1 (with the exception of 1LE1 with option F90
version Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and fan
cover), the fan cover can be used in the standard version for the
textile industry.
For motor series 1LE1 (with the exception of 1LE1 with option
F90 version Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and
fan cover), a version of the fan cover can be supplied specially
for the textile industry. This has a protective cover and is made
of non-corrosive sheet steel.
When a fan cover is mounted for the textile industry, the length
of the motor increases by 64 mm for frame sizes 100/112 and by
71 mm for frame sizes 132/160.
Order code F75
Sheet metal fan cover
For 1LE1 motor series (with the exception of 1LE1 with option
F90 version Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and
fan cover), the fan cover can be supplied in sheet metal instead
of plastic.
Order code F74

Supply voltage of separately driven fan for 1LE1 motors:

The supply voltage tolerance of the separately driven fan is
5 %; for voltage ranges, Page 0/129.
When the motor is mounted and the air intake is restricted, it
must be ensured that a minimum clearance is maintained between the fan cover and the wall. This clearance is calculated
from the difference between the protective cover and the fan
cover (differential dimension LM L) or is specified in the detailed dimension drawing (see also Dimensional drawings from
Page 1/68).
For design of the fan/separately driven fan and the fan cover, see
the table below.
Motor series

Frame size

Fan material

1LE1

100 160

plastic

1)

Fan cover
material
plastic 1)

The sheet metal fan cover is used for type of constuction codes A, D, F, H,
J, K, L, N, T, U, V in combination with option H03 (condensation drainage
holes). Mounted separately driven fans and brakes are only available for
versions with sheet metal fan covers.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/111

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Necessary minimum cooling air flow for forced-air-cooled motors in standard duty
The required cooling air flow indicated in the selection table applies to continuous duty according to DIN EN 60034-1 at a coolant temperature (CT) and ambient temperature, respectively, of
40 C and a site altitude (SA) of up to 1000 m above sea level.
In the motor version without external fan and fan cover, order
code F90, the motor is located in the air flow of the fan to be
Frame size

100
112
132
160

1)

Required cooling air flow for number of poles

2
4
EFF1/EFF2
EFF1
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
m3/min.
m3/min.
m3/min.
m3/min.
3.8
4.4
2.1
2.6
5.0/5.4 1)
5.7/6.1 1)
2.9
3.5
6.3
7.3
4.6
5.7
10.9
13.3
6.7
8.1

Value: EFF1/EFF2

0/112

Siemens D 81.1 2008

driven which must drive the minimum cooling air flow over the
motor housing. The minimum air flow must pass closely over the
housing (comparable to self-ventilation of the motor). Otherwise,
higher air flows are required to comply with admissible motor
heating levels. For a higher cooling air flow, the operating temperature of the motor can be reduced.

EFF2
50 Hz
m3/min.
2.3
2.9
4.6
7.6

60 Hz
m3/min.
2.8
3.5
5.7
9.1

6
EFF1/EFF2
50 Hz
m3/min.
1.5
1.9
3.1
5

60 Hz
m3/min.
1.8
2.3
3.8
6.1

8
EFF1/EFF2
50 Hz
m3/min.
1.2
1.4
2.4
3.8

60 Hz
m3/min.
1.3
1.6
2.9
4.5

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Motor connection and connection box

Design of the connection box

Connection, circuit and connection box

The number of terminals and the size of the connection box are
designed for standard requirements.

Location of the connection box

The order variants for motor connection are coded with digits in
the 16th position of the Order No.
The connection box of the motor can be mounted in four different
locations or positions. The position of the connection box must
always be viewed from the drive end (DE).
The standard position of the connection box for General Line
motors is on top
16th position of Order No. digit 0.
The standard position of the connection box for all other motors
is on top
16th position of Order No. digit 4.
For all motors with feet (apart from motors with increased output), cast feet are standard. If rotation of the connection box in
the future has to be provided for, it is recommended that the
option Screwed-on feet (instead of cast feet), order code H01,
is ordered.
For motors with feet and increased output, screwed-on feet are
standard. The connection box can be rotated later.
Connection box on RHS
16th position of Order No. digit 5.

For special requirements or upon the customers request, a

larger connection box, can be delivered.
Order code R50
If the necessary installation angle of the motor would cause
machine components to collide with the connection box, the
connection box can be moved from the drive end (DE) to the
non-drive end (NDE). Only use according to temperature class
155 (F) possible.
Order code H08
Not possible for explosion-proof motors.
Motor connection
Line feeder cables
The line feeder cables must be dimensioned acc. to
DIN VDE 0298. The number of required feeder cables, if necessary in parallel, is defined by:
The max. cable cross-section which can be connected
The cable type
Routing
Ambient temperature and the corresponding admissible current in accordance with DIN VDE 0298
For motors with auxilliary terminals (e.g. 15th position of Order
No. is letter B) an M16 x 1.5 cable gland with plug is additonally
provided.
For further details, see the data sheet function in the SD generator.

Connection box on LHS

16th position of Order No. digit 6.
Connection box bottom
16th position of Order No. digit 7.

The connection box is located on the housing and bolted in

place. The connection box can be turned 4 x 90 on the terminal
base of the machines housing in the case of a terminal board
with 6 terminal studs (standard design).
There are 2 entry holes at the standard position complete with
sealing plugs and locknuts (see figure).

Standard
0/4

G_D081_EN_00178

Location of the connection box with the corresponding digits in the 16th
position of the order number

The number of winding ends depends on the winding design.

Three-phase motors are connected to the three phase conductors L1, L2 and L3 of a three-phase system. The rated voltage of
the motor in the running connection must match the phase conductor voltages of the network.
When the three phases are operating in a time sequence and are
connected to the terminals of the motor in alphabetical order U1,
V1 and W1, clockwise rotation is established as viewed from the
motor shaft. The direction of rotation of the motor can be reversed if two connecting leads are interchanged.

Connection box in standard position

Labeled terminals are provided to connect the protective conductor.

A PE terminal is provided in the connection box for grounding. A
grounding terminal is provided on the outside of the motor frame
special version for 1LE1/1PC1 motors.
Order code H04.
If a brake control system or thermal protection is installed, the
connections will also be in the connection box. The motors are
suitable for direct connection to the line supply.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/113

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Cable entry on connection box

Ordering example:

Unless stated otherwise, the cable entry is located in the standard position as shown in the illustration.

Connection box on RHS (16th position of Order No. digit 5):

Without additional order code, cable entry from below.

The connection box can also be rotated such that the cable entry is located
Towards the drive end (DE)
(rotation of connection box by 90, entry from DE)
Order code R10
Towards the non-drive end (NDE)
(rotation of connection box by 90, entry from NDE)
Order code R11
Opposite
(rotation of connection box by 180, entry from opposite end)
Order code R12

With additional order code R10:

Cable entry from drive end (DE)

The dimensions of the connection box are listed in part Dimensions, see Pages 1/65 to 1/75 in accordance with the frame size
and the Dimension drawings.
If the position of the connection box (connection box RHS, LHS
or above) is changed, the position of the cable entry must be
checked and, if necessary, it can be ordered with the corresponding order codes (R10, R11 and R12).

Connection box in standard position, detailed view

For cable entry to a standard connection box, a metal cable

entry can be ordered for motor connection.
One cable gland, metal
Order code R15

R12

Drive end
DE

R11

R10

Standard

Non-drive end
NDE

G_D081_EN_00177a

Locations of the cable entries with corresponding order codes

For special requirements for which standard holes for the cable
entries are inadequate for the British market in UK, reduction
pieces for M cable glands in accordance with British Standard
that are mounted on both cable entries can be supplied.
Order code R30
Frame size
100
112/132
160

Cable entry acc. to

IEC
2 x M32
2 x M32
2 x M40

British Standard
2 x M20
2 x M25
2 x M32

Protruding cable ends

For confined spaces, protruding cable ends can be ordered,
without a connection box with cover plate.
The following lengths of protruding cables can already be
ordered using order codes on request:
3 cables protruding, 0.5 m long 1)
Order code R20
3 cables protruding, 1.5 m long 1)
Order code R21
6 cables protruding, 0.5 m long
Order code R22
6 cables protruding, 1.5 m long
Order code R23
6 cables protruding, 3.0 m long
Order code R24
The cross-section of the named cables refers to a coolant
temperature up to CT 40 C.

1)

With only 3 protruding cables additional plain text specifying star or delta
connection is required.

0/114

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Connection, circuit and connection box
Standard connection box TB1 F00, TB1 H00, TB1 J00

Larger connection box type TB1F10, TB1H10, TB1J10

Standard connection boxes/larger connection box for 1LE1/1PC1 motors basic data
Motors
1LE1

Frame size
100 160

Number of cable entries

2 entries complete with sealing
plugs and locknuts
Connection box is mounted and bolted in place.

Connection box material

Aluminum alloy

Feeder connection
Without cable lug

Possible positions of the standard connection boxes/Larger connection box for 1LE1/1PC1 motors
Motors

Frame size

Connection box position

Above
Side, right
or left

100 160

1LE1

Retrofitting
possible
1)

Rotation of connection box

90
180

Retrofitting
possible
Yes

Available version
Standard connection boxes/larger connection box for 1LE1/1PC1 motors in standard version
Frame size

Number of
terminals

Contact screw
thread

Max. connectable Outer cable

cross-section
diameter
(sealing range)
mm2
mm

Cable entry 2)

Two-part plate
Adm. outer cable
diameter
mm

TB1 F00/TB1F10

M4

11 21

2 x M32 x 1.5

TB1 H00/TB1H10
TB1 J00/TB1J10

6
6

M4
M5

6
16

11 21
19 28

2 x M32 x 1.5
2 x M40 x 1.5

Connection box

standard /
larger

1LE1
100
112
132
160

Not available

Terminal connection
The terminal board accommodates the terminals that are connected to the leads to the motor windings. The terminals are
designed so that for frame sizes 100 ... 160 the external (line)
connections can be made without the need for cable lugs.

1)

Retrofittable screwed-on feet (16th position of Order No. digit 5, 6, 7 and 4

with order code H01).

2)

Designed for cable glands with O-ring.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/115

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Types of construction
Standard types of construction and special types of construction
Type of construction
acc. to DIN EN 60034-7

Frame size

Letter
14th position of
the Order No.

Order No.
supplement -Z
with order code

IM B3

100 L to 160 L

IM B6/IM 1051

100 L to 160 L

IM B7/IM 1061

100 L to 160 L

IM B8/IM 1071

100 L to 160 L

IM V5/IM 1011
without protective cover

100 L to 160 L

IM V6/IM 1031

100 L to 160 L

IM V5/IM 1011
with protective cover

100 L to 160 L

+ H00 1)

IM B5/IM 3001

100 L to 160 L

IM V1/IM 3011
without protective cover

100 L to 160 L

IM V1/IM 3011
with protective cover

100 L to 160 L

+ H00 1)

IM V3/IM 3031

100 L to 160 L

IM B35/IM 2001

100 L to 160 L

Without flange

With flange

In the DIN EN 50347 standard, flanges FF with through holes

and flanges FT with tapped holes are specified.

1)

A second shaft extension L05 is not possible.

0/116

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Type of construction
acc. to DIN EN 60034-7

Frame size

Letter
14th position of
the Order No.

Order No.
supplement -Z
with order code

IM B14/IM 3601

100 L to 160 L

IM V19/IM 3631

100 L to 160 L

IM V18/IM 3611
without protective cover

100 L to 160 L

IM V 18/IM 3611
with protective cover

100 L to 160 L

+ H00 1)

IM B34/IM 2101

100 L to 160 L

IM B14/IM 3601

100 L to 160 L

+ P01

IM V19/IM 3631

100 L to 160 L

+ P01

IM V18/IM 3611
without protective cover

100 L to 160 L

+ P01

IM V 18/IM 3611
with protective cover

100 L to 160 L

+ P01
+ H00 1)

IM B34/IM 2101

100 L to 160 L

+ P01

With standard flange

With special flange (next larger standard flange)

In DIN EN 50347, standard flanges are assigned to the frame

sizes as FT with tapped holes. The special flange was assigned
as a large flange in the previous DIN 42677.
The dimensions of the following types of construction are identical:
IM B3, IM B6, IM B7, IM B8, IM V5 and IM V6
IM B5, IM V1 and IM V3
IM B14, IM V18 and IM V19
Motors in the standard output range can be ordered in basic
types of construction IM B3, IM B5 and IM B14 and can be operated in the following mounting positions IM B6, IM B7, IM B8,
IM V5, IM V6, IM V1, IM V3 (up to frame size 160 L) or IM V18
and IM V19. Eyebolts are available for transport and installation
in a horizontal position. In conjunction with the eyebolts, for the
purpose of stabilizing the position when the motor is arranged
vertically, additional lifting straps (DIN EN 1492-1) and/or clamping bands (DIN EN 12195-2) must be used.

1)

If mounting position IM V1 is ordered, eyebolts are supplied for

vertical mounting.
The motors are designated in accordance with the types of construction on the rating plate.
With motors that have a vertical shaft extension, the end user
must prevent an ingress of fluid along the shaft.
In the case of all types of construction with shaft extension down,
the version with protective cover is urgently recommended,
see the section Degrees of protection, Page 0/119.
Frame design
Motors in the types of construction with feet have, in some
cases, two fixing holes at the feet at the non-drive end (NDE),
see dimension tables, Pages 1/68 to 1/75. A code is cast into the
motor close to the fixing retaining holes to identify the frame size.
A metal fan cover is used as standard for horizontal types of construction and types of constructions with shaft extension facing
upwards (14th position of Order No. letter A, T, U, V, D, F, H, J,
K, L or N) in combination with condensation drainage holes,
order code H03.

A second shaft extension L05 is not possible.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/117

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Mechanical design and degrees of protection
Preparation for gear mounting
The flange-mounting motors can be equipped with a radial seal
in order to mount gearing.
Order code H23
It must be ensured that the sealing ring is lubricated using
grease, oil mist or oil spray (it is not ermissible to use pressurized
oil > 0.1 bar).
We recommend that the admissible bearing loads are carefully
checked.
Eyebolts and transport
1LE1/1PC1 motors without feet have four cast eyebolts as standard, each offset by 90; in the case of screwed-on feet, two eyebolts are covered by the feet, so in this case only two eyebolts
are available for use.
Frame material
Type series
1LE1/1PC1

Frame size
100 160

Frame material
Aluminum alloy

Frame feet
Cast 1)

Preparation for mountings

The encoders of the modular and special technology can be
fitted at a later time. The motor must be prepared for this. Possible for all 1LE1 motors (with the exception of 1LE1 with option
F90 version Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and
fan cover).
For the brake with order code F01 and for all encoders from the
modular and special technology, this preparation of the shaft
extension on NDE can be ordered with the option Prepared for
mounting, only center hole.
Order code G40
The length of the motor does not change because the shaft extension is still under the fan cover.

For the encoders

1XP8 012-10 order code G01
1XP8 012-20 order code G02
from the modular technology, this preparation of the shaft
extension on NDE can be ordered with the option Prepared for
mounting with shaft D12.
Order code G41
By using option G41, the motor length increases by dimension
I. For explanations of additional dimensions and weights, see
Technology, Dimensions and weights from Page 0/137.
For the encoders
LL 861 900 220 order code G04
HOG 9 D 1024 l order code G05
HOG 10 D 1024 l order code G06
from the special technology, this preparation of the shaft
extension on NDE can be ordered with the option Prepared for
mounting with shaft D16.
Order code G42
By using option G42, the motor length increases by dimension
I. For explanations of additional dimensions and weights, see
Technology, Dimensions and weights from Page 0/137.
Motors that are prepared for additional mountings (order codes
G40, G41, G42) are supplied without protective cover as standard.
If a protective cover is requested as cover or as mechanical protection for mounting provided by the customer, it can be ordered
with order code G43. It must be mounted according to the supplied installation instructions. The protective cover has supports
of different lengths that, depending on the height of the mounting, can be used during the installation.
The standard protective cover (order code H00) is not suitable
for protecting additional mountings such as the rotary pulse
encoder.
The order codes G40, G41 and G42 are not possible in combination with order code L00, vibration quantity level B.

1)

Basic version, cast feet: Special version Screwed-on feet (instead of

cast) with digit 5, 6 and 7 in the 16th position of the Order No. or digit 4
with order code H01. Screwed-on feet are standard for motors with
increased output.

0/118

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Degrees of protection
All motors are designed to IP55 degree of protection. They can
be installed in dusty or humid environments. The motors are suitable for operation in tropical climates. Guide value <60 % relative air humidity at CT 40 C. Other requirements are available on
request.
Brief explanation of the degree of protection
IP55: Protection against harmful dust deposits, protection
against water jets from any direction.
IP56 (non-heavy-sea):
Protection against harmful dust deposits, protection against
water jets from any direction.
Order code H22
DIN EN 60034-5 defines protection level 6 for water protection
as: Protection against water due to heavy seas or water in a
powerful jet. IP56 non-heavy-sea degree of protection can only
be used with the requirement Protection against a powerful jet
and not for the requirement Protection against heavy sea.
Not possible in combination with brake 2LM8 (order code F01).
IP65: Complete protection against dust deposits, protection
against water jets from any direction.
Order code H20
In DIN EN 60034-5, the code 6 for protection against the ingress
of foreign bodies and touch hazard protection for electrical machines is not listed data for code 6 (protection against the ingress of dust) is given in EN 60529.
Not possible in combination with rotary pulse encoder HOG 9 D
1024l (order code G05) and/or brake 2LM8 (order code F01)
and/or in combination with option unpainted, only cast iron
parts primed (S00).
DIN EN 60529 contains a comprehensive description of this degree of protection as well as test conditions.
With motors that have a vertical shaft extension, the end user
must prevent an ingress of fluid along the shaft.
For motors with shaft extension pointing downwards, the version
protective cover for types of construction, order code H00, is
urgently recommended, see also Types of construction, Page
0/116.
With flange-mounting motors, for IM V3 type of construction, collection of fluid in the flange basin can be prevented by drainage
holes (on request).
The condensation drainage holes at the drive end (DE) and nondrive end (NDE) are sealed (IP55) on delivery. If the condensation drainage holes are ordered for motors fo the IM B6, IM B7 or
IM B8 type of construction (feet located on side or top), the position of the drainage holes will be in the correct position for the
type of construction.
Order code H03

When the motors are used or stored outdoors we reccommend

that they are kept under some sort of cover so that they are not
subjected to direct intensive solar radiation, rain, snow, ice or
dust over a long period of time. In such cases, technical consultation may be appropriate.
When the motors are used outdoors or in a corrosive environment, it is recommended that non-rusting screws are used externally.
Order code H07
Vibration-proof version
A load of 1.5 g in all 3 planes for up to 1 % of the service life of
the motor is possible.
Order code H02
For availability of individual options for the relevant motor series,
see section Special versions in catalog part 1.
Noise levels for mains-fed operation
The noise levels are measured in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 1680 in a dead room. It is specified as the A-valued
measuring-surface sound pressure level LpfA in dB (A).
This is the spatial mean value of the sound pressure levels measured on the measuring surface. The measuring surface is a
cube 1 m away from the surface of the motor. The sound power
level is also specified as LWA in dB (A).
The specified values are valid at 50 Hz at rated output (see the
Selection and ordering data). The tolerance is +3 dB. At 60 Hz,
the values are approximately 4 dB (A) higher. Please inquire
about the noise levels for motors with converter-fed operation.
To reduce noise levels, 2-pole motors with frame size 132 S can
be fitted with an axial-flow fan that is only suitable for one direction of rotation. The values can be taken from the table Lownoise version below.
Clockwise rotation
Order code F77
Counter-clockwise rotation
Order code F78
A second shaft extension and/or mountings (mounting of brake,
external fan, or encoder) are not possible.
Low-noise version
Type series
Frame size

1LE1 1)

132
160

2-pole motors
LpfA
dB (A)
60
60

LWA
dB (A)
72
72

A metal fan cover is used as standard for horizontal types of construction and types of constructions with shaft extension facing
upwards (14th position of Order No. letter A, T, U, V, D, F, H, J,
K, L or N) in combination with condensation drainage holes, order code H03, to facilitate mounting/demounting.

1)

With the exception of 1LE1 with option F90 version Forced-air cooled
motors without external fan and fan cover.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/119

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Balance and vibration quantity
All of the rotors are dynamically balanced with an inserted half
key. This corresponds to vibration quantity level A (normal/standard). The vibrational characteristics and behavior of electrical
machinery is specified in DIN EN 60034-14 Sept. 2004. Based
on DIN ISO 8821, the key convention half key (H) must be used
for balancing.
The type of key convention used for balancing is stamped on the
face of the DE/NDE.
F = Balancing with full key
(Full-key convention)
H = Balancing with half key
(Half-key convention) standard
N = Balancing without key
Plain text required (Convention without key)
This is indicated on the rating plate of motors up to frame size 112.
Full-key balancing or balancing with full-key (F) is possible on request with order code L02 (additional charge).

Vibration quantity level A is the standard version and is valid for

a rated frequency of 60 Hz.
Low-vibration version B can be supplied to fulfill stricter requirements on smooth running (additional charge).
Vibration quantity level B
Not possible with parallel roller bearings.
Order code L00
The order code L00 vibration quantity level B is not possible in
combination with order codes G40, G41 and G42.
The limits stated in the table are applicable for uncoupled, idling
motors in free suspension.
For converter-fed operation with frequencies greater than 60 Hz,
special balancing is required for compliance with the specified
limit values (plain text: max. supply frequency/speed).
For further details, see the online help in the SD configurator
(available soon).

Balancing without featherkey (N) is possible on request by

specifying code L01 (additional charge).
Limits (rms values) for max. vibration quantity of vibration distance (s), vibration speed (v) and acceleration (a) for the shaft height H
Vibration quantity
Machine installation
Shaft height H in mm
level
56 H 132
132 < H 280
H > 280
srms
vrms
arms
srms
vrms
arms
srms
m
mm/s
mm/s2
m
mm/s
mm/s2
m
A
Free suspension
25
1.6
2.5
35
2.2
3.5
45
Rigid clamping
21
1.3
2.0
29
1.8
2.8
37
B
Free suspension
11
0.7
1.1
18
1.1
1.7
29
Rigid clamping

14
0.9
1.4
24

For details, see standard DIN EN 60034-14, Sept. 2004.

0/120

Siemens D 81.1 2008

vrms
mm/s
2.8
2.3
1.8
1.5

arms
mm/s2
4.4
3.6
2.8
2.4

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Shaft and rotor

Standard shaft made of non-rusting steel

Shaft extension

For motor series 1LE1, a standard shaft made of non-rusting

steel can be ordered. This is only possible for shaft extensions
of standard dimensions. For non-standard shaft dimensions,
there will be an additional charge!
Order code L06

60 center hole to DIN 332, Part 2 with M3 to M24 tapped hole

depending on the shaft diameter (see dimension tables, Pages
1/68 to 1/75.)
Second standard shaft extension.
Order code L05

Please inquire about other non-rusting materials.

Possible for all 1LE1 motors (with the exception of 1LE1 with option F90 version Forced-air cooled motors without external fan
and fan cover).
The second shaft extension can transmitt the full rated output via
coupling output.
Please also inquire about the transmitted power and admissible
cantilever force if belt pulleys, chains or gear pinions are used
on the second shaft extension.
A second shaft extension is not available if a rotary pulse encoder and/or separately driven fan is mounted. Please inquire if
a brake is mounted.
DE (shaft extension)
Diameter
mm
7 ... 10
>10 ... 13
>13 ... 16
>16 ... 21
>21 ... 24
>24 ... 30
>30 ... 38
>38 ... 50
>50 ... 85
>85 ... 130

1LE1,
1PC1

100
112
132
160

Shaft extension
length E
in mm
Standard Up to
max.
60
120

Shaft extension
diameter D
in mm
Standard Up to
max. 1)
28
30

80
110

38
42

160
220

When motors are ordered which have a longer or shorter shaft

extension as standard, the required position and length of the
featherkey way must be specified in a sketch. It must be ensured
that only featherkeys in accordance with DIN 6885, Form A are
permitted to be used. The location of the featherkey way is in the
center of the shaft extension. The length is defined by the manufacturer normatively.

For order code Y55 and second standard shaft extension L05
(see previous page):
Dimensions D and DA must be less than or equal to the inner
diameter of the roller bearing (see dimension tables under
Dimensions in catalog part 1)
Dimensions E and EA must be smaller than or equal to
2 x length E (standard) of the shaft extension

Admissible changes to the shaft extension:

Frame size

The non-standard cylindrical shaft extension can be used on the

drive end (DE) or non-drive end (NDE). The featherkey is always
supplied with it.
Order code Y55

Not valid for: Conical shafts, non-standard threaded journals,

non-standard shaft tolerances, friction welded journals, extremely thin shafts, special geometry dimensions (e.g. square
journals, etc.), hollow shafts.

Thread
mm
DR M3
DR M4
DR M5
DR M6
DR M8
DR M10
DR M12
DS M16
DS M20
DS M24

Dimensions and tolerances for keyways and keys are designed

to DIN EN 50347. The motors are always supplied with a key inserted in the shaft.
Motor
series

Non-standard cylindrical shaft extension

40
45

Shaft extension with standard dimensions, without featherkey

way
For motor series 1LE1 and 1PC1, the standard shaft extension
can be ordered with standard dimensions without featherkey
way.
Order code L04

A non-standard cylindrical shaft extension can be supplied for

the motor series listed in the table Admissible changes to shaft
extension below up to the specified maximum lengths and
diameters as compared to the standard shaft.
It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that the admissible cantilever forces are reduced in accordance with the nonstandard shaft extension.
Concentricity of shaft extension, coaxiality and linear movement
in accordance with DIN 42955 Tolerance R for flange-mounting
motors
The following are specified in DIN 42955 with Tolerance N
(normal) and Tolerance R (reduced):
1. Concentricity tolerances for the shaft extension
2. Coaxiality tolerances for the shaft extension and flange
centering
3. Linear movement tolerances for the shaft extension and
flange surface
The concentricity of the shaft extension, coaxiality and linear
movement according to DIN 42955 Tolerance R for flangemounting motors can be ordered using order code L08.
This order code can be combined for motors with deep-groove
bearings of series 60.., 62.. and 63 This cannot be supplied in
combination with brake or encoder mounting.
Concentricity of the shaft extension can be ordered according to
DIN 42955 Tolerance R for types of construction without flange
with order code L07.

1)

At maximum admissible diameter, a step increase in shaft diameter is not

possible.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/121

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Bearings and lubrication
Bearing lifetime (nominal lifetime)
The nominal bearing lifetime is defined acc. to standardized calculation procedures (DIN ISO 281) and is reached or even exceeded for 90 % of the bearings when the motors are operated
in compliance with the data provided in the catalog.
Under average operating conditions, a lifetime (Lh10) of 100 000
hours can be achieved.
Generally, the bearing lifetime is defined by the bearing size, the
bearing load, the operating conditions, the speed and the
grease lifetime.
Bearing system
The bearing lifetime of motors with horizontal type of construction is at least 40 000 hours if there is no additional axial loading
at the coupling output and at least 20 000 hours with the maximum admissible loads.
This assumes that the motor is operated at 50 Hz. The nominal
bearing lifetime is reduced for converter-fed operation at higher
frequencies.
For the admissible vibration values measured at the bearing plate,
evaluation zones A and B specified in ISO 10816 are applicable
in order to achieve the calculated lifetime under continuous duty.
If higher vibration speeds will occur under the operating conditions, special arrangements will be necessary (please inquire).
In the basic bearing system, the floating bearing is situated at
the drive end (DE) and the located bearing is situated at the nondrive end (NDE).
The bearing system is axially preloaded with a spring element at
the drive end (DE) to ensure smooth running of the motor without
play. (see Figure 1 of the Diagrams of bearings, Page 0/124).
For frame size 160 and above, the located bearing is axially
secured at the non-drive end (NDE). Up to frame size 132, an
additional axially-secured located bearing can be supplied on
the non-drive end (NDE) complete with a retaining ring (see Figure 2 of the Diagrams of bearings, Page 0/124).
Order code L21
On request, the located bearing can also be supplied at the drive
end (DE) (see Figure 3 of the Diagrams of bearings, Page 0/124).
Order code L20
For increased cantilever forces (e.g. belt drives), reinforced
bearings can be used at the drive end (DE).
Order code L22

0/122

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Motors 1LE1/1PC1 can be supplied with reinforced deep-groove

bearings at both ends (size range 03).
Special bearings for DE and NDE, bearing size 63, the bearing
plates are manufactured from cast-iron for this purpose.
Order code L25
A measuring nipple for SPM shock pulse measurement is
mounted to check bearing vibration. The motors have a tapped
hole for each bearing plate and a measuring nipple with a protective plug. If a second tapped hole is provided, it is fitted with
a sealing plug.
Order code Q01
Bearing selection for increased cantilever forces (see the table
Bearing selection for 1LE1/1PC1 motors Bearing for increased cantilever forces, Page 0/124) Admissible axial
load from Page 0/126.
Permanent lubrication
For permanent lubrication, the bearing grease lifetime is
matched to the bearing lifetime. This can, however, only be
achieved if the motor is operated in accordance with the catalog
specifications.
In the basic version, the motors have permanent lubrication.
Regreasing
For motors which can be regreased at defined regreasing intervals, the bearing lifetime can be extended and/or unfavorable
factors such as temperature, mounting conditions, speed, bearing size and mechanical load can be compensated.
It is possible to regrease motors, shaft heights 100 to 160. A lubricating nipple is optionally provided.
Order code L23
For motors with regreasing device, data concerning regreasing
intervals, grease quantity, type of grease and, where applicable,
additional data are stated on the rating plate or lubricating plate.
For regreasing intervals for basic versions see table Grease lifetime and regreasing intervals for horizontal installation.
The regreasing device cannot be mounted in combination with
mounting of the brake, order code F01.
Mechanical stress and grease lifetime
High speeds that exceed the rated speed with converter-fed
operation and the resulting increased vibrations alter the mechanical running smoothness and the bearings are subjected to
increased mechanical stress. This reduces the grease lifetime
and the bearing lifetime (please inquire where applicable).
For converter-fed operation in particular, compliance with the
mechanical limit speeds nmax. at maximum supply frequency
fmax. is essential, see the following table Mechanical limit
speeds nmax. at maximum supply frequency fmax..

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Mechanical limit speeds nmax. at maximum supply frequency fmax. (standard values)
Motor
frame size

2-pole
nmax.
rpm
6000
6000
5600
4800

fmax.
Hz

4-pole
nmax.
rpm

100
100
90
80

4200
4200
4200
4200

fmax.
Hz

6-pole
nmax.
rpm

140
140
140
140

3600
3600
3600
3600

fmax.
Hz

8-pole
nmax.
rpm

fmax.
Hz

180
180
180
180

3000
3000
3000
3000

200
200
200
200

1LE1/1PC1
100 L
112 M
132 S/M
160 M/L

Grease lifetime and regreasing intervals for horizontal installation

Permanent lubrication 1)
Type series
1LE1/1PC1

Frame size
100 160

Number of poles
2 to 8

Grease lifetime up to CT 40 C 2)
20000 h or 40000 h 3)

Number of poles
2 to 8

Regreasing interval up to CT 40 C 2)
8000 h

Regreasing (basic version) 1)

Type series
1LE1/1PC1

Frame size
100 160

1)

For special uses and special greases, please inquire about grease lifetime
and regreasing intervals.

2)

If the coolant temperature is increased by 10 K, the grease lifetime and

regreasing interval are halved.

3)

40000 h apply to horizontally installed motors with coupling output without

additional axial loads.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/123

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
Bearing selection table for 1LE1/1PC1 motors basic version
The bearing selection tables are only intended for planning purposes. Authoritative information on the actual type of bearings fitted in motors already supplied can be obtained by the factory by
quoting the serial number or can be read from the rating plate.
For motors
frame size

When deep-groove ball bearings with side plates are used, the
side plate is on the inside. Located bearing at drive end (DE) for
1LE1/1PC1 motors, see special version Figure 2 in the Diagrams
of bearings, below on this page.

Number of
poles

Drive end (DE) bearing

Horizontal
type of construction

Vertical
type of construction

Horizontal
type of construction

Vertical
type of construction

100 L

Non-drive end (NDE) bearing

Figure,
below on this page

2 to 8

6206 2ZC3

6206 2ZC3

6206 2ZC3

6206 2ZC3

112 M

2 to 8

6206 2ZC3

6206 2ZC3

6206 2ZC3

6206 2ZC3

Fig. 1

132 S/M

2 to 8

6208 2ZC3 1)

6208 2ZC3 1)

6208 2ZC3 1)

6208 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 1

160 M/L

2 to 8

6209 2ZC3 1)

6209 2ZC3 1)

6209 2ZC3 1)

6209 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 2

1LE1/1PC1
Fig. 1

Bearing selection table for 1LE1/1PC1 motors Bearings for increased cantilever forces Order code L22
Please inquire about noise and vibration data. The bearing selection tables are only intended for planning purposes. Authoritative information on the actual type of bearings fitted in motors
already supplied can be obtained by the factory by quoting the
For motors
frame size

serial number or can be read from the rating plate.

When deep-groove ball bearings with side plates are used, the
side plate is on the inside.

Number of
poles

Drive end (DE) bearing

Horizontal
type of construction

Vertical
type of construction

Horizontal
type of construction

Vertical
type of construction

100 L

Non-drive end (NDE) bearing

Figure,
below on this page

2 to 8

6306 2ZC3 1)

6306 2ZC3 1)

6206 2ZC3 1)

6206 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 1

112 M

2 to 8

6306 2ZC3 1)

6306 2ZC3 1)

6206 2ZC3 1)

6206 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 1

132 S/M

2 to 8

6308 2ZC3 1)

6308 2ZC3 1)

6208 2ZC3 1)

6208 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 1

160 M/L

2 to 8

6309 2ZC3 1)

6309 2ZC3 1)

6209 2ZC3 1)

6209 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 2

1LE1/1PC1

Bearing selection table for 1LE1/1PC1 motors Deep-groove bearings reinforced at both ends Order code L25
Please inquire about noise and vibration data. The bearing selection tables are only intended for planning purposes. Authoritative information on the actual type of bearings fitted in motors
already supplied can be obtained by the factory by quoting the
For motors
frame size

serial number or can be read from the rating plate.

When deep-groove ball bearings with side plates are used, the
side plate is on the inside.

Number of
poles

Drive end (DE) bearing

Horizontal
type of construction

Vertical
type of construction

Horizontal
type of construction

Vertical
type of construction

Non-drive end (NDE) bearing

Figure,
below on this page

2 to 8

6306 2ZC3 1)

6306 2ZC3 1)

6306 2ZC3 1)

6306 2ZC3 1)

112 M

2 to 8

6306 2ZC3

1)

1)

1)

6306 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 1

132 S/M

2 to 8

6308 2ZC3 1)

6308 2ZC3 1)

6308 2ZC3 1)

6308 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 1

160 M/L

2 to 8

6309 2ZC3 1)

6309 2ZC3 1)

6309 2ZC3 1)

6309 2ZC3 1)

Fig. 2

1LE1/1PC1
100 L

6306 2ZC3

6306 2ZC3

Fig. 1

Diagrams of bearings

G_D081_XX_00102

Non-drive end bearing

1)

Bearings with a side plate are used for regreasable versions

(order code L23).

0/124

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Drive-end bearing
Non-drive end bearing
Located bearings for 1LE1 frame size 160

G_D081_XX_00104

Drive-end bearing

Fig. 2:

G_D081_XX_00103

Fig. 3:

Non-drive end bearing

G_D081_XX_00106

Drive-end bearing

G_D081_XX_00101

Fig. 1:

G_D081_XX_00105

General technical data

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Admissible cantilever forces

G_D081_XX_00128a

Admissible cantilever forces, basic version

FQ

x
xmax.

x0

In order to calculate the admissible cantilever forces for a radial

load, the line of force (i.e. the centerline of the pulley) of the
cantilever force FQ (N) must lie within the free shaft extension
(dimension X).
Dimension x [mm] is the distance between the point of application of force FQ and the shaft shoulder. Dimension xmax. corresponds to the length of the shaft extension.
Total cantilever force FQ = c Fu

Admissible cantilever forces for the basic 50 Hz version

Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values fr x = l
(l = shaft extension)
For motors
Admissible cantilever force
at x0
at xmax.
Frame size Order No.
Number of Type
Type
poles
N
N

1LE1 motor values for EFF1 motors with increased output 1)

(Self-ventilated motors with increased output and high
efficiency):
100

112

132

160

The pre-tension factor c is a value gained from experience from

the belt manufacturer. The following approximate value can be
assumed:
For normal flat leather belts with an idler pulley c = 2;
for V-belts c = 2 to 2.5;
for special synthetic belts (depending on the type of load and
type of belt) c = 2 to 2.5.
The circumferential force Fu (N) is calculated using the following
equation

P
n D
circumferential force in N
rated motor output (transmitted power) in kW
fan speed in rpm
belt pulley diameter in mm

Fu = 2 10 7
Fu
P
n
D

1010
1230
1440
970
1235
1440
1470
1830
2150
1550
1910
2230

825
1010
1180
785
1000
1165
1180
1470
1730
1270
1550
1810

1LE1 motors, standard values for EFF1 motors 1)

(Self-ventilated energy-saving motors with high efficiency/
Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and fan cover
with high efficiency)
1PC1 motors, standard values for EFF1 motors 1)
(Self-cooled motors with high efficiency):
100

The admissible cantilever forces at 60 Hz are approx. 80 % of

the 50 Hz values (please inquire).

112

Refer to Bearing design for increased cantilever forces, Page

0/126.

132

160

1)

2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6

Admissible cantilever forces for the basic 50 Hz version

Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values fr x = l
(l = shaft extension)
For motors
Admissible cantilever force
at x0
at xmax.
Frame size Order No.
Number of Type
Type
poles
N
N

The pulleys are standardized acc. to DIN 2211, Sheet 3.

It should be observed that for types of construction IM B6,

IM B7, IM B8, IM V5 and IM V6 the belt tension is only permitted
to act parallel to the mounting plane or towards the mounting
plane and the feet must be supported. Both feet must be secured for foot-mounting types of construction.

1LE1001-1AA
1LE1001-1AB
1LE1001-1AC
1LE1001-1BA
1LE1001-1BB
1LE1001-1BC
1LE1001-1CA
1LE1001-1CB
1LE1001-1CC
1LE1001-1DA
1LE1001-1DB
1LE1001-1DC

1LE1001-1AA
1PC1001-1AA
1LE1001-1AB
1PC1001-1AB
1LE1001-1AC
1PC1001-1AC
1LE1001-1AD
1PC1001-1AD
1LE1001-1BA
1PC1001-1BA
1LE1001-1BB
1PC1001-1BB
1LE1001-1BC
1PC1001-1BC
1LE1001-1BD
1PC1001-1BD
1LE1001-1CA
1PC1001-1CA
1LE1001-1CB
1PC1001-1CB
1LE1001-1CC
1PC1001-1CC
1LE1001-1CD
1PC1001-1CD
1LE1001-1DA
1PC1001-1DA
1LE1001-1DB
1PC1001-1DB
1LE1001-1DC
1PC1001-1DC
1LE1001-1DD
1PC1001-1DD

1020

815

1250

1000

1450

1155

1615

1290

1000

790

1250

990

1450

1150

1610

1275

1505

1170

1880

1460

2170

1680

2420

1880

1560

1240

2040

1590

2350

1820

2610

2030

The admissible cantilever force load of EFF2 motors can be increased by

up to 5 %.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/125

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
Bearing design for increased cantilever forces

Admissible cantilever forces for the basic 50 Hz version

Deep-groove ball bearings at the drive end (DE) Order code L22
Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values fr x = l (l = shaft extension)
For motors
Admissible cantilever force
at x0
at xmax.
Frame size Order No.
Number of Type
Type
poles
N
N

G_D081_XX_00128a

General technical data

FQ

1LE1 motors standard values for EFF1 motors 1)

(Self-ventilated energy-saving motors with high efficiency/
Forced-air cooled motors without external fan and fan cover
with high efficiency)
1PC1 motors, standard values for EFF1 motors 1)
(Self-cooled motors with high efficiency):

x0

xmax.

It should be observed that for types of construction IM B6, IM B7,

IM B8, IM V5 and IM V6 the belt tension is only permitted to act
parallel to the mounting plane or towards the mounting plane
and the feet must be supported. Both feet must be secured for
foot-mounted types of construction.

100

Admissible cantilever forces for the basic 50 Hz version

Deep-groove ball bearings at the drive end (DE) Order code L22
Valid are: x0 values for x = 0 and xmax. values fr x = l
(l = shaft extension)
For motors
Admissible cantilever force
at x0
at xmax.
Frame size Order No.
Number of Type
Type
poles
N
N

112

1LE1 motor values for EEF 1 motors with increased output 1)

(Self-ventilated motors with increased output and high
efficiency):
100

112

132

160

1LE1001-1AA
1LE1001-1AB
1LE1001-1AC
1LE1001-1BA
1LE1001-1BB
1LE1001-1BC
1LE1001-1CA
1LE1001-1CB
1LE1001-1CC
1LE1001-1DA
1LE1001-1DB
1LE1001-1DC

2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6

1585
1960
2270
1545
1960
2270
2285
2860
3320
2800
3450
4000

1300
1610
1865
1250
1585
1835
1840
2300
2670
2240
2270
3200

132

160

1LE1001-1AA
1PC1001-1AA
1LE1001-1AB
1PC1001-1AB
1LE1001-1AC
1PC1001-1AC
1LE1001-1AD
1PC1001-1AD
1LE1001-1BA
1PC1001-1BA
1LE1001-1BB
1PC1001-1BB
1LE1001-1BC
1PC1001-1BC
1LE1001-1BD
1PC1001-1BD
1LE1001-1CA
1PC1001-1CA
1LE1001-1CB
1PC1001-1CB
1LE1001-1CC
1PC1001-1CC
1LE1001-1CD
1PC1001-1CD
1LE1001-1DA
1PC1001-1DA
1LE1001-1DB
1PC1001-1DB
1LE1001-1DC
1PC1001-1DC
1LE1001-1DD
1PC1001-1DD

1590

1270

1970

1575

2270

1815

2520

2015

1565

1240

1965

1555

2270

1800

2510

1990

2310

1795

2900

2250

3330

2580

3700

2870

2810

2170

3540

2750

4070

3160

4510

3500

Admissible axial load

1LE1 motors in vertical type of construction basic version (exept motors with increased output)
Frame
size

100
112
132
160

Shaft extension pointing

3000 rpm
downwards
upwards
Load
Load
down up
down up
N
N
N
N
140
700
550
280
140
710
550
300
200
1200
950
470
1500
1400
950
1900

1500 rpm
downwards
Load
down up
N
N
130
990
130
1000
180
1680
1900
1800

upwards
Load
down up
N
N
820
285
820
310
1200
470
1300
2200

The values shown do not assume a cantilever force on the shaft

extension.
The admissible loads are valid for operation at 50 Hz; for 60 Hz,
please inquire.

1)

The admissible cantilever force load of EFF2 motors can be increased by

up to 5 %.

0/126

Siemens D 81.1 2008

1000 rpm
downwards
Load
down up
N
N
130
1280
130
1290
180
1900
2200
2200

upwards
Load
down up
N
N
1110
285
1110
310
1600
470
1600
2700

750 rpm
downwards
Load
down up
N
N
130
1560
130
1570
190
2200
2700
2700

upwards
Load
down up
N
N
1390
285
1390
310
1900
440
1950
2900

The calculation of the admissible axial load was based on the drive
with generally available coupling. For suppliers, see the relevant
section of the catalog, section Accessories, Page 1/64.
Please inquire if the load direction alternates.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
1LE1/1PC1 motors in horizontal type of construction basic version (exept motors with increased output)
Frame
size

100
112
132
160

3000 rpm
TenThrust load (N)
sile
with radial load
load
at
x0
xmax.
N
N
N
220
450
350
220
450
350
350
650
520
1500
850
720

without
radial
load
N
630
630
1200
1500

1500 rpm
TenThrust load (N)
sile
with radial load
load
at
x0
xmax.
N
N
N
220
600
500
220
600
500
350
850
700
1500
1050
920

without
radial
load
N
910
910
1600
1800

The values shown do not assume a cantilever force on the shaft

extension.
The admissible loads are valid for operation at 50 Hz; for 60 Hz,
please inquire.

1000 rpm
TenThrust load (N)
sile
with radial load
load
at
x0
xmax.
N
N
N
220
650
550
220
650
550
350
1020
890
1500
1250
1120

without
radial
load
N
1200
1200
1900
2200

750 rpm
TenThrust load (N)
sile
with radial load
load
at
x0
xmax.
N
N
N
220
750
650
220
750
650
350
1150
1020
1500
1350
1220

without
radial
load
N
1480
1480
2200
2600

The calculation of the admissible axial load was based on the

drive with generally available coupling. For suppliers, see the
relevant section of the catalog Accessories, Page 1/64.
Please inquire if the load direction alternates.

Modular technology
Basic versions
The range of potential applications for the 1LE1 motors (with the
exception of 1LE1 with option F90 version Forced-air cooled
motors without external fan and fan cover and 1PC1) can be
broadened considerably by mounting the following modules
(e.g. as brake motors).
1XP8 012 rotary pulse encoder
Separately driven fan
Brake
The brake must always be mounted in the factory for safety reasons. The rotary pulse encoder and/or the separately driven fan
can also be retrofitted.
The degree of protection of the motors with modular technology
is IP55. Higher degrees of protection on request.
When a rotary pulse encoder, brake or separately driven fan is
mounted, the length of the motor increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights from Page 0/137.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/127

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

1XP8 012 rotary pulse encoder
The rotary pulse encoder can be supplied already mounted in
an HTL version as 1XP8 012-10 with order code G01 or in a TTL
version as 1XP8 012-20 with order code G02. The rotary pulse
encoder can only be mounted on a standard non-drive end
(NDE), i.e. a second shaft extension cannot be supplied.
The encoder can be retrofitted. The motor must be prepared for
this. When the motor is ordered, the option Prepared for mountings, center hole only, order code G40, or the option Prepared
for mountings with shaft D12, order code G41, must be specified (see Mechanical design and degrees of protection, Page
0/118).
Technical data of rotary pulse encoders
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs
Pulse offset between the two outputs
Output amplitude
Edge interval
Sampling rate
Maximum speed
Transportation/storage temperature range
Operating temperature range flange socket or
fixed cable
Operating temperature range flexible cable
Degree of protection
Maximum admissible radial cantilever force
Maximum admissible axial force
Connection system
Certification
Weight

0/128

Siemens D 81.1 2008

The 1XP8 012 rotary pulse encoder is suitable for standard applications. For further encoders, see Special technology, Page
0/134.
When the rotary pulse encoder is mounted, the length of the motor increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights
from Page 0/137.
The rotary pulse encoders of Modular technology and Special
technology are fitted as standard with a protective cover made
of non-corrosive sheet steel.
Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher
than +40 C on request.

1XP8 012-10 (HTL version)

1XP8 012-20 (TTL version)
+10 V to +30 V
5V 10 %
150 mA
120 mA
max. 100 mA
max. 20 mA
1024
1024
2 square-wave pulses A, B 2 inverted square-wave pulses A, B
Zero pulse and inverted zero pulse
90
90
UHigh > 2.5 V
UHigh = UB 2.5 V
ULow = 1.6 V
ULow < 0.5 V
0.43 s
0.43 s
300 kHz
300 kHz
6000 rpm
6000 rpm
30 to +80 C
30 to +80 C
40 to +100 C
40 to +100 C
10 to +100 C
IP66
60 N
40 N
12-pin connector (mating connector is supplied)
CSA, UL
0.3 kg

10 to +100 C
IP66
60 N
40 N
CSA, UL
0.3 kg

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Separately driven fan
The use of a separately driven fan is recommended to increase
motor utilization at low speeds and to limit noise generation at
speeds significantly higher than the synchronous speed. Both of
these results can only be achieved with converter-fed operation.
Please inquire about traction and vibratory operation.
The separately driven fan can be supplied already fitted,
order code F70.

It can also be ordered separately and retrofitted. For selection

information and order numbers, see the section Accessories
(available soon). A rating plate listing all the important data is
fitted to the separately driven fan. Please note the direction of
rotation of the separately driven fan (axial-flow fan) when connecting it. Admissible coolant temperatures CTmin. 25 C,
CTmax. +65 C 1), lower/higher coolant temperatures on request.
When the separately driven fan is mounted, the length of the motor increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights
from Page 0/137.

Technical data of the separately driven fan (acc. to DIN EN 60034-1 Tolerance)
Frame size
Rated voltage range
Frequency
V
Hz
100
1 AC
230 to 277
50
3 AC
220 to 290
50
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
1 AC
230 to 277
60
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60
112
1 AC
230 to 277
50
3 AC
220 to 290
50
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
1 AC
230 to 277
60
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60
132
1 AC
230 to 277
50
3 AC
220 to 290
50
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
1 AC
230 to 277
60
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60
160
1 AC
230 to 277
50
3 AC
220 to 290
50
3 AC
380 to 500 Y
50
3 AC
220 to 332
60
3 AC
380 to 575 Y
60

1)

Rated speed
rpm
2790
2830
2830
3280
3490
3490
2720
2770
2770
3000
3280
3280
2860
2880
2880
3380
3470
3470
2780
2840
2830
3400
3400

Power consumption
kW
0.075
0.086
0.086
0.094
0.093
0.093
0.073
0.085
0.085
0.107
0.094
0.094
0.115
0.138
0.138
0.185
0.148
0.148
0.236
0.220
0.220
0.284
0.284

Rated current
A
0.29
0.27
0.16
0.28
0.27
0.16
0.26
0.27
0.15
0.31
0.28
0.16
0.40
0.45
0.24
0.59
0.41
0.24
0.96
0.76
0.43
0.94
0.56

The admissible coolant temperature for single phase versions (1 AC) for
frame size 160 is CTmax. +50 C.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/129

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Brakes
S Gap

Spring-operated disk brakes are used for the brakes with order
code F01. When the brake is ordered, the supply voltage must
be specified. The supply voltage for brakes is explained under
Modular technology Additional versions, Page 0/133.
For the design of each brake type, the braking time, run-on
revolutions, braking enery per braking procedure as well as the
service life of the brake linings, see Configuration of motors with
brakes, Page 0/132.

Friction surface

Solenoid
assembly

Armature disk

Pressure
springs

When a brake is mounted, the length of the motor increases by I.

For an explanation of the additional dimensions and weights, see
Technology, Dimensions and weights from Page 0/137.
The brake can be retrofitted by authorized partners. The motor
must be prepared for this. When the motor is ordered, the option
Prepared for mountings, center hole only, order code G40,
must be specified (see Mechanical design and degrees of protection, Page 0/118).

Hub

Shaft

Axially shiftable
rotor

2LM8 spring-operated disk brake

The 2LM8 brake has IP55 degree of protection.
Please inquire if motors with brakes are to be operated below the
freezing point or in very humid environments (e.g. close to the
sea) with long standstill times. Please inquire if the brake motors
are used for converter-fed operation with low speeds.

Pressure
springs

G_D081_EN_00076

Design and mode of operation

Design of the 2LM8 spring-operated disk brake

The brake takes the form of a single-disk brake with two friction
surfaces.

Rating plate

The braking torque is generated by friction when pressure is applied by one or more pressure springs in the de-energized state.
The brake is released electromagnetically.

The following brake data are specified on the motor rating plate.
Brake type, supply voltage, frequency, current, temperature
class, braking torque

When the motor brakes, the rotor which can be axially shifted on
the hub or the shaft is pressed via the armature disk against the
friction surface by means of the springs. In the braked state, there
is a gap SGap between the armature disk and the solenoid component. To release the brake, the solenoid is energized with DC
voltage. The resulting magnetic force pulls the armature disk
against the spring force on to the solenoid component. The spring
force is then no longer applied to the rotor which can rotate freely.
Operating values for spring-operated brakes with standard excitation
For motor Brake type
Frame
size

100

112

132

160

1)

2LM8 040-5NA10
2LM8 040-5NA60
2LM8 040-5NA80
2LM8 060-6NA10
2LM8 060-6NA60
2LM8 060-6NA80
2LM8 100-7NA10
2LM8 100-7NA60
2LM8 100-7NA80
2LM8 260-8NA10
2LM8 260-8NA60
2LM8 260-8NA80

Rated
braking
torque
at
100 rpm

Rated braking torque

at 100 rpm in % at the
following speeds
1500
3000
Max.
rpm
rpm
speed

Supply
voltage

Current/power
input

Brake
Brake
applica- release
tion time time
t2 2)

Nm

ms

ms

Service capability of the brake

Brake
Noise
Lifetime Air gap
moment level Lp of brake adjustof inertia with
lining L ment
rated air
required
gap
after
braking
energy
LN
kgm2
dB (A)
Nm 10 Nm 10
6

40

81

74

66

43

140

0.00036 80

1350

115

80

73

65

53

60

210

0.00063 77

1600

215

100

79

72

65

55

50

270

0.0015

77

2450

325

260

75

68

65

0.2
0.22
1.67
0.25
0.28
2.1
0.27
0.31
2.3
0.5
0.47
4.2

40

60

AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24
AC 230
AC 400
DC 24

100

165

340

0.0073

79

7300

935

For 400 V AC and for 24 V DC, the power can deviate by up to +10 % as a
result of the selected supply voltage.

0/130

Siemens D 81.1 2008

1)

2)

The specified switching times are valid for switching on the DC side with a
rated release travel and with the coil already warm. They are average values which may vary depending on factors such as the rectifier type and
the release travel. The brake application time for switching on the AC side,
for example, is approximately 6 times longer than for switching on the DC
side.

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Lifetime of the brake lining

Maximum admissible speeds

The braking energy LN up to when the brake should be adjusted,

depends on various factors. The main influencing factors include the masses to be braked, the operating speed, the switching frequency and therefore the temperature at the frictional surfaces. It is therefore not possible to specify a value for the friction
energy until readjustment that is valid for all operating conditions.

The maximum admissible speeds from which emergency stops

can be made, are listed in the next table. These speeds should
be considered as recommended values and must be checked
under actual operating conditions.
The maximum admissible friction energy depends on the switching frequency and is shown for the individual brakes in the following diagram. Increased wear can be expected when the
brakes are used for emergency stops.

When used as operating brake, the specific frictional surface

wear (wear volume for the frictional work) is approximately 0.05
up to 2 cm3/kWh.

Admissible switching energy Q adm

10 6

2LM8 400
10 5

2LM8 315
2LM8 260
2LM8 100
2LM8 060
2LM8 040
2LM8 020

10

2LM8 010

2LM8 005

10 3

G_D081_EN_00077b

10 2

10
1

10

10 2

10 3

10 4

Switching frequency S n

For motor Brake type

Frame
size

100
112
132
160

2LM8 040-5NA . .
2LM8 060-6NA . .
2LM8 100-7NA . .
2LM8 260-8NA . .

Maximum admissible speeds

Max. adm. Max. adm. no-load
operating
speed with emergency
speed if
stop function
max. adm. Horizontal
Vertical
operating
mounting
mounting
energy
utilized
rpm
rpm
rpm
3000
6000
6000
3000
6000
6000
3000
5300
5000
1500
4400
3200

Changing the braking torque

Reduction
Dimension Min. brakper notch
O1
ing torque

Readjusting the air gap

Rated air
Maximum
gap
air gap
SGap Rated
SGap max.

Min. rotor
thickness
hmin.

Nm
1.29
1.66
1.55
5.6

mm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4

mm
8.0
7.5
8.0
12.0

mm
12.5
11.0
13.0
17.0

Nm
21.3
32.8
61.1
157.5

mm
0.65
0.75
0.75
1.2

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/131

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Changing the braking torque

Braking energy per braking operation Qadm

The brake is supplied with the braking torque already set. For
2LM8 brakes, the torque can be reduced to the dimension O1 by
unscrewing the adjusting ring with a hook spanner. The braking
torque changes by the values shown in the above table for each
notch of the adjusting ring.

The braking energy per braking operation in Nm comprises the

energy of the moments of inertia to be braked QKin and the energy QL, which must be applied in order to brake against a load
torque:

Readjusting the air gap

Qadm = QKin+QL
a.) The energy of the moments of inertia in Nm

Under normal operating conditions, the brake is practically

maintenance-free. The air gap SGap must only be checked at
regular intervals if the application requires an extremely large
amount of frictional energy and readjusted to the rated gap
SGap rated at the latest when the maximum air gap SGap max. is
reached.
G_M015_EN_00196

2
J n rated

Q Kin =

182.4

nrated Rated speed before braking in rpm

J
Total moment of inertia in kg m2
b.) The braking energy in Nm against a load torque

T L n rated t Br

QL =
TL
TL
TL

19.1
average load torque in Nm
is positive if it acts against the brake
is negative if it supports the brake

Run-on revolutions U
The number of run-on revolutions U of the motor with brake can
be calculated as follows:

U=

h min.

S Gap
(S Gap rated )
(S Gap max. )

t2

n rated
60

t Br
2

Brake application time in ms

O1

Configuration of motors with brakes

Lifetime of the brake lining L and readjustment of the air gap

The brake lining wears due to friction which increases the air gap
and the release time for the brake at standard excitation.
When the brake lining is worn out, it can be replaced easily.

Braking time
The time it takes the motor to come to a standstill comprises two
components:

In order to calculate the lifetime of the brake lining in terms of operations Smax., the lifetime of the brake lining L in Nm must be divided by the braking energy Qadm:

a.) The application time of the brake t2

b.) The braking time tBr

t Br =

t2 +

S max =

L
Q adm

J n rated
9.55 (T B

TL )

tBr
Braking time in s
J
Total moment of inertia in kgm2
nrated Rated speed of the motor with brake in rpm
Rated braking torque in Nm
TB
Average load torque in Nm
TL
(if TL supports braking, TL is positive)

0/132

Siemens D 81.1 2008

The interval between adjustments N in switching frequencies

can be calculated in terms of operations by dividing the braking
energy LN which the brake can output until it is necessary to readjust the working air gap by Qadm:

N=

LN
Q adm

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Additional versions

Bridge rectifier / half-wave rectifier

2LM8 spring-operated disk brake

Brakes are connected through a standard bridge or half-wave

rectifier or directly to the 2LM8 brake. See the circuit diagrams
below.

Motor series
This brake is mounted on 1LE1 motors as standard (with the
exception of 1LE1 with order code F90 version Forced-air
cooled motors without external fan and fan cover, and 1PC1).

D1

2+

1+

2+

Voltage and frequency

The solenoid coil and the brake rectifier can be connected to the
following voltages or can be supplied for the following voltages:
Brake supply voltage: 24 V DC
Order code F10
Brake supply voltage: 230 V AC
Order code F11
Brake supply voltage: 400 V AC
(directly at the terminal strip)
Order code F12

V1

D2

V2

_
G_D081_XX_00085

Half-wave rectifier, 400 V AC

When 60 Hz is used, the voltage for the brake must not be

increased!
Order codes F10 , F11 and F12 may only be used in conjunction
with order code F01.

1+
D1

2+

Connections
Labeled terminals are provided in the main connection box of
the motor to connect the brake.
The AC voltage for the brake excitation winding is connected to
the two free terminals of the rectifier block (~).
The brake can be released when the motor is at a standstill by
separately exciting the solenoid. In this case, an AC voltage
must be connected at the rectifier block terminals. The brake
remains released as long as this voltage is present.

2+

D2
V2
D3

D4

_
G_D081_XX_00086

V1

Bridge rectifier, 230 V AC

The rectifier is protected against overvoltages by varistors in the

input and output circuits.

G_D081_XX_00087

For 24 V DC brakes, the brake terminals are directly connected

to the DC voltage source.
See the circuit diagrams below.
Fast brake application
If the brake is disconnected from the line supply, the brake is applied. The application time for the brake disk is delayed as a result of the inductance of the solenoid (shutdown on the AC side).
This results in a considerable delay before the brake is mechanically applied. In order to achieve short brake application times,
the circuit must be interrupted on the DC side. To realize this, the
wire jumpers, located between contacts 1+ and 2+ at the rectifier are removed and replaced by the contacts of an external
switch (see circuit diagrams below).

L+ L-

Brake connection for 24 V DC

Manual brake release with lever

The brakes can be supplied with a mechanical manual release
with lever.
Order code F50.
The dimensions of the brake lever depend on the motor frame
size and can be read from the dimension drawing generator for
motors in the SD configurator tool for low-voltage motors.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/133

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
Special technology
The range of Special technology comprises rotary pulse encoders for the 1LE1 motors (with the exception of 1LE1 with
order code F90 version Forced-air cooled motors without
external fan and fan cover, and 1PC1).
The 1LE1 motors with the order codes F70 (mounted separately
driven fan), F01 (mounted brake) and F01 + F70 (mounted brake
and separately driven fan) from the Modular technology range
can be combined with the LL 861 900 200, HOG 9 D 1024 l and
HOG 10 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoders from the Special technology range.
When a rotary pulse encoder is mounted, the length of the motor
increases by I. For an explanation of the additional dimensions
and weights, see Technology, Dimensions and weights from
Page 0/137.
The rotary pulse encoders of Modular technology and Special
technology are fitted as standard with a protective cover made
of non-corrosive sheet steel.
Rotary pulse encoder LL 861 900 220

G7

100

69.5

G_M015_EN_00212

24.5

16

General technical data

67

With its rugged construction, this rotary pulse encoder is also

suitable for difficult operating environments. It is resistant to
shock and vibration and has insulated bearings.
The LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder can be supplied
already mounted.
Order code G04.
The LL 861 900 220 rotary pulse encoder can be retrofitted. The
motor must be prepared for this. When the motor is ordered, the
option Prepared for mountings, center hole only, order code
G40, or the option Prepared for mountings with shaft D16, order code G42, must be specified (see Mechanical design and
degrees of protection, Page 0/118). The rotary pulse encoder is
not part of the scope of supply in this case.
The version of the rotary pulse encoder with a diagnostics system (ADS) can be supplied by Leine and Linde.
Manufacturer:
Leine and Linde (Deutschland) GmbH
Bahnhofstrae 36
73430 Aalen
Tel. +49 (0) 73 61-78093-0
Fax +49 (0) 73 61-78093-11
http://www.leinelinde.com
e-mail: info@leinelinde.se

0/134

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Mounting dimensions of rotary pulse encoder LL 861 900 220

Technical data for LL 861 900 220 (HTL version)

Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher
than +40 C on request.
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

+9 V to +30 V
max. 80 mA
40 mA
1024
6 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, A, B, B, 0, 0
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 25 el.
Output amplitude
UHigh >20 V
ULow <2.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 10 %
Edge steepness
50 V/s (without load)
Maximum frequency
100 kHz for 350 m cable
Maximum speed
4000 rpm
Temperature range
20 to +80 C
Degree of protection
IP65
Maximum adm. radial cantilever force 300 N
Maximum adm. axial force
100 N
Connection system
Terminal strips in encoder
Cable connection M20 x 1.5 radial
Weight
Approx. 1.3 kg

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
HOG 9 D 1024 rotary pulse encoder

104.5

88

16 H7

~67

G_M015_EN_00213

The encoder is fitted with insulated bearings.

Mounting dimensions for HOG 9 D 1024 l rotary pulse encoder

The HOG 9 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder can be supplied already mounted.
Order code G05.

Technical data for HOG 9 D 1024 (TTL version)

The HOG 9 D 1024 l rotary pulse encoder can be retrofitted. The

motor must be prepared for this. When the motor is ordered, the
option Prepared for mountings, center hole only, order code
G40, or the option Prepared for mountings with shaft D16, order code G42, must be specified (see Mechanical design and
degrees of protection, Page 0/118). The rotary pulse encoder is
not part of the scope of supply in this case.
Manufacturer:
Baumer Hbner GmbH
Planufer 92b
10967 Berlin
Tel. +49 (0) 30-6 90 03-0
Fax +49 (0) 30-6 90 03-1 04
http://www.baumerhuebner.com
e-mail: info@baumerhuebner.com

Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher

than +40 C on request.
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

+9 V to +30 V
50 mA to 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA peak
1024
4 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A, B
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
20 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP56
Maximum adm. radial cantilever force 150 N
Maximum adm. axial force
100 N
Connection system
Radial right-angle plug (mating connector is part of the scope of supply)
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
73 522 B
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 0.9 kg

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/135

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
HOG 10 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder

G_D081_XX_00143

105

16 H7

General technical data

112

This encoder is extremely rugged and is therefore suitable for

difficult operating conditions. It is fitted with insulated bearings.
The HOG 10 D 1024 I rotary pulse encoder can be supplied already mounted.
Order code G06.
The HOG 10 D 1024 l rotary pulse encoder can be retrofitted.
The motor must be prepared for this. When the motor is ordered,
the option Prepared for mountings, center hole only, order
code G40, or the option Prepared for mountings with shaft
D16, order code G42, must be specified (see Mechanical design and degrees of protection, Page 0/118). The rotary pulse
encoder is not part of the scope of supply in this case.
Manufacturer:
Baumer Hbner GmbH
Planufer 92b
10967 Berlin
Tel. +49 (0) 30-6 90 03-0
Fax +49 (0) 30-6 90 03-1 04
http://www.baumerhuebner.com
e-mail: info@baumerhuebner.com

0/136

Siemens D 81.1 2008

Mounting dimensions for HOG 10 D 1024 l rotary pulse encoder

Technical data for HOG 10 D 1024 (HTL version)

Mounting of encoder at temperatures below 20 C and higher
than +40 C on request.
Supply voltage UB
Current input without load
Admissible load current per output
Pulses per revolution
Outputs

+9 V to +30 V
Approx. 100 mA
60 mA, 300 mA peak
1024
4 short-circuit proof square-wave
pulses A, B and A, B
Pulse offset between the two outputs 90 20 %
Output amplitude
UHigh UB 3.5 V
ULow 1.5 V
Mark space ratio
1:1 20 %
Edge steepness
10 V/s
Maximum frequency
120 kHz
Maximum speed
7000 rpm
Temperature range
20 to +100 C
Degree of protection
IP66
Maximum adm. radial cantilever force 150 N
Maximum adm. axial force
80 N
Connection system
Terminals, cable connection
M20 x 1.5
Mech. design acc. to Hbner
74 055 B
Ident. No.
Weight
Approx. 1.6 kg

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Dimensions and weight

Fig. 3

Rotary pulse encoder (on cover)

Order code G01/G02/G04/G05/G06
[protective cover as standard]

Fig. 5

Separately driven fan

Order code F70

Fig. 2

Standard protective cover for types of construction

Order code H00

Fig. 4

Brake and rotary pulse encoder (on cover)

Order code F01
+ G01/G02/G04/G05/G06
[optionally with manual release, order code F50;
protective cover as standard]

Fig. 6

Brake and separately driven fan

Order code F01 + F70
[optionally with manual release, order code F50]

G_D081_XX_00191

Brake
Order code F01
[optionally with manual release, order code F50]

G_D081_XX_00193

G_D081_XX_00192

G_D018_XX_00190

Fig. 1

G_D081_XX_00195

G_D081_XX_00194

Dimensions l and weights, see from Page 0/139.

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/137

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
Rotary pulse encoder (under the cover) and separately
driven fan
Order code F70
+ G01/G02/G04/G05/G06

Fig. 9

Protective cover for separately driven fan

Order code H00

Fig. 8

Brake, rotary pulse encoder (under the cover) and separately

driven fan
Order code F01 + F70
+ G01/G02/G04/G05/G06
[optionally with manual release, order code F50]

G_D081_XX_00197

G_D081_XX_00196

Fig. 7

G_D081_XX_00198

General technical data

Fig. 10 Prepared for mountings only center hole

(for brake order code F01 and/or rotary pulse encoder
order codes G01/G02/G04/G05/G06)
Order code G40

Fig. 11 Prepared for mountings with shaft D12/D16

Order codes G41/G42

G_D081_XX_00188
G_D081_XX_00199

Dimensions l and weights, see from Page 0/139.

0/138

Siemens D 81.1 2008

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1
General technical data
Assignment
Fig. 1
Frame size Brake

Fig. 2
Protective cover

Order code
F01
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Order code
H00
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Fig. 3
Rotary pulse encoder including protective cover
1XP8 012
LL 861 900 220
Order codes
Order code
G01, G02
G04
l
Weight
l
Weight
approx.
approx.
mm
kg
mm
kg

81
88
114
130

33
33
51.5
50

49
49
51.5
50

HOG9 D 1024 I
Order code
G05
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

HOG10 D 1024 I
Order code
G06
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

76
76
78.5
77

119
119
121.5
120

1LE1
100
112
132
160

5.9
7.8
11.9
30.7

0.4
0.4
0.7
0.7

Assignment
Fig. 4
Frame size Brake and rotary pulse encoder (on cover)
1XP8 012
LL 861 900 220
Order codes
Order codes
F01
F01
+ G01/G02
+ G04
l
Weight
l
Weight
approx.
approx.
mm
kg
mm
kg

0.9
0.8
1.3
1.5

76
76
78.5
77

1.9
1.9
2.4
2.7

1.5
1.5
2
2.3

2.2
2.2
2.7
3

Fig. 5
Separately driven fan
HOG9 D 1024 I
Order codes
F01
+ G05
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

HOG10 D 1024 I
Order codes
F01
+ G06
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

157
164
192.5
207

200
207
235.5
250

Order code
F70
l

mm

mm

Weight
approx.
kg

86.5
81.5
116
135.5

30
30
40
40

2.4
2.6
3.8
6.5

1LE1
100
112
132
160

130
137
165.5
180

6.8
8.6
13.2
32.2

157
164
192.5
207

Assignment
Fig. 6
Frame size Brake and separately driven fan
Order codes
F01 + F70

7.8
9.7
14.3
33.4

7.4
9.3
13.9
33

8.1
10
14.6
33.7

mm

Weight
approx.
kg

Fig. 7
Separately driven fan and rotary pulse encoder (under cover)
Order codes
Order codes
Order codes
F70
F70
F70
+ G01/G02
+ G04
+ G05
l
Weight
l
Weight
l
Weight
approx.
approx.
approx.
mm
kg
mm
kg
mm
kg

Order codes
F70
+ G06
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

161.5
156.5
186
205.5

8.3
10.4
15.7
37.2

161.5
156.5
186
205.5

196.5
191.5
241
270.5

1LE1
100
112
132
160

3.3
3.4
5.1
8

161.5
156.5
186
205.5

Assignment
Fig. 8
Frame size Brake, separately driven fan and rotary pulse encoder (under cover)
Order codes
Order codes
Order codes
F01 + F70
F01 + F70
F01 + F70
+ G01/G02
+ G04
+ G05
l
Weight
l
Weight
l
Weight
approx.
approx.
approx.
mm
kg
mm
kg
mm
kg

4.3
4.5
6.2
9.2

161.5
156.5
186
205.5

Order codes
F01 + F70
+ G06
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

3.9
4.1
5.8
8.8

4.6
4.8
6.5
9.5

Fig. 9
Protective cover for separately driven fan
Order code
H00
l
mm

Weight
approx.
kg

Diameter
of the fan cover
mm

30
33
24
31

1.4
1.8
2.4
3

210
249
300
338

1LE1
100
112
132
160

196.5
191.5
241
270.5

9.2
11.2
17
38.7

196.5
191.5
241
270.5

10.2
12.3
18.1
39.9

196.5
191.5
241
270.5

9.8
11.9
17.7
39.5

246.5
241.5
291
320.5

10.5
12.6
18.4
40.2

Siemens D 81.1 2008

0/139

 Siemens AG 2008

IEC Squirrel-Cage Motors

Introduction motors 1LE1/1PC1

General technical data

Assignment
Fig. 10
Frame size Prepared for mountings only center hole
(for Brake order code F01 and/or rotary pulse
encoder order codes G01/G02/G04/G05/G06)
Order code G40
Order code
G40
l
Weight
approx.
mm
kg

Fig. 11
Prepared for mountings with shaft D12/D16
Order codes G41/G42

Order code
G41
l
mm

Weight
approx.
kg

11.3
7.5
10.3
5.6

0.15
0.15
0.3
0.4

Order code
G42
l
mm

Weight
approx.
kg

47.3
47.3
50.3
45.6

0.2
0.2
0.4
0.7

1LE1
100
112
132
160

0/140

0
0
0
0

0
0
0.1
0.2

Siemens D 81.1 2008